JP7327121B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays patterns on a display screen. In this type of game machine, for example, when a prize is won in an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a special game state such as a winning state that is advantageous to the player. Variable display is started. When the player wins the lottery, a specific pattern combination or the like is displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to a special game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In recent years, various efforts have been made to raise the level of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the level of attention paid to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

The present invention
an operation means provided on the front surface of the game machine and having an operation unit operated by a player in a predetermined direction;
A gaming machine comprising an effect execution means for executing an operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
a number-of-times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the operation valid period;
period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position during the operation valid period;
The effect execution means determines that the number of repetitions of reaching the first detection position by the number-of-times determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, or that the period determination means determines that the second detection position has been reached. means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the determined period reaches a predetermined period;
It is characterized in that the second detection position is set to be on the far side in the predetermined direction relative to the first detection position.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view of an inner frame. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back. It is a rear view of an inner frame. It is a rear view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a back pack unit. It is a front view of a front door frame. (a) A vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the top lamp portion, (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the light effect. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp section by disassembling it for each main configuration; (a) A schematic diagram showing a light irradiation state during low-speed rotation. (b) A schematic diagram showing a light irradiation state during high-speed rotation. FIG. 15(a) is a partially enlarged view of the front door frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 15(a). 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize winning process of an operation mouth. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by an MPU of a main control device; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on game production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flow chart showing a change start process; (a) A schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, (b) A schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. (a) A flowchart showing a pending display control command response process by the MPU of the display control device, (b) a schematic diagram showing a state of pending display. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation|holding advance notices by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending|holding command by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for holding|maintenance notice effects by MPU of an alerting|reporting / effect|presentation control apparatus. (a) Schematic diagram showing types of pending icons, (b) Schematic diagram showing outline of notice effect. (a) A schematic diagram showing an outline of the first type of advance notice effect, (b) A schematic diagram showing an outline of the second type of notice effect. It is the perspective view which looked at the front door frame from the front. (a) A perspective view of the effect button device seen from the front of the gaming machine, (b) a side view of the effect button device. It is an exploded perspective view showing the performance button device exploded for each main configuration. It is a perspective view of the production button device in a state where the side cover is omitted. It is a partial cutaway view of the effect button device. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation block disassembled for each main configuration; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the button unit exploded for each main configuration; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of an operation unit that mainly includes a button unit; It is a sectional view of an operation block. 3A is a perspective view of an operation block in an operable state; FIG. 3B is a sectional view of the operation block in an operable state; FIG. It is a perspective view of the production|presentation button device used as a 2nd form. It is a perspective view which shows a lift mechanism. (a) A perspective view of a rotor, (b) a plan view of a power transmission mechanism. (a) A cross-sectional view of a lift mechanism in a first form, (b) a cross-sectional view of a lift mechanism in a second form. (a) Schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from the first mode to the second mode, (b) Schematic diagram showing the movement of the lift mechanism when switching from the second mode to the first mode. (a) A side view of the production button device in the first form, (b) A sectional view of the production button device in the first form. (a) A side view of the production button device in the second form, (b) A sectional view of the production button device in the second form. (a) A side view of the production button device in the third form, (b) A sectional view of the production button device in the third form. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of operation in the case of the first form. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of operations in the case of the second form; (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the degree of expectation for a big hit, (b) A schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for 1st special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the effect pattern and the start timing of the operation suggestion. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for super reach A and B. FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for super reach C. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect A. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the first special effect C. Schematic diagram showing the movement of the effect button device in the second embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the positions of operation buttons and detection positions; (a) A schematic diagram for supplementing the flow of display during the ready-to-win display, (b) a schematic diagram showing types of effects added to characters. 3A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between an effect level and an effect level change trigger, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing an effect update pattern. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special production|presentation execution process for 2nd parts. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for execution of linked display; It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect in the second part. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of the second special effect and the interlocking target. It is the schematic which shows the light emission part and movable production|presentation apparatus of an annular illumination part. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the positions of operation buttons and detection positions; It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd special effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd special production|presentation execution. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a notification target and a shift pattern of a light emitting target; It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when the second special effect A is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when the second special effect B is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when the second special effect C is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing a shift pattern when the second special effect D is executed. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing division of positions of operation buttons in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the amount of protrusion and the generated torque. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the third special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 3rd special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd special production execution processing. 4 is a flowchart showing torque change processing; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the third special effect occurs. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the third special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the third special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the display mode in the fifth embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing an overview of display in a second display mode, (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of display in a third display mode. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between display mode and variable display time; It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing a process for the third normal game state. It is a flow chart showing the operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state. It is a flow chart showing the process for the second normal game state. It is a flow chart showing an operation corresponding process for the second normal game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the fourth special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the fourth special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 6th special effects in 6th Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the first half part; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing how a free state/hold state is switched; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the second half part; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for continuation. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the sixth special effect. It is a timing chart showing the movement of the performance button device. It is the schematic which contrasted the various 7th special effects in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 7th special production|presentation performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for the first part; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for the second part; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing switching start processing to the second mode; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing switching speed change processing; 4 is a timing chart showing how speeds are switched; It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the seventh special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the seventh special effect. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 8th special effect in an 8th embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the first half part; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the second half part; FIG. (a) Schematic diagram comparing various modes of effect button devices, (b) Schematic diagram comparing various eighth special effects. 10 is a flowchart showing form switching processing; It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the eighth special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the eighth special effect. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a ninth special effect setting process in the ninth embodiment; FIG. (a) Schematic diagrams comparing various ninth special effects, (b) Schematic diagrams comparing differences in protrusion amounts at respective protrusion levels. (a) A schematic diagram showing an arrival pattern to LV3, (b) A schematic diagram showing an arrival pattern to LV4. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the ninth special effect. It is a flow chart which shows processing for final game times. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the protrusion level; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a tenth special effect setting process in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 10th special effects. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of reservations and the protrusion level; (a) Schematic diagram comparing various eleventh special effects in the eleventh embodiment, (b) schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 11th special effects performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 29 is a flow chart showing an eleventh special effect main process; 4 is a flowchart showing torque varying processing; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance; It is a schematic diagram of the effect button device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows height position adjustment processing performed by MPU of an information and production control device. 4 is a flowchart showing position control processing; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing an operation stroke up to an operation detection position for each protrusion level; It is the schematic which contrasted various 12th special effects in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 12th special production|presentation performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the first half part; 10 is a flow chart showing repeated operation processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the second half part; FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the 12th special effect. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the positions of operation buttons and position control in the fourteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for repeated operation performed by MPU of an alerting|reporting / production|presentation control apparatus. 10 is a flow chart showing auto repeated hitting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing automatic continuous hitting torque control processing. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the relationship between the position of the operation button and the operation resistance;

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island facility of a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to the island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in an island facility such as a game arcade.

The main part 12 of the gaming machine is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and furthermore, the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11 are fixed. A lower support metal fitting 18 is fixed to the connecting portion with the . A support mechanism is constituted by the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism. is the leading end side of the rotation, the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward.

A detection sensor for detecting opening and closing of the game machine main section 12 is provided in the upper right portion of the outer frame 11, more specifically, in the connection portion between the upper frame portion and the right frame portion, and detection information from this detection sensor. The opening of the gaming machine main section 12 is monitored based on.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the game machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. and a unit 15 (see FIG. 3). In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 .

A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the front door frame 14 rotates on the right side with the left side as the rotation base side in front view. The tip side is rotatable forward. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the end of the inner frame 13 on the rotation base end side, and the back pack unit 15 rotates leftward in front view. It is rotatable rearward with the moving proximal end side and the right side being the rotating distal end side.

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 includes a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a cover body attached to the front surface of the frame body 20 and decorated with various decorations. 21 and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 13 . A substantially elliptical window portion 22 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the central portion of the front door frame 14 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. The portion 22 is covered from the rear side of the front door frame 14 with a glass unit 30 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the frame 20 is formed with a glass unit installation portion 23 so as to surround the window portion 22 . Specifically, the glass unit installation section 23 is arranged on the back side of the frame 20 and recessed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the window section 22 is arranged at the bottom thereof. The displacement of the glass unit 30 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted by being fitted in the glass unit installation portion 23 .

The glass unit 30 includes a pair of transparent front and rear glass panels 31 and a glass holder 32 that holds the glass panels 31 . The glass holder 32 has an annular frame formed along the window 22, and the glass panel 31 is accommodated in the area surrounded by the frame.

Referring again to FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 (specifically, the cover body 21) is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps that emit light according to the game situation. The light-emitting means is constituted by an annular illumination portion 24 along the periphery of the window portion 22, which incorporates a light-emitting body such as an LED. Speaker units 27 are provided at the upper left and upper right corners of the front door frame 14 to output sound effects according to the game state.

Below the window portion 22 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 28 and a lower bulging portion 29, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. The upper bulging portion 28 is provided with an upper plate 33 that opens upward, and the lower bulging portion 29 is provided with a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward. The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the side of a game ball launching mechanism described later. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 .

A performance button device 40 that is manually operated by the players is provided at a portion of the upper bulging portion 28 that is located in front of the upper plate 33 (game ball storage area). The effect button device 40 is an operating device for the player to give a predetermined instruction in the course of the game for the purpose of performing a predetermined effect on a display screen of a pattern display device (to be described later) or the like.

A game ball shooting handle 45 is provided so as to protrude to the near side at a position parallel to the lower bulging portion 29 . By operating the game ball shooting handle 45, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later.

A passage forming unit 50 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14, as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 50 is molded from a synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . An upper corner of the passage forming unit 50 is formed with a receptacle portion 53 that protrudes rearward and opens upward. An entrance portion and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage are formed. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section to be described later. A game ball entering the plate passage is guided to a lower plate 34. - 特許庁

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail based on FIG. 4 is a front view of the inner frame 13. FIG. In FIG. 4, as in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 60 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 . Inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to upper and lower ends of the inner frame base body 60 on the front side of the rotation proximal end (left side in FIG. 4). Bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 are provided in correspondence with the inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 on the rotation proximal end side (left side in FIG. 1) on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 . Axial portions are formed on the inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 , and the front door frame 14 is attached to the inner frame 13 by inserting the shaft portions into the bearing holes of the bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 of the front door frame 14 . It is rotatably supported. In other words, these inner frame metal fittings 71 and 72 and bearing metal fittings 57 and 58 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

A locking device 75 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 . The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door hook members 76 extending toward the front door frame 14 . A plurality of hook receiving members 59 extending toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the rear surface of the front door frame 14 so as to correspond to the front door hook members 76 (see FIG. 2). The front door frame 14 is locked in a closed state by hooking the front door hook member 76 on the hook receiving member 59 . Further, as shown in FIG. 3 , the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . By hooking these inner frame hook members 77 on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 , the main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed at the lower right corner of the inner frame base body 60 . The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75 , and its tip portion (keyhole portion) is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through a hole provided in the front door frame 14 . The front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13 by turning the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 clockwise, and the locking of the inner frame 13 from the outer frame 11 is unlocked by turning the key counterclockwise. .

A housing recess 61 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front surface of the inner frame base body 60 . The accommodation recess 61 is recessed to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 to define an accommodation space for accommodating the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 60 is fitted in the accommodation space. state.

The game board unit 80 includes a game area formation body 80a in which a game area PE is formed on the front side in which game balls flow down, and a game area formation body 80a provided on the back side of the game area formation body 80a. device, movable performance mechanism, decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) are integrated with the back block 80b in which the base body 251 is mounted. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front portion of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 30 (specifically, the glass panel 31 on the rear side). The glass unit 30 is arranged so that the gap between the rear side glass panel 31 and the front surface of the game area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE are arranged so as not to line up in front and back at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the game area PE.

The game board unit 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board unit 80, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear. In FIG. 6, the configuration that can be visually recognized through the game area forming body 80a is also indicated by a chain double-dashed line, so that the appearance of the game board unit 80 is similar to that of the actual game board unit 80. FIG.

The game area forming body 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 5, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operating openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation holes 83a, 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry part, and the detection result is obtained. A privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (distribution of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the bottom of the game area formation body 80a, and game balls that have not entered various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 89. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out hole 89, the game ball entering the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b will be referred to as "winning". express.

Also, in the game area forming body 80a, a large number of nail members 93 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 94 are arranged. It is These nail members 93, windmills 94, etc., divide the game ball's downflow path, and are adjusted so that winning to the above-described general winning opening 81 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the game area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover the central opening 85 from the back side of the game area forming body 80a. A variable display unit 252 belonging to the rear block 80b is positioned behind the central opening 85, and the variable display unit 252 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86). there is In FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the opening cover 86 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line, showing a state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Activation openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The operating ports 83a and 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a provided below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b provided immediately below the upper operating port 83a. The (lottery trigger ball entry portion) 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the movable piece. By changing the position of the movable piece by the drive unit, the ball enters the lower operation opening 83b. It is possible to switch between an open state (assisted state) in which it is possible or easy, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the same ball.

In the game area PE, the through gate 84 is arranged at a position upstream of the lower operation opening 83b (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 252), and the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84 is used as a trigger. If the lottery is won, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper working port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, for example, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 83b over the upper working port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 83b larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the game area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing member (opening/closing member) that opens and closes the large winning opening. means) is provided. The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (assisted state) in which entry of a game ball is possible or facilitated, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult. In addition, the opening and closing door is connected to a variable prize winning driving unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a. In the case of winning the transition to the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution state) (jackpot: when the result is a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state) so that it can be switched to the open state It has become.

Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 82 in the open/close execution mode, for example, a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds or 4 rounds) are performed, with the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) as one round. It is set so that the opening of the opening and closing door, which is the upper limit, is repeated.

Here, a supplementary description of the variable display unit 252 will be given. The variable display unit 252 has a symbol display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) symbols triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset activated line, and the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. The pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device.

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 80a so as to surround the central opening 85. As shown in FIG. The center frame 95 is fixed to the game area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the game area forming body 80a. , the clearance between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 30 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95). It is roughly divided into a route that bypasses from the left side and a route that bypasses from the left side.

A stage portion is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower portion of the center frame 95 so that the game ball can roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from inlets formed in the left and right frame portions of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion through warp passages also formed in the center frame 95 . The stage portion is configured so that the game ball that reaches the stage portion relatively easily flows into the upper operation port 83a, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. contributes to In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered with the transparent opening cover 86 so that the game ball that reaches the stage portion does not move toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252). Regulated.

The operation openings 83a and 83b are arranged at positions close to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since the transition to the special game state can be triggered by the winning of the operation ports 83a, 83b, the player pays attention to whether the operation ports 83a, 83b win or not, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is focused on the pattern display device 253 . The actuation openings 83a and 83b are provided near the variable display unit 252 as a means of concentrating on the periphery of the variable display unit 252 where the player wants to pay attention.

At the right end of the game area forming body 80a (rotating tip of the game board unit 80, which will be described later), a game area partitioning member 99 is arranged to partition and form the game area PE together with the guide rail 100, which will be described later. The game area partitioning member 99 is provided with a stopper member against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member is weakened and then flows down the game area PE. In other words, the stopper member is provided with a force reducing function for weakening the force of the game ball that collides with it.

Here, a supplementary description of the main display unit 87 will be given. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 99 , and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 30 . A main display portion D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the content displayed on the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display portion D includes an upper operation opening display portion DU for displaying the lottery result based on the prize winning in the upper operation opening 83a, and a lower operation opening display portion DU for displaying the lottery result based on the prize winning in the lower operation opening 83b. and a mouth display portion DL. In the display unit DU for the upper working port, the winning to the upper working port 83a triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning to the upper working port 83a. The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operation port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the fluctuation display is stopped in the upper operation port display unit DU, and the stop result is After a predetermined pattern corresponding to the result of the big win is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display unit DL for the lower working opening, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working opening 83b as a trigger, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 83b. The result of is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the lower operating port 83b is the winning result corresponding to the big win, the variable display is stopped in the display part DL for the lower operating port, and the stop result corresponds to the big win result. After the predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any one of the operation openings 83a, 83b, the corresponding operation opening display units DL, DU start the variable display, and after the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed, Until a predetermined stop display time (stop display period or fixed display period) elapses while the pattern is stopped and displayed (until the fixed display ends) corresponds to one game cycle. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. For example, a single display area may be provided, and a variable display may be performed in the single display area even if a prize is won in any of the operation openings 83a and 83b. In this case, it is also possible to make one game round from the start of the variable display in the single display area, to the end of the fixed display after the variable display is stopped.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a through-gate display section DS for displaying a lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 84 . In the through-gate display unit DS, the winning of the through-gate 84 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 84 is displayed. clarified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric power open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display part DS and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower operation opening 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 84 is retained up to four times at maximum. A pending number display is provided.

The main display portion D described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 30 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display portions. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Again referring to FIG. 4 , below the housing recess 61 (game board unit 80 ) in the inner frame base body 60 , there is a game machine for shooting game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 45 . A ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 to which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is attached to the inner frame base body 60 via a reinforcing plate to be described later. installed.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80. - 特許庁

The guide rail 100, together with a later-described game area partitioning member 99 (see FIG. 5), partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104→the exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, on the tip side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. It is attached to prevent the game ball that reaches the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the following game ball.

The guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely with a gap therebetween. A foul ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 55 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 55 through the clearance. becomes. The foul ball passage 55 communicates with the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game balls entering the foul ball passage 55 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1 and the like. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

In addition, the inner frame base body 60 has a locking device that can be switched between a locked state in which the game board unit 80 cannot be removed from the housing recess 61 and an unlocked state in which the game board unit 80 can be removed. Multiple are provided. The lock device has an abutting portion that abuts against the front surface of the game board unit 80 in a locked state, and the front door frame 14 of the game board unit 80 is opened when the abutting portion abuts against the front surface of the game board unit 80 . Displacement to the side is suppressed.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 60 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 60 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged so as to cover the . The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 60 and has a main body side upper tray passage 122 and a main body side lower tray passage 123 . The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. Under the passage forming member 121, a socket 53 (see FIG. 2) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted. An upper tray passage is arranged, and a front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage 123. - 特許庁

Below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 60, there is provided a shutter 124 for regulating the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123. As shown in FIG. The shutter 124 is supported by the inner frame base body 60 so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to block outflow of the game balls and a permitting position for permitting the outflow of the game balls. there is A biasing member that biases the shutter 124 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame base member 60, and the biasing force of the biasing member is , the shutter 124 stays at the blocking position. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage 122 or the main body side lower tray passage 123, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. . On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the socket 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14 pushes the shutter 124 back to the allowable position against the biasing force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are communicated with the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage, respectively, and movement of the game ball is permitted.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 60 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the back surface of the inner frame base body 60 on the rotation base end side (the right side in FIG. 8). Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing metal fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 60 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 60 in a closed state.

As already described, a central opening 64 is formed in the bottom portion of the accommodation recess 61 in the inner frame base body 60 so as to pass through the inner frame base body 60 in the thickness direction and open to the rear side of the inner frame base body 60 . The center opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 61 . Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the rear surface of the game board unit 80 will be described.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game area forming body 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the side of the game area forming body 80a, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game area forming body 80a to form a game area. The body 80a and the back block 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 serves as an arrangement area for movable production mechanisms, decorative members capable of emitting light, etc., and the rear side thereof includes a control device for controlling these various configurations and the variable display unit 252 (the pattern display device). 253).

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes toward the rear side of the inner frame base body 60, and the above-described pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 5) and its pattern display device are attached to the protruded portion. A display controller for driving H.253 is attached. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 60) so that the pattern display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side. Further, a notification/effect control device 143 is mounted on the rear surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/effect control device 143 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the output of sound, lamp display, and display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device, which will be described later, and the notification/effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a board box 141 made of resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/production control device 143 so as to cover the base body 96 from behind. The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mount 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main controller 162 mounted on the mount 161. there is The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 made of, for example.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are combined in an unopenable manner. The base and box cover are adapted to be unopenably joined. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after the package has been opened. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164 . When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the circuit board box 163 body is opened. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a pedestal sealing portion 165 . More specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has locking holes and locking pins in the same manner as the box sealing portion 164 . The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. As a result, when the board box 163 is illegally removed, the fact can be easily grasped.

In the front part of the base body 251, the part facing the lower back surface of the game area forming body 80a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation openings 83a and 83b, and downstream. A collection passage (not shown) is formed to gather at one place on the side. As a result, all the winning game balls such as the general winning opening 81 are gathered under the game board unit 80 through the recovery path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls collected under the game board unit 80 are discharged into the discharge passage by the collection passage. It should be noted that the out port 89 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the prize winning ports are drawn out into the discharge passage through the out port 89 .

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b includes, as detection sensors for the respective ball entry portions described above, a detection sensor for a general prize winning opening for detecting a game ball that has entered the general prize winning opening 81, and an operation opening 83a. , 83b, and a detection sensor for an operation port for detecting a game ball that has entered 83b. These various detection sensors constitute a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162 , and detection information (detection signals) from each detection sensor is output to the main controller 162 .

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by a back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board, and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, includes a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion protruding to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided on the external output terminal plate 213, and a wiring WH1 connecting the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side and the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the output terminals. Various signals output from the external output terminal plate 213 (output terminal) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC through the wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC determines the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc. based on these various signals. It is configured to be understood.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins 214 at the right end as seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins 214 are provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting it through the portion 133 . The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail 222 gently sloping downstream is connected to the side of the tank 221 , and a vertically extending case rail 223 is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222 . A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution portion 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224 .

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage. It is

At the lower end of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and control device collective unit 204 is attached so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing device 224, pressing the state return switch 245 clears the ball clogging.

The power/fire control device 243 has a power/fire control board housed in a board box 246 . The power supply/shooting control board generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launching of game balls according to the operation of the game ball shooting handle 45 by the player. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball shooting mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

A power switch 247 is provided in the power/launch control device 243 . By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cut off state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It is possible. For example, when the power supply is cut off according to a normal procedure such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the game machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the game machine to expose the rear part of the inner frame 13. FIG. On the other hand, when the locking device 75 restricts the opening of the game machine main section 12, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. In other words, the various switches described above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the game machine is closed. making it difficult.

In the game machine such as the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a big win or the like is executed based on the balls entering the operation holes 83a and 83b, and the result of the lottery is displayed on the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) provided in the game board unit 80. ). Therefore, during the game, the player's attention tends to be directed particularly to the game board unit 80 (especially the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253). In view of such circumstances, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) shown in the present embodiment is designed with consideration for the player, such as guaranteeing visibility when playing a game.

Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 11, the game board unit 80 (in particular, the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253) is displayed by the player while the pachinko machine 10 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall. is configured to be positioned in front of the face of the In other words, the player's face is positioned in front of the glass panel 31 and in front of the pattern display device 253 (specific area SE, which will be described later). As a result, the game board unit 80 (especially the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253) can easily fit in the field of view of the player P.

As already explained, when playing a game, it is necessary to manually operate the game ball shooting handle 45 to shoot a game ball. Therefore, the distance between the pachinko machine 10 and the player tends to be short. In this embodiment, a first movable effect device 300, which is a light-emitting type movable effect device, is arranged in a portion above the game board unit 80 in the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. Regarding the spread of the human visual field, although there are individual differences, it is about 180 to 200 degrees in the horizontal direction (the range that can be seen with both eyes at the same time is about 120 degrees), and in the vertical direction, it is about 60 degrees upward and 60 degrees downward. Approximately 70 degrees to the side. Therefore, when the player gazes at the pattern display device 253, there is a high possibility that the first movable effect device 300 is located in a blind spot out of the player's visual field. That is, the first movable effect device 300 is more likely to be out of the player's field of view (the range that can be seen without moving the eyes).

In particular, when the window portion 22 of the front door frame 14 is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the game board unit 80, the arrangement of the first movable effect device 300 becomes more constrained as shown in FIG. , the possibility of occurrence of the above-described inconvenience increases. In addition, even if the first movable effect device 300 is in the field of view of the player, if the first movable effect device 300 is positioned near the boundary between the inside and outside of the field of view, the color and movement will be different. It becomes difficult to grasp, and the recognition level (identification level) is significantly lowered.

For the above reasons, even if the first movable effect device 300 is used to perform the light effect, the player who is watching the display screen 253a cannot appeal well, and there is a possibility that the light effect may be overlooked. occurs. Therefore, even if the first movable effect device 300 is provided with a light effect function (a function of notifying and effecting the player), it is feared that it will not function well. In the first place, if the first movable effect device 300 is not provided with the function of effecting and notifying the player, but is provided with the function of notifying other players, the hall manager, etc., the above-mentioned inconvenience will occur. Although it does not occur, the above inconvenience will occur when the first movable effect device 300 is used as a means for effecting/notifying the player. Certainly, it is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned inconveniences by increasing the distance between the player and the gaming machine, but such a solution would cause other inconveniences such as a decrease in the visibility and operability of the game board unit 80. can invite

One of the features of the first movable effect device 300 shown in the present embodiment is that measures are taken to deal with the above inconveniences that occur when the first movable effect device 300 is provided with a light effect function. . Hereinafter, the first movable effect device 300 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12(a) and 13. FIG. FIG. 12(a) is a partial sectional view showing the internal structure of the first movable effect device 300 (partial sectional view along line AA in FIG. 10), and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view shown in FIG.

(First movable effect device 300)
As shown in FIG. 12(a), the first movable effect device 300 includes a light emitting device 301 as a core on which a light source is mounted and a housing 302 that forms the outer shell of the first movable effect device 300. A light emitting device 301 is housed in a housing 302 and fixed to the frame 20 and the cover 21 .

The housing 302 has a cover body 310 made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin material. The cover body 310 has a hemispherical shape that is open upward (see FIG. 12), and the upper open portion is covered with a lid body 320 that functions as a mounting portion for the frame body 20 and the like. By combining the cover body 310 and the lid body 320, the housing space for the light emitting device 301 is defined.

The lid 320 has a dish shape, and an opening 322 is formed in the bottom 321 of the lid 320 to connect the internal space of the lid 320 and the accommodation space. A relay substrate 330 is arranged on the bottom portion 321 so as to cover the opening portion 322 from the opposite side (upper side) of the housing area. The light emitting device 301 is electrically connected to the notification/production control device 143 via the relay board 330 and performs (operates) light production based on a signal from the notification/production control device 143 .

The light emitting device 301 accommodated in the housing 302 has a light emitting unit 350 as a control target of the notification/effect control device 143 . The light emitting unit 350 is composed of a columnar light emitting block 355 to which a plurality of light emitters 356 (specifically, LEDs) are attached, and a pedestal 351 to which the light emitting block 355 is fixed. The pedestal 351 has a cylindrical shape extending vertically (see FIG. 12), and is integrated with the housing 302 by fixing an upper flange portion 352 formed at the upper end portion to the bottom portion 321 . A lower flange portion 353 formed at the lower end functions as an attachment portion to which the light emitting block 355 is attached. A hollow portion of the pedestal 351 communicates with the opening 322 , and the light-emitting block 355 and the relay substrate 330 are connected by wiring through the hollow portion and the opening 322 .

In the present embodiment, the peripheral surface of the light emitting block 355 other than the portion facing the front side of the gaming machine (the side surface and the back surface: the portion on the side of the central axis CL1 to be described later) serves as the area where the light emitter 356 is arranged. there is This prevents the light from the light emitting block 355 from being directly emitted to the front of the gaming machine. More specifically, the irradiation range of light from the light emitting unit 350 (light emitting block 355) is restricted to the rear and oblique rear of the gaming machine.

The light emitting device 301 is equipped with a light reflecting mechanism that reflects light from the light emitting block 355 forward of the gaming machine. The light reflecting mechanism is movable, and when this light reflecting mechanism operates, the irradiation direction of the reflected light, that is, the irradiation direction of the light from the first movable effect device 300 is changed. Hereinafter, the variable light reflection mechanism that diversifies the irradiation direction of light will be referred to as a variable mechanism 340 .

(Variable mechanism 340)
The variable mechanism 340 includes a movable body 360 provided with a reflector 364 as light reflecting means, and a holder member 370 as holding means for holding the movable body 360. The holder member 370 is attached to the lid body 320. is integrated with the housing 302 by

First, the configuration related to attachment of the variable mechanism 340 to the lid 320 will be described. An annular convex portion 323 is formed on the bottom portion 321 of the lid 320 so as to surround the installation area (upper flange portion 352 ) of the light emitting unit 350 . The annular convex portion 323 has a cylindrical shape, and is configured such that its central axis line is coaxial with the opening portion 322 and the light emitting unit 350 (pedestal 351).

The holder member 370 has a cylindrical portion 371 surrounding the light emitting unit 350 , and the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 371 is configured to be equal to the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 323 . The holder member 370 is arranged such that the annular convex portion 323 is inserted therein, and the inner surface of the cylindrical portion 371 is in surface contact with the outer surface of the annular convex portion 323 . The central axis of the annular convex portion 323 and the central axis of the holder member 370 (cylindrical portion 371) are coaxial, and the holder member 370 is held by the lid 320 while being allowed to rotate about the central axis CL1. held. As long as the holder member 370 can be rotatably held, the detailed configuration of the holding structure is arbitrary.

A motor 381 is provided on the bottom portion 321 of the lid 320 as a driving portion for rotating the holder member 370 . The motor 381 is connected to the notification/effect control device 143 via the relay board 330 and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/effect control device 143 . By transmitting the driving force of the motor 381 to the holder member 370, the holder member 370 rotates about the central axis line CL1.

The cylindrical portion 371 of the holder member 370 is formed so that its lower end is at the same height as the lower end of the pedestal 351 of the light emitting unit 350, and the light emitting block 355 is located above the area surrounded by the holder member 370. is in a state of protruding downward. This prevents the light from the light emitting block 355 from being blocked by the holder member 370 .

A pair of left and right extending portions 372 extending to the same side (downward) as the light emitting block 355 are formed at the lower end portion of the holder member 370 . The extending portions 372 face each other across the light emitting unit 350 (specifically, the center axis CL1), and the shaft portion 373 is fixed so as to straddle the extending portions 372 .

The movable body 360 has a body portion 361 in which long plates are arranged side by side (see FIG. 12). Movable body 360 is held by holder member 370 in a state in which rotation (posture change) about shaft portion 373 is allowed by engagement between bearing hole 362 and shaft portion 373 .

The reflector 364 is arranged at one end of the body portion 361 , and the weight 363 is arranged at the other end of the body portion 361 . The weight of the weight 363 is set so that the center of gravity GP1 of the movable body 360 is closer to the other end than the shaft portion 373 (the center of rotation). By shifting the rotation center and the center of gravity GP1, the movable body 360 is tilted so that the reflector 364 is on the upper side and the weight 363 is on the lower side.

Here, the body portion 361 of the movable body 360 is formed with a stopper portion 366 that abuts against the holder member 370 (lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 371) to prevent further rotation. The standby state of the movable body 360 is a state in which the stopper portion 366 is in contact with the lower end portion of the cylindrical portion 371 and the movable body 360 is tilted. In this state, the center of gravity GP1 is off the center axis CL1.

When a drive signal is input to the motor 381 from the notification/production control device 143, the holder member 370 starts rotating about the central axis line CL1. Following this, the movable body 360 held by the holder member 370 also rotates.

In the initial stage when rotation is started from a standby state (stationary state), the rotation speed is low due to resistance such as friction, and as the rotation continues, it is accelerated and the rotation speed gradually increases. After the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed, it shifts to steady rotation. At this time, as the rotation speed increases, the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 also increases. As the centrifugal force increases in this way, the weight 363 rises and the reflector 364 falls against gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually decreases.

When the rotational speed of the movable body 360 slows down due to the motor 381 stopping, etc., the centrifugal force generated in the movable body 360 decreases. As the centrifugal force decreases in this way, the weight 363 descends and the reflector 364 rises due to gravity, and the inclination ANG1 of the movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane gradually increases.

Here, based on the operation mode of the variable mechanism 340, the flow of the light production by the first movable production device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12(b) and 14. FIG. FIG. 12(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the light effect, and FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the irradiation direction of light in each state.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the light effect starts at the timing t1, the output of the light emission signal (power supply) to the light emitter 356 of the light emission unit 350 is started, and the drive signal to the motor 381 is started. output is started. As a result, the reflector 364 of the movable body 360 emits light from the light emitting unit 350 toward the front of the gaming machine.

A reflecting surface 365 of the reflector 364 has a curved surface that is convex toward the side opposite to the center of rotation, thereby suppressing diffusion of reflected light. In other words, the light from the light-emitting unit 350 is emitted in the direction of the reflecting surface 365 while the spread of the light is suppressed by the reflecting surface 365 . In other words, the reflector 364 (reflecting surface 365 ) has the function of defining the irradiation direction (optical axis) of the light from the first movable effect device 300 .

The rotation speed gradually increases from timing t1 to timing t2 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The predetermined period is set so that at least the number of rotations of movable body 360 is greater than a predetermined number of times (once in the present embodiment). In this embodiment, the movable body 360 is of a rotary type. It is ensured that light is emitted toward the front of the game machine.

Here, the light irradiation mode from timing t1 to timing t2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(a). During this period, the reflector 364 (optical axis defined by the reflector) faces obliquely downward. Therefore, the light from the first movable effect device 300 is emitted obliquely downward. Specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 350 is emitted in the horizontal direction, but its direction is changed by the reflector 364 positioned on the extension thereof. The orientation of the reflector 364 is defined so that the light irradiation direction passes through the specific area SE in front of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a).

As already explained, the specific area SE is an area where the player P's head HD (specifically, eyes) is assumed to be located. Therefore, the player P is irradiated with the light to the specific area SE. Hereinafter, the state in which the movable body 360 is tilted and the specific region SE is irradiated with light is referred to as a first irradiation state. Since light is emitted toward the player P in the first illumination state, the player can recognize that the light is illuminated.

After that, at the timing ta2 when the rotational speed increases and reaches the predetermined speed, as shown in FIG. change as As a result, the irradiation direction of the light becomes substantially horizontal, and the irradiation of the light toward the specific area SE is avoided. In other words, the light from the first movable effect device 300 passes over the head of the player P, and irradiation of the light toward the player P is avoided. Hereinafter, a state in which light irradiation toward the specific area SE is avoided (a state in which the light irradiation direction changes from the first irradiation state toward the outside of the game machine) is referred to as a second irradiation state.

Even in the second irradiation state, the player P can visually confirm how the first movable effect device 300 is blinking. However, in this case, the amount of light reaching the eyes of the player P is less than in the first illumination state. As a result, even when the first movable effect device 300 is directly viewed, it is suppressed that it causes discomfort such as glare to the player. In this embodiment, the light is irradiated through the curved cover body 310, and the light is diffused when passing through the cover body 310. FIG. Therefore, when the first movable effect device 300 is directly viewed in the second irradiation state, the player can be given the impression that the first movable effect device 300 is blinking.

After the first movable effect device 300 enters the second irradiation state, the light effect is continued in the second irradiation state for a period longer than the period of the light effect in the first irradiation state. In other words, the output of the light emission signal (power supply) to the light emission unit 350 is continued until the timing of t3 when the light effect ends. When the output of the light emission signal is stopped at the timing of t3, the light emission unit 350 is extinguished. After that, the output of the drive signal to the motor 381 is stopped at the timing of t4.

When the motor 381 stops, the rotational speeds of the movable body 360 and the holder member 370 rapidly decrease due to resistance such as friction, and the return to the standby state is completed at the timing of t5. However, since the light emitting unit 350 has already been extinguished at the timing t3, the player is not irradiated with light during this recovery process.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is arranged such that a part of the main part 12 (front door frame 14) of the game machine bulges out toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when it is installed on an island facility or the like in a game hall. A second movable effect device 400, which is a movable effect device, is arranged in this bulging portion. Here, the configuration of the second movable effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 15. FIG. 15(a) is a partial enlarged view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front, and FIG. 15(b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first movable effect device 300 (partial cross-sectional view along line BB in FIG. 15(a)). be.

(Second movable effect device 400)
As shown in FIG. 2, a portion of the cover body 21 of the front door frame 14 located above the window portion 22 is formed with a bulging portion 435 that bulges forward in the game. The bulging amount of the bulging portion 435 gradually increases from the left and right ends toward the center, and bulges forward in the gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 15(1), a central portion of the bulging portion 435, more specifically, a portion behind the first movable effect device 300 that constitutes a part of the annular electric decoration portion 24 is provided with a second movable effect. A housing portion 436 for housing the device 400 is formed. In other words, two game devices are accommodated in the bulging portion 435 with the first movable effect device 300 on the front side and the second movable effect device 400 on the rear side.

The housing portion 436 has a concave shape that is open upward, and a part of the second movable effect device 400 is exposed through the open portion. The second movable effect device 400 has a decorative body 410 with decoration such as a pattern on its outer peripheral portion. The decoration body 410 is held by a holding portion 438 formed on the side wall portion 437 of the housing portion 436 so as to be rotatable back and forth about the rotation center axis CL2. The decorative body 410 rotates about the rotation center axis CL2, thereby moving between a standby position where projection from the housing portion 436 is suppressed and an effect position where the projection is projected outward (upward) from the housing portion 436. It is possible.

Three face portions are formed on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 410 so as to be aligned in the rotational direction of the decorative body 410 . Specifically, a first plane portion 411, a second plane portion 412, and a curved portion 413 sandwiched between the plane portions 411 and 412 are formed, and the cross section is formed to have a substantially fan shape. A pivotal portion of the fan-shaped decoration 410 is held by the holding portion 438, and the rotation center axis CL2 and the center of gravity GP2 of the decoration 410 are deviated from each other.

As shown in FIG. 15(b1), when the decorative body 410 is placed at the standby position, the second flat portion 412 contacts the rear wall portion 439 of the housing portion 436, thereby rotating the decorative body 410 by its own weight. movement is blocked. That is, the rear wall portion 439 functions as a stopper. In this state, the first flat portion 411 is positioned substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the frame 20 , and the open portion of the accommodating portion 436 is closed by the first flat portion 411 . Further, the curved surface portion 413 remains inside the housing portion 436, and the curved surface portion 413 cannot be visually recognized from the outside.

The second movable effect device 400 is provided with a solenoid 420 that constitutes driving means for the decorative body 410 . The solenoid 420 is connected to the notification/production control device 143 and configured to operate based on a signal from the notification/production control device 143 . When executing the production by the second movable production device 400 , a drive signal is output to excite the solenoid 420 to the notification/production control device 143 . When the solenoid 420 is energized, the plunger of the solenoid 420 pushes the decorative body 410, causing the decorative body 410 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the decoration 410 reaches the rendering position, the projection 415 formed on the second flat portion 412 of the decoration 410 hits the stopper portion 440 provided in the housing portion 436. As shown in FIG. This prevents further rotation in the predetermined direction. In this state, the curved surface portion 413 protrudes from the housing portion 436, and the curved surface portion 413 is allowed to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A light-emitting body (LED) is built in the decorative body 410, and when an effect using the second movable effect device 400 is executed, the light from the light-emitting body passes through the curved surface portion 413 to the front side of the gaming machine. is irradiated to By causing the decorative body 410 to emit light in this way, the change in appearance of the second movable effect device 400 is emphasized.

When the effect by the decorative body 410 is finished, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 420 is stopped, and the solenoid 420 is in a non-excited state. As a result, the decorative body 410 returns from the presentation position to the standby position due to its own weight (see FIG. 15(b)→FIG. 15(a)). By the way, the second movable effect device 400 may be provided with biasing means such as a spring, and the decoration body 410 may be moved to the standby position by the biasing force of the biasing means.

(Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the blocks of FIG.

A main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162 is equipped with an MPU 602 . The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. It is an element containing a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 605 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242, various detection sensors, and the like. The power supply/emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605 , and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605 .

As part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a that detects winning to the general winning opening 81, a detection sensor 391b that detects winning to the variable winning device 82, a detection sensor 391c that detects winning to the variable winning device 82, A detection sensor 391d for detecting winning to the upper working opening 83a, a detection sensor 391e for detecting winning to the lower working opening 83b, and a detection sensor 391f for detecting entering the through gate 84 are connected to the main controller. In the MPU 602 of 162, a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) to each ball entry section is performed. Further, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on winnings to the upper working port 83a and the lower working port 83b, and executes a support generating lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84. - 特許庁

An output side of the MPU 602 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242 and a notification/production control device 143. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion such as the operation ports 83a and 83b described above, for example. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, 15 game balls are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the upper operation port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower operation port 83b is output. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 143 . In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing body (for example, the shutter member 88) of the variable prize winning device 82, an electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b, and A main display unit 87 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section so that the variable winning device 82 is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display portion of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 602 .

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. Through this external output terminal board 213, ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the game hall side management control device (hall computer HC). Information about lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This enables the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, and the like.

The blackout monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power/launch control device 243, and the blackout monitoring board 605 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 243. is provided with the ability to monitor The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 601, the payout control device 242, etc., generate the necessary operating power for each, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power/shooting control device 243 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The notification/production control device 143 is provided with a notification/production control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. A RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not an essential configuration that the ROM and the RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and they may be individually integrated into chips. The MPU of the notification/production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp section 24, the speaker section 27, the movable production devices 300 and 400, etc. provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It also controls the display control device 142 .

The display control device 142 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 143 . In this case, in the notification/effect control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 253 changes the pattern display mode (for example, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, the content of the ready-to-win effect, etc.) and the pattern (the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed upon completion of the variable display) is determined.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 87 (main display section D), the outline setting of the pattern display of the pattern display device 253, and the like. , as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 17, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging jackpot types such as variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results, and symbols The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the display device 253 is off and fluctuating, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the operation opening display section DL of the main display unit 87, A variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the pattern in the DU and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253 is used. Further, an electric accessory open counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604 . In the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a retained ball as an acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the operation ports 83a and 83b. Stored in area 632 .

The reserved ball storage area 632 includes a reserved area RE for an actuation opening and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE comprises a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7 and an eighth area Ra8, and is operated. According to the winning history to the mouths 83a and 83b, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1. ~Ra8. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when the winning to the operation openings 83a and 83b occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of →fifth area Ra5→sixth area Ra6→seventh area Ra7→eighth area Ra8. Since the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 are provided in this way, up to four winning histories for each of the operation ports 83a and 83b (total eight) are reserved and stored. In addition, the total number of reservations storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 632, in the total number of reservations storage area, the number of storage of the reservation information acquired and stored based on the winning to the operation openings 83a, 83b is stored. Information for specifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the operation opening display portions DL and DU of the main display unit 87, At the start of one game round, winning/failure determination and the like are performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a and 83b.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 621 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 603 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described.

In the success/failure table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information likewise consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and 10 types from "1" to "10" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", and "67". , ``100'', ``131'', ``164'', ``195'', ``223'', ``241'', and ``272''. are mapped. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in the numerical range of random number information "0" to "299" that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low-probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high-probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten pieces, which is more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability mode is 1/30, and the high-probability mode is higher than the low-probability mode. Higher chance of winning. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a and 83b.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603 . Then, as such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (low-probability special game result) and a probability-variable jackpot result (high-probability special game result) are set.

As for the normal jackpot result, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and after the support mode shifts, the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times). It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. In addition, after the end reference number of times has passed, the mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode.

The probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in a big winning state and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0 to 9" correspond to normal jackpot results, and "10 to 29" correspond to probability variable jackpot results, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary.

In the present embodiment, a difference is provided so that distribution based on winning to the lower operating port 83b is more advantageous for the player than distribution based on winning to the upper operating port 83a. Specifically, there are two results with different degrees of advantage for the variable jackpot results, more specifically, the 16R variable jackpot result with the number of rounds “16” and the 4R variable jackpot result with the number of rounds “4”. In the case where the distribution based on the prize winning to the lower operation port 83b results in a definite variable jackpot result, compared to the case where the distribution based on the winning prize to the upper operation port 83a results in a definite variable jackpot result, the 16R probability variable jackpot result is likely to occur. ing.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the operating holes 83a and 83b. Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603 . However, in the game round to shift to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines whether to generate reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the configuration related to the variable display of symbols in each game cycle and the content of the same variable display. 18 and 19 will be referred to as needed in the following description. 18 and 19 are schematic diagrams for explaining the contents displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. FIG.

The display control device 142 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 19(a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers. (see FIG. 19(j)) are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. On the display screen 253a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the display screen 253a is designed so that three symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is designed to be Five effective lines are set on the display screen 253a, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any of the activated lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a probability variable big win result.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 pattern row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called a third pattern row (or a third pattern row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, some of them may be A combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and in some cases where the probability variable jackpot results occur and when the normal jackpot results occur, For example, a combination of the same non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 253 is not limited to the one described above and may be arbitrarily selected. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the vertical direction.

In the display screen 253a, a reserved display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the reservation display area NE, the same number of unit reservation display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the operation opening 83a, 83b are arranged in the left and right direction Retention number display area divided Da is provided.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a, 83b, the maximum number of reservations is 4 (8 in total), and the number of reservations display area Da corresponds to this, and the first unit reservation Display area Da1, second unit reserved display area Da2, third unit reserved display area Da3, fourth unit reserved display area Da4, fifth unit reserved display area Da5, sixth unit reserved display area Da6, seventh unit reserved display area Da7 and an eighth unit reserved display area Da8 are set. A pending icon MP is displayed as a predetermined pending display image in these unit pending display areas.

For example, when the game ball wins the operation openings 83a, 83b, the number of reservations is 0, and the number of reservations (total number of reservations) becomes 1 due to this winning, only the first unit reservation display area Da1 hold icon MP is displayed. When the number of reservations is 4 by winning the operation ports 83a and 83b, the reservation icon MP is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Da1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Da4. It's becoming In addition, in FIG.18(b), the case where the number of reservations is three is illustrated.

In addition, in the pending display area NE, a pending icon MP corresponding to the game round to be executed (in progress) is arranged horizontally with the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1). An execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided. In the present embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged on the left side of the pending number display area Da, but their positional relationship and the like are arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged on the right side of the pending number display area Da.

When the game cycle ends and the next game cycle is started, the pending icon MP displayed in the pending number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) is shifted to the execution target display area Db ( move). When there are other pending icons MP being displayed in the pending number display area Da, these pending icons MP are displayed in the unit pending display area near (adjacent to) the execution target display area Db along with the shift. shift to For convenience of explanation, the side closer to the execution target display area Db is hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side", and the side opposite to the execution target display area Db is referred to as the "upstream side".

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the game results are displayed in the open/close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display can be the special display result in the game turn that resulted in the game result, the stop display result after the start of the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 253. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display before being derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

The contents displayed on the display screen 253a will be described in more detail. First, in a state where the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row is finished, and further, when the variable display of symbols in the lower symbol row is finished, the player hits one of the activated lines and the symbols are displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols to which the numbers that make up the combination are attached. displayed. When a big win occurs, the main patterns forming the reach line and the main patterns attached with the numbers forming the combination of the winning patterns are stopped and displayed on the reach line to display the patterns in the middle pattern row in a variable manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform effects, and those that perform reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach patterns. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the operating port display portions DL and DU of the main display unit 87 and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern when the symbol display device 253 starts varying the symbols.

When determining the variable display time in the pattern display device 253 and the main display unit 87 (more specifically, the display unit for operation port DL, DU), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, the variable display time table of the ROM 603 Storage area 623 is referenced. Also, in the MPU 602, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE are used to determine the stop result in the result display section for the operation port. , the stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to open state.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , the description of these various processes is omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the states of the detection sensors are determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604 (lottery counter buffer 631).

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 604 (lottery counter buffer 631).

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 84 is executed. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric work holding area. The value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 633 on condition that the number of stored role product pending storage is less than 4. Then, when the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning processing for the through gate is ended.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the working openings accompanying the winning of the working openings 83a and 83b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Winning process for working opening)
Here, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (won a prize) into the upper working opening 83a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the subsequent step S203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side of information indicating that the game ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. As a result, the hole computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper working hole 83a. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc. is performed, and the prize winning processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operation opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S205, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls is set. Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S205 are transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing to be described later.

In subsequent step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side, information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 83b. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower opening 83b. After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S204, and the prize winning processing ends.

Incidentally, when both the processes of steps S201 and S205 are negatively determined, that is, when there is no ball hit in either the upper working opening 83a or the lower working opening 83b, the prize winning process is terminated as it is.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the number N of starting suspension storage stored in the suspension number storage area FE of the suspension ball storage area 632, more specifically, the information acquisition process out of the upper working opening 83a and the lower working opening 83b. It is determined whether or not the start suspension memory number N related to the triggering opening is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If the number N of starting pending memories is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is. , the total pending number (hereinafter referred to as common pending number CRN) stored in the pending number storage area FE in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the following step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 is stored in the free storage area of the reservation area RE for the operation opening. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common pending number CRN incremented by one in step S302. After executing the storage process, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, display update processing of the pending number display portion of the main display unit 87 (main display portion D) is executed. In the display update process, when the winning destination of this time is the upper working port 83a, the display of the upper working port reserved number display part is updated, and when the winning destination of this time is the lower working port 83b, the reserved number for the lower working port is updated. Update the number display.

The reserved number display unit for the upper working opening is composed of four LEDs, and is configured so that the number of lit LEDs and the reserved number related to the upper working opening 83a match. When the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 83a increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly. Similarly, the reserved number display portion for the lower working opening is composed of four LEDs, and is configured such that the number of lit LEDs and the reserved number related to the lower working opening 83b match. When the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 83b increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of lit LEDs accordingly.

In subsequent steps S306 and S307, the notification/production control device 143 and the display control device 142, which are sub-side (secondary side) control devices, recognize that a prize has been awarded to the operation ports 83a and 83b, and a suspension described later is performed. Confirmation processing for pending notice and processing for setting pending commands, which are processing for executing the notice, are executed, and this information acquisition processing ends. The pending command includes information as to which of the upper working openings 83a and the lower working openings 83b is based on winning a prize.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process of step S307 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 142 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. Upon receiving the pending command, the display control device 142 executes processing for changing the display in the pending number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the pending number.

Specifically, when the display control device 142 receives the same pending command via the notification/production control device 143, the pending icon MP is displayed (for example, added) in the pending number display area Da. Execute the process. In the pending number display area Da, the pending images are displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the common pending number CRN is 1, the pending image is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 at the left end, and the common pending If the number CRN is 8, the pending image is displayed in the eighth unit pending display area Da8 from the left. A detailed description of each process in steps S306 and S307 will be given later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242 . In addition, when various commands such as a command for performance such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, a hold command, and a shift command to be described later are set, it is transmitted to the notification / performance control device 143 .

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604 .

In the following step S403, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control processing, big hit determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 253, display control of the main display unit 87, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S403, it progresses to step S404 and executes a game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this game state transition processing. Details of the game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 provided in the lower working opening 83b is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information acquired from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not the electric role product 91 is placed in the open state. A lottery is carried out, and opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed when the electric role open state is won. In addition, display control of the through-gate display section DS is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the power opening lottery.

As already explained, as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this process, if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the high frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role open state is won, and one time Set a longer open time. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric accessory 91 is won and the open state of the electric accessory 91 occurs multiple times, the next open state is started after the end of one open state. Set the closing time to be shorter than the opening time of one time.

Incidentally, when shifting to the open/close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 .

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, on the condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power/shooting control device 243, the solenoid 111 of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is activated once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec). to excite the As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604 . Also, in step S409, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game round control processing)
Next, the game round control processing in step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 to 27 and the like.

In the game round control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress at step S501. When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 are not executed. End the control process.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portions DL and DU for the operation port of the main display unit 87 are performing variable display or fixed display. If it is not during the game round, the process proceeds to the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505. In the game turn start processing, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the total number of start-reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". When the common pending number CRN is “0”, it means that pending information is not stored in the pending ball storage area 632 . Therefore, this game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504 data setting processing for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 632 for variable display is executed, Furthermore, in step S505, after executing the variation start processing for starting the variation display of the pattern on the display parts DL and DU for the operation port of the main display unit 87 and the variation display of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display device 253, this End the game round control process.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(data setting processing)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, of the starting hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. In subsequent step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the reservation information) stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra8 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower side. 1st area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3, fifth area Ra5→fourth area Ra4, sixth area Ra6→fifth area Ra5, seventh area Ra7→th The data in each area is shifted in the order of 6th area Ra6, 8th area Ra8→7th area Ra7.

In the subsequent step S604, a shift command, which is information for making the notification/production control device 143 recognize that the data in the reservation area RE has been shifted, is set. After that, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 142 via the notification/effect control device 143 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 23). By receiving the shift command, the display control device 142 executes a process for changing the display in the pending number display area Da for the operating port in accordance with the decrease in the pending number.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, the success/failure determination process for judging whether or not the reservation information referred to in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information obtained from the information for judging the jackpot, ie, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, when the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the grasped information corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning/failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning/failing table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the grasped information is used as a jackpot. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, a type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the ball entering the upper working port 83a, the distribution table for the upper working port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower working port 83b. If so, the sorting table for the lower working port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In subsequent step S704, based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot election is the probability variable jackpot result (16R probability variable jackpot result, 4R probability variable jackpot result). If the result is a variable probability big win, stop result setting processing for the variable probability big win is executed in step S705, and if the result is not a variable probability big win, stop result setting processing for the normal big win is executed in step S706. Also, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S707 stop result setting processing for the time of loss is executed. Incidentally, the probability variable jackpot result is roughly divided into the 16R probability variable jackpot result and the 4R probability variable jackpot result. In the case of the probability variable jackpot result, it is determined by the above distribution whether the result is the 16R probability variable jackpot result or the 4R probability variable jackpot result.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to for information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . In addition, in steps S705 and S706, the information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM604. Specifically, the variable probability jackpot flag is stored in step S705, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S706.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

(Processing for setting variable display time)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable probability jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 .

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach indication. The reach determination table stored in the ROM 603 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of the reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referred to for this time. Variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S804, the variation display time information is stored in the variation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. ). After that, the setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a losing result and the lottery for the occurrence of the reach is won, the reach display is executed. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with normal reach display and super reach display which are different from each other in variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each normal reach display and super reach display is set in the reach generation variable display time table, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained. is obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined.

In more detail, the variable display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the probability variable jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the normal jackpot result, the combination of non-specific patterns can be stopped and displayed. , a variable display time is set.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 is referred to in step S805, and the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, the setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of common reservations CRN increases. However, it is not limited to this, for example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of common reservations CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of common reservations CRN, the shorter the variable display time. . In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. Although the occurrence variable display time table is set, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the variable display time to be easily selected and the variable display time to be difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the winning is reached. may be configured. Also, the variable display time table for probability variable jackpot, the variable display time table for normal jackpot, the variable display time table for loss reach, and the variable display time table for complete loss may be individually set. As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined using parameters such as the presence or absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the like.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 26), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S708, the fluctuation start command and the type command are set in step S709. The variable start command includes information on presence/absence of reach occurrence and information on variable display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, loss result information, and the like.

The variation start command and the type command set at step S709 are transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/effect control device 143 determines the emission pattern of the annular illumination portion 24 and the output pattern of the sound from the speaker portion 27 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and outputs the determined effect. , the ring-shaped illumination section 24 and the speaker section 27 are controlled so that the contents of the above are executed.

In addition, the notification/production control device 143 transmits the variation start command and the type command to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 142 determines a variable display pattern for the symbol display device 253 in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and the symbol display device performs the determined variation display pattern. H.253 is displayed and controlled. After that, in step S710, after starting the variable display of the pattern on the corresponding one of the operation port display portions DL and DU of the main display unit 87, the variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 24), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progressing process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 27), as described above. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operating opening display portions DL and DU of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S508. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any one of the above steps S705 to S707 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the operating port display units DL and DU. It controls the operation port display units DL and DU.

In the subsequent step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S509 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification/production control device 143 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 142 receives the variation end command, and displays (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the pattern fluctuation display on the main display unit 87 (specifically, the operation port display units DL and DU) of the first game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display ends, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the game result of the current game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 604 stores either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variable jackpot flag. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, in step S904, a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically Set "16" or "4". The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the big winning opening of the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. In the big winning opening opening/closing process, when the big winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning driving unit is brought into a driven state on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. open up. In addition, when the big winning hole is open, on condition that a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the big winning hole or that a predetermined number of game balls have won, the variable winning driving unit is activated. The driving state is stopped and the big prize winning opening is closed.

In the following step S906, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated. When the value of the round counter area RC is "0", in step S907, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, when the variable probability big win flag is stored in the RAM 604, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. Also, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game rounds continues 100 times, and then the game shifts to the normal game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S908, after the end processing of the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state transition processing is ended. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the stored flags of the normal jackpot flag and probability variable jackpot flag are erased.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/production control device 143 and the display control device 142)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 142. FIG.

An MPU 912 is mounted on a notification/production control board 911 provided in the notification/production control device 143 . The MPU 912 includes a ROM 913 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 912, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 913. A RAM 914 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 913 and the RAM 914 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 912, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 912 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 912, and commands for game round control (information for game round control) such as the variation start command, the type command and the variation end command, which have already been described, are sent from the main control device 162. receive. It also receives pending display control commands (suspended display control information) such as shift commands and pending commands, and open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

The output side of the MPU 912 is connected to the annular illumination portion 24 and the speaker portion 27 provided on the front door frame 14 and the display control device 142, as already described. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/production control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 142 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 142 includes a display control board 951 on which an MPU 952, which is an element in which a program ROM 953 and a work RAM 954 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 955, a character ROM 956, and a video RAM 957 are mounted. It has It is not essential that the program ROM 953 and the work RAM 954 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 952, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 955 (specifically generation of an internal command for the VDP 955). More specifically, in the MPU 952, based on the command transmitted from the notification/production control device 143, the pattern display device 253 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game round, and a process related to a pending notice to be described later. is executed, and drawing processing is executed for the VDP 955 in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253 a of the pattern display device 253 .

The program ROM 953 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 952 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 954 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 952 . These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 954 .

The VDP 955 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 253 . Since the VDP 955 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 955 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 952 and the video RAM 957 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 956 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 . The character ROM 956 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

In the character ROM 956, image data (suspended icon MP) to be displayed in the suspended display area NE of the pattern display device 253 and image data for the division frame to be displayed in the execution target display area Db are stored in the character ROM 956 as part of the above data. and an image data storage area for notice effect 972 for storing image data to be displayed when the notice effect described later is executed are provided. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 956 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 956 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 956 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 953 .

The video RAM 957 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 957, the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed. The video RAM 957 is provided with a suspension display area 981 and an execution display area 982 corresponding to the suspension display area NE.

In the reservation display area 981, first to eighth unit areas are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 to eighth area Ra8 in the reservation area RE for the operating port. In the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da8 of the pending number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the pending icon MP is displayed according to the pending display information (data) written in each unit area. In the unit reserved display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to the unit areas in which data is not set, no image is displayed or the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

The execution display area 982 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 253a, the suspension icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 982. FIG. When the data is not set, the background image on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is displayed.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a is specified by the notification/production control device 143 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specified result. Details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 142 . Specifically, in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143, a variable display control process is executed as part of a regular process started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An outline of the mode and the like are specified. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 253 is performing variable display or fixed display of symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, this variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, this variable display control process is terminated after executing a process for starting variation, which will be described later, in step S1003.

Returning to the description of step S1001, if the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the variable display control process is terminated after the mid-variation process is executed in step S1005. The variation mid-process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game cycle started by the process for starting the variation.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the process advances to step S1006, and after the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S1006, the fluctuation display control processing ends. In the fluctuation ending process, the fluctuation display of symbols and the effect being executed are ended (determined and stopped) so as to correspond to the reservation information related to the game round. In this processing, the driving control of the speaker section 27 and the annular illumination section 24 is performed to produce an effect corresponding to the definite stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 142, the process for ending the variation ends. The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the design display device 253 to stop the design determination based on the received determination command.

(Processing for start of fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31, a supplementary description of the fluctuation start processing in step S1003 will be given. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for a game turn based on receiving a variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 . In the process for starting fluctuation, settings such as ready-to-win display and pending notice effects, which will be described later, are performed as effects for game rounds. Here, the processing regarding the setting of the ready-to-win display will be described, and the processing regarding the setting of the pending notice effect will be described later.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and the information on the occurrence of reach and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as already explained, when the variation start command is transmitted from the main controller 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1101, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read out, and game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified from the command. Then, in step S1101, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence in the case of non-winning in the jackpot, and variable display time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 912 .

In the subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game cycle to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result, based on the information grasped in step S1101. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, in the case of a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the subsequent step S1103, the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed.

In the effect setting process for big win, the stop result of the symbol for big win is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, for a part of the probability variable jackpot results, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined. Determined as a result of stopping the game round. In addition, in some cases of variable probability jackpot results and in the case of normal jackpot results, a stop where a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The result is determined as the stop result of this game round.

The type of the main symbol to be stop-displayed and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by a lottery or the like when a big win results. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 913 stores the effective lines L1 to L5 and address information. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. It should be noted that the stop result address information determined by various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 914 in the following description as well.

Also, in the effect setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbol for the big win is determined (performs the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process)). As already explained, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through the ready-to-win display. In the variable display mode determination processing for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 913 is acquired, and the game at the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time is determined. A production pattern of normal ready-to-win display or super ready-to-win display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 914 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination processing described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 913 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM914.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether reach will occur in the current game round. When reach occurs, it advances to step S1105, effect setting processing for reach occurrence is executed. In the effect setting process for generating ready-to-win, the outline of the effect and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is the same as the processing in step S1103, so the description thereof is omitted. Since this processing corresponds to the loss reach, the stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit result. That is, the stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, in this determination, the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same pattern of the medium pattern row Z2 as the pattern forming the reach line is placed on the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so as to make the final stop at a forward or backward stop position. After that, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

If it is determined in step S1104 that reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the outline of the effect for complete failure and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to a complete loss, the stop symbols are determined so as not to form a symbol combination corresponding to the result of a big win.

After executing any one of steps S1103, S1105, and S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, a process of outputting commands including information on the stop result and effect pattern determined in steps S1103, S1105, and S1106 to the display control device 142 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively, is executed. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 performs display control of the pattern display device 253 to execute the effect in the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1107, in the subsequent step S1108, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game cycle, the process for starting the variation is finished. Specifically, based on the performance patterns determined in steps S1103, S1105, and S1106, drive control of the speaker unit 27 and the annular illumination unit 24 is started, and the performance for the game round is started.

Here, based on FIG. 32, a supplementary description will be given of the variable display mode of the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 253 (display screen 253a). FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 32(b) group is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

(Variable display mode)
As shown in FIG. 32(a), there are 5 types of variable display modes of symbols to be executed on the display screen 253a: complete failure, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. separated. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and an outline of the variable display mode for each round of the game is grasped based on the information relating to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the variable display mode and the variable display time differs depending on whether the support mode by the electric accessory 91 is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode. ing.

First, the case of the low-frequency support mode will be described. Under low-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time for complete failure is "3 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), and the fluctuation display time for normal reach A is "20 sec". , The variable display time of normal reach B is "24 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A. The variable display time of super reach A is "31 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B, and the variable display time of super reach B. The variable display time is "32 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of super reach A, and the variable display time of super reach C is "33 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of the other super reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 sec", the notification/effect control device 143 will grasp that the normal reach B should be executed. .

Next, the case of the high frequency support mode will be described. Under high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time for complete failure is "1 sec to 8 sec" (the difference is set according to the number of holds), and the fluctuation display time for normal reach A is "20 sec". , the variable display time of normal reach B is "24 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, the variable display time of super reach A is "36 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B, and the variable display time of super reach B. The variable display time is "37 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of super reach A, and the variable display time of super reach C is "38 sec", which is longer than the variable display times of the other super reach A and B. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "24 sec", the notification/effect control device 143 will grasp that the normal reach B should be executed. .

In addition, in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easy to select in the order of Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A. Off > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B >
It has a configuration that is likely to be selected in order of super reach C . In other words, the longer the variable display time is, the higher the expectation for winning the jackpot is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32(b1), the variable display modes of normal reach A and B will be described. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is finished (stopped). display), and then finish the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 (stop display). While the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this manner, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed and stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6), thereby reaching the reach line. is formed. Then, under the condition that the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbol row Z2 in the middle stage is performed, so that the reach display (reach variable display) is performed. After the ready-to-win display is displayed, the variable display is terminated by stopping display of the symbol row Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the same pattern as the pattern constituting the ready-to-win display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the big win has been won, and when other patterns stop on the same reach line, the big win is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this manner, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game cycle continues until the stop display period elapses, and when the stop display period elapses, the transition to the next game cycle is allowed.

In this embodiment, by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the ready-to-win line is formed, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured. The method of setting the difference between is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display to the formation of the reach line, it is possible to secure the difference in the variable display time.

Next, based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B and C will be described. As shown in FIGS. 21(b2) to (b4), for super reach lines A, B, and C, the same process as for normal reach lines A and B is performed to form the aforementioned reach lines. After the ready-to-win line is formed, the ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in conjunction with the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the reach line is formed in super reach A, a character resembling a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in super reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character modeled after a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Regarding pending notice)
In the present embodiment, the performance related to the pending notice suggesting the contents of the pending information stored in the pending ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 is executed with a predetermined probability before the game cycle related to the pending information is started. It is configured to run with By executing the performance corresponding to the pending information not yet targeted for the lottery at the timing before the game round related to the pending information is executed, it is possible for the player to feel the effect corresponding to the currently ongoing game round. In addition to the game of confirming the lottery result of the reservation information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the reservation information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery object according to the content of the above effect is added. Diversification is achieved. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

This pending notice is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the above-described symbols in the variable display area ME of the display screen 253a, and in accordance with changes in the mode of pending display in the pending display area NE of the display screen 253a. It is roughly divided into what is executed. Of these, the suspension notice executed in the suspension display area NE uses the suspension display on the display screen 253a. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33(a) and the schematic diagram of FIG. display control command response processing) will be described. The pending display control command handling process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Command response processing for hold display control)
As shown in FIG. 33(a), in the pending display control command corresponding process, first, in step S1201, whether or not a pending command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143. judge. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, 1 is added to the value of the pending number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 954 in step S1202.

After executing the update processing in step S1202, the process advances to step S1203 to execute pending display addition processing, and terminates this pending display control command handling processing. The pending storage number SN described above corresponds to the pending display area 981 of the video RAM 957 . When setting the display of the pending icon MP in the pending display addition process, the pending display information (more specifically, the information stored in the pending image data storage area 971 is stored in the unit area corresponding to the pending storage number SN in the pending display area 981). address of the hold image) is set. In each unit pending display area Da1 to Da8 of the pending number display area Da on the display screen 253a, the pending icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), under the condition that the pending icon MP is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 and the second unit pending display area Da2, that is, the pending storage number SN="2" When a pending command is received under this condition, the pending memory number SN changes from "2" to "3", and pending display information is set in the third unit area of the pending display area 981. . Thereby, as shown in FIG. 33(b2), the pending icon MP is displayed in the third unit pending display area Da3.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/production control device 143. If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the command response processing for holding display control ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the value of the pending number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in the pending counter area of the work RAM 954 is decremented by one.

In subsequent step S1206, shift processing is executed, and this pending display control command handling processing ends. In the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area 981 is moved to the execution display area 982, and the hold display information is set in the first to eighth unit areas of the hold display area 981. The pending display information that is displayed is shifted to the lower area side in order.

Specifically, the pending display information in the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 982, and the second unit area→first unit area, third unit area→second unit area, fourth unit area→third unit area. unit area, fifth unit area→fourth unit area, sixth unit area→fifth unit area, seventh unit area→sixth unit area, eighth unit area→seventh unit area, and so on. Shift pending display information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b1), under the condition that the pending icon MP is displayed in the first unit pending display area Da1 and the second unit pending display area Da2, that is, the pending storage number SN="2" In this situation, when a shift command is received, the reserved storage number SN changes from "2" to "1". Accordingly, the reserved display information in the execution display area 982 is erased, the reserved display information in the first unit area is displayed in the execution display area 982, the reserved display information in the second unit area is displayed in the first unit area, and the third unit area is displayed. The pending display information in the unit area is shifted to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33(b3), the pending icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit pending display area Da1.

Here, in the hold image data storage area 971, a plurality of types of hold icons MP with different colors (specifically, four types of white, blue, yellow, and red) are stored as a hold image group. Address is different. When setting the pending display information, the notification/effect control device 143 determines which color to display in accordance with the presence or absence of the above-described pending notice. When passing through 143, it is incorporated into the pending command by the notification/production control device 143. In other words, the display control device 142 reads the color-related information from the received hold command, thereby grasping the address corresponding to the color to be set as the hold display information.

Next, the processing related to the suspension notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described. As the processing related to the notice of suspension, the confirmation processing for the notice of suspension (step S306 in FIG. 22) and the setting processing of the suspension command (step S307 in FIG. 22) are set. 20), which is set as a part of the process (see FIG. 21) for the operation opening, more specifically, it is configured to be executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S204. In other words, the confirming process for the reservation notice and the setting process of the reservation command are configured to be executed based on the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b.

Hereinafter, confirmation processing for holding advance notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34 .

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the pending advance notice, in step S1301, the start pending storage number N and the common pending number CRN stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 632 are read, and the information on the pending number is sent to the MPU 602. Store in a register. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether or not the information of winning the jackpot is included in the pending information acquired by the winning of this time.

Specifically, first in step S1302, the information for judging the big hit among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the operation ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the acquired big win random number counter C1 grasp.

In subsequent step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . In the case of the low-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the information for determining the jackpot (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1302 by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Identify inclusion in a group. In addition, in the case of the high-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to, and the information for judging the big hit (the value of the random number counter C1 for the big win) grasped in step S302 is determined as the big win. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the information for judging the big win (the value of the random number counter C1 for the big win) grasped in step S1302 corresponds to winning the big win. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1307, and the confirmation processing for this reservation notice is finished as it is.

In addition, in the process of step S1307, information for judging the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the winning of this time, grasping the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has already been obtained, and referring to the distribution table Then, the type of jackpot is determined. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 at step S1307 includes information relating to the type of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winnings to the operation ports 83a, 83b, information for out-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1309, the reach determination table (ready determination information group) stored in the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 is determined as a reach winning. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process advances to step S1310 to determine whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1308 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1311, and then this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting process of pending command)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the hold command setting process, first, in step S1401, by determining whether or not the big hit information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, the check process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 34) It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to winning a jackpot. When the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S1302 to set a jackpot corresponding hold command. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604 . The jackpot corresponding hold command includes information about the jackpot type.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the big hit information is not stored in the register of MPU602, the process proceeds to step S1403, and whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU602 By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination corresponds to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for reservation notice (FIG. 34). If the reach occurrence information is stored, the off-reach corresponding pending command is set in step S1404, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete missing corresponding pending command is set in step S1405.

When the pending command is set in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and the information on the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S708. The hold command set in this manner is transmitted to the display control device 142, and the display control device 142 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern based on the hold command. In addition, as already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored when starting the game cycle related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the complete-disconnect-response hold command, the variable display time is provisionally set.

After executing the command setting process in any one of steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, in step S1406, the process of setting information on the number of reserved items to the reserved command is executed. Specifically, as this process, the information of the set pending command is configured as multi-byte information, and for some of the bits, information to the effect that it is a pending command and a pending command type information is included, and information on the number of pending items can be set.

In step S1406, first, the pending number information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S1301 in the immediately preceding pending notice confirmation process (FIG. 34) is read, and then the pending number in the already set pending command is read. The read reservation number information is stored in the information bit by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, for the hold command set in any one of steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, information for specifying the order of the hold information corresponding to the hold command. will be included. After executing the process of step S1406 described in detail above, this pending command setting process ends.

The pending command including the information of the pending number in step S1406 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 by the external output process of step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). In the notification/production control device 143, by receiving such a hold command, it is specified that the hold information has increased. In addition, the notification/effect control device 143 adds information for a pending notice, which will be described later, to the pending command and transmits it to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 executes processing such as pending display and pending notice based on the received pending command.

In addition, how to set the pending command is determined by the pending command in the display control device 142, whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type at that time, if the jackpot is not won, the presence or absence of reach generation, etc. In other words, It is arbitrary as long as the variable display mode of the pattern can be specified. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding hold command, a losing reach corresponding holding command, and a complete loss corresponding holding command is set individually corresponding to each holding number, and in the holding command setting process, confirmation processing for holding notice ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG.

Next, the processing related to the pending notice executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143 will be described. The processing related to the pending notice is roughly divided into command response processing for determining a command from the main control device 162 and pending notice effect setting processing for determining the mode of the pending notice.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the pending command handling process, when a pending command transmitted by the main controller 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information contained in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the pending command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 931 of the RAM 914 . The command storage area 931 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and read out from the previously stored command. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the current reading target area in the command storage area 931 . The configuration for reading such commands is the same as for reading other commands such as the command for starting fluctuation.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 934 . The pending information storage area 934 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, each of which can store one piece of pending information. The hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when a shift command is received from the main controller 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the data in the second area Rc2→the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3→the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4→the third area Rc3 . The data in each area is shifted in the order of area Rc8→seventh area Rc7. In the pending information storage area 934 of the notification/production control device 143, the pending information is collected chronologically regardless of the destination of the ball, similarly to the pending ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the pending ball storage area RE) of the main control device 162. It is configured to be stored. Specifically, the information on the number of reservations included in the command received this time is specified, and the above various information is stored in the area corresponding to the specified information on the number of reservations among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the aforementioned pending command is received, the pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and when the shift command is received, the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933. . Each of these flags serves as a trigger for setting processing for a pending advance notice effect, which will be described below, and is erased when the setting processing for the pending advance notice effect is completed.

In the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 , setting processing for the pending notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the pending information storage area 934 . Here, setting processing for the pending advance notice effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36 . Note that the pending notice effect setting process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

(Setting processing for pending notice effect)
In the holding notice effect setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a holding command has been received from the main control device 162 . Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, lottery processing is executed when a hold command is received in step S1502.

In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target of the hold notice is limited to the hold information newly added this time. That is, a holding notice lottery is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the holding command received this time among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the holding information storage area 934 of the RAM 914. . In this lottery, whether or not the game round related to the hold information is a big hit from the stored information, whether or not the ready-to-win display is performed, and if the ready-to-win display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and according to it. It is based on the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter.

In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 913, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for loss normal reach A, a lottery table for loss normal reach B, and a lottery table for loss super reach A are stored as the lottery tables for when the hold command is received. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss.

Returning to the description of step S1501, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, that is, if it is determined that the hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from main controller 162 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S1503, that is, if neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, the setting processing for the hold advance notice effect is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, lottery processing upon receipt of a shift command is executed in step S1504.

In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery target of the pending notice is all the pending information remaining after the shift. In other words, lottery for whether or not to hold the advance notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the holding information storage area 934 of the RAM 914 . This lottery is individually performed for each piece of information stored. The lottery order (priority order) is defined to be the newest order (eighth area Rc8→seventh area Rc7→ . . . first area Rc1). For example, when the common pending number CRN is "2", a lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and if the lottery is not won, the information stored in the first area Rc1. A lottery will be held based on

Especially in the present embodiment, by increasing the value of the common pending number CRN, the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is shortened. Therefore, by giving priority to the new suspension information as the lottery target as described above, it is possible to suitably ensure the period of the announcement effect when executing the suspension announcement.

Regarding the lottery method, in the same way as when the hold command is received, from the stored information, whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether the ready-to-win display is performed, and when the ready-to-win display is performed Then, the pattern is grasped, and the lottery table and the value of the lottery counter are used accordingly.

In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 913, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for loss normal reach A, a lottery table for loss normal reach B, and a lottery table for loss super reach A are stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 913. , a lottery table for losing super reach B, a lottery table for losing super reach C, and a lottery table for complete losing are stored.

These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach B>normal reach A>complete loss. However, the lottery table group for receiving the shift command is set so that the probability of winning with a pending notice is low when compared with the group of lottery tables for receiving the hold command. For example, when the lottery tables for big wins are compared, the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the shift command is set lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for when receiving the hold command.

However, if the value of the common pending number CRN (holding number) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall winning expectation is lower than when the pending command is received, but the common pending When the value of the number CRN (holding number) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the winning expectation as a whole is set to exceed that at the time of receiving the holding command.

In this embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common number of reservations CRN exceeds the predetermined number ("4"), the degree of reduction in the variable display time in the game round corresponding to the complete loss is determined by the value of the common number of reservations CRN. It becomes larger than the case of the predetermined number (“4”) or less. In this case, although it is possible to speed up the progress of the game, there is a concern that the monotony of the progress of the game will become conspicuous. In this respect, with the above configuration, when the number of holds increases and the shortening of the variable display time becomes noticeable, the notice of hold is more likely to occur. This is preferable for speeding up the progress of the game and suppressing a decrease in attention to the game.

After executing the lottery process in step S1502 or step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the condition for execution of the pending advance notice effect has been established in those lottery processes. When a negative determination is made in step S1505, that is, when non-winning is made in steps S1502 and S1504, this setting processing for reservation notice effect is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1505, determination processing of the pending notice effect pattern is executed in the following step S1506, and after storing the pending notice effect pattern determined in the following step S1507, the present pending notice effect end the setting process.

When it is determined that the pending notice effect is to be performed, based on the information stored in step S1507, the pending information is a lottery target for the pending notice effect until the game round related to the relevant pending information is executed. deviate from Then, the stored information is erased when the relevant pending information moves to the execution area.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 37 and 38, the types of pending notice effects (more specifically, the notice effects executed in the pending display area NE) will be described.

(Type of suspension notice effect)
All of the suspension notice effects are common in that they are configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win result by changing the display mode of the suspension icon MP displayed in the suspension display area NE. Four colors of white, blue, yellow, and red are set for the display mode (color) of the pending icon MP. Among these colors, white is the basic color, and when the suspension notice effect is executed, the suspension icon MP becomes other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the pending icon MP are set so that the degree of expectation for a big win result is higher in the order of white<blue<yellow<red. Specifically, when a hold notice is executed with a hold icon MP corresponding to a game round that results in a big hit, there is a high possibility that white < blue < yellow < red will be selected in this order. On the other hand, when the suspension notice is executed with the suspension icon MP corresponding to the game round resulting in the loss, there is a high possibility that red<yellow<blue<white will be selected in this order.

This pending notice effect is roughly classified into a first type notice effect and a second type notice effect depending on the display mode (color change) of the pending icon MP. As shown in FIG. 38(a), after the color of the pending icon MP changes in the first kind of notice effect, the color of the pending icon is maintained until the corresponding game round (until the execution target display area Db is reached). be done. On the other hand, in the second kind of notice effect, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the color of the pending icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the final color to be changed is red, it is first changed to a color with a lower degree of expectation (blue or yellow), and then at the timing when the pending icon MP shifts, the color is changed to a more anticipated color. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of pending notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation by the time the corresponding game cycle is reached. This suppresses an early decrease in the degree of attention to the pending advance notice effect.

Note that the color of the pending icon MP may be changed when moving to the execution target display area Db instead of changing only in the pending display area Ra. For example, when the yellow pending icon MP in the pending display area Ra is moved to the execution target display area Db, the pending icon MP is changed to red, or the white pending icon MP is displayed in the pending display area Ra. It is also possible to change the color of the pending icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red) when the icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db.

(Production button device 40)
This embodiment is characterized by the effect button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 and the structure related to the effect using the effect button device 40 . The structure of the effect button device 40 will be supplementarily explained below with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the front door frame 14 as seen from the front, FIGS. 40(a) and 42 are perspective views of the front door frame 14 as seen from the front of the game machine, and FIG. 40(b) is a side view of the production button device 40. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance button device 40, FIG. 43 is a partially broken view showing the internal structure of the performance button device 40, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation block. 42, the illustration of the side cover 755 of the production button device 40 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 39, the effect button device 40 is arranged in the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, specifically, in the upper bulging portion 28 in front of the upper tray 33 (storage area KE). It is Most of the effect button device 40 is housed inside the upper swelling portion 28, and a part of the operation button protrudes upward through an opening 28b formed in the upper surface portion 28a of the upper swelling portion 28. there is

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the effect button device 40 includes an operation block 701 having an operation button 721 to be pressed, and a base block 702 on which the operation block 701 is mounted. The pedestal block 702 is composed of a metal pedestal plate 711 functioning as a mounting surface for the operation block 701, and a synthetic resin bracket 712 fixed to the pedestal plate 711 from below. The performance button device 40 is integrated with the frame body 20 by being fixed to the frame body 20 of the door frame 14 by fixing means such as screws.

Note that the effect button device 40 is not fixed to the upper bulging portion 28 forming the upper plate 33, and the load generated when the effect button device 40 is operated is transferred through the fixed portion to the upper bulging portion. 28 is suppressed. This is a device for suppressing the deformation of the storage area KE (see FIG. 39) provided in the upper plate 33 and securing the smooth flow of the game balls toward the game ball launching mechanism 110 .

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation block 701 has a button unit 720 having the operation button 721 and a holder unit 750 holding the button unit 720 . The pedestal plate 711 has a recessed central portion (see FIG. 42), and the operation block 701 and the pedestal block 702 are integrated by fixing the holder unit 750 disposed in this recess to the pedestal plate 711. there is

Although the details will be described later, the holder unit 750 is provided with a lift mechanism 785 (see FIG. 43) for raising and lowering the button unit 720 and a side cover 755 covering the side surface of the button unit 720. The mechanism 785 is covered by the outer shell of the button unit 720 and the side cover 755 .

Here, the button unit 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG. 45 and 46 are exploded perspective views of the button unit 720, and FIG. 47 is a longitudinal sectional view of the operation block 701. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45, the button unit 720 is formed by vertically combining the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 . As shown in FIG. 46 , the operation button 721 includes inner and outer double button members 722 and 723 forming the upper portion of the operation button 721 and a housing 726 forming the lower portion of the operation button 721 .

The button members 722 and 723 each have a cylindrical main body portion and an upper surface portion that closes the opening on the upper end side of the main body portion. Among them, the upper surface portion of the outer button member 722 functions as an "operation surface portion 721a" which is an object of pressing operation by the player. In the following description, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member are referred to as the inner button member 723 for proper distinction.

A decoration 724 is arranged on the upper surface of the inner button member 723 . The outer button member 722 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the decorative body 724 is visible through the operation surface portion 721 a of the outer button member 722 . The housing 726 is fixed to the inner button member 723 from below. The housing 726 has a cylindrical shape with a bottom, and a bottom portion 736 of the housing 726 faces the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 with a gap therebetween.

The base plate 742 has a flat plate shape, and a cylindrical guide shaft 743 is fixed to its upper surface. A slider 744 is attached to the guide shaft 743 so as to be slidable along the guide shaft 743 . The guide shaft 743 extends in the same direction as the central axis direction of the button members 722 and 723, in other words, in the same direction as the combination direction of the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 (hereinafter referred to as the reference direction). A stopper 743a is formed to prevent the slider 744 from falling off.

A coil spring 745 is inserted through the guide shaft 743 . The coil spring 745 is sandwiched (compressed) between the slider 744 and the base plate 742, and the coil spring 745 biases the slider 744 toward the stopper 743a (upper side). Slider 744 is secured to housing 726 using fasteners such as screws. These slider 744 and guide shaft 743 function as connecting means for connecting the base plate 742 and the housing 726 . The biasing force of the coil spring 745 is set in consideration of the weight of the operation button 721, and the slider 744 is held at a position where it contacts the stopper 743a when the operation button 721 is not operated. there is

A light emitting block 725 is accommodated in the area surrounded by the inner button member 723 and the housing 726 . The light-emitting block 725 has a light-emitting board 732 on which a plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs) are mounted and a case body 731 that houses the light-emitting board 732 . It is arranged so as to face the upper surface portion side. The light emitting board 732 is connected to the notification/effect control device 143, and light emission control is performed by the notification/effect control device 143. FIG.

The case body 731 is made of colored and transparent synthetic resin and has light transmittance. The light from the light emitting substrate 732 is emitted from the production button device 40 through the case body 731→the upper surface of the inner button member 723→the decorative body 724→the upper surface of the outer button member 722 (operation surface portion 721a).

In effect button device 40 shown in the present embodiment, the attachment structure of button unit 720 to holder unit 750 is characteristic. The mounting structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44 and 47. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44 , the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are connected by a plurality (three) of shafts 728 provided so as to bridge the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 . Specifically, each shaft 728 extends in the reference direction, and is inserted through an insertion portion such as a central opening 737 formed in the bottom surface portion 736 of the housing 726 and a hollow portion of the guide shaft 743 .

As shown in FIG. 47, one end (upper end) of each shaft 728 is fixed to a fixing portion 734 provided in the light emitting block 725 (specifically, the case body 731) of the button unit 720, and the other end (lower end) is fixed to the holder unit. It is fixed to a fixing portion 765 provided on the holder body 751 of 750 . Thereby, the button unit 720 and the holder unit 750 are integrated via the shaft 728 .

The outer diameter of the shaft 728 matches the inner diameter of the guide shaft 743, and the shaft 728 and the guide shaft 743 are arranged so that the upward/downward direction of the operation button 721 by the lift mechanism is the same as the reference direction. stipulated in A plurality of shafts 728 are arranged in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX of the operation button 721, and the shafts 728 allow the operation buttons 721 (excluding the outer button member 722) to be centered around the central axis CLX. ) is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the operation surface portion 721a of the operation button 721 is pushed against the biasing force of the coil spring 745, the operation button 721 is lowered along the central axis CLX, and the bottom surface portion of the housing 726 is lowered. When 736 comes into contact with the base plate 742 of the movable base 741, further displacement becomes impossible. The holder unit 750 is provided with a detection sensor 791 (see FIG. 44) that detects the displacement when the operation button 721 is lowered to the position where it contacts the base plate 742 . The detection sensor 791 is connected to the notification/production control device 143 , and the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143 specifies whether or not the operation button 721 is operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791 . In the following description, the detection position of the operation button 721 by the detection sensor 791 is referred to as "operation detection position".

(Lift mechanism 785)
In the present embodiment, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the operation button 721 is moved up and down by a lift mechanism 785, whereby the amount of protrusion of the upper swelling portion 28 from the upper surface portion 28a (opening portion 28b), that is, The operation stroke of the operation button 721 can be changed. The lift mechanism 785 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44, 47, 50 and 51. FIG. FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the lift mechanism 785 and its related configuration, FIG. 51(a) is a perspective view of the rotor 752, and FIG. 51(b) is a plan view of the power transmission mechanism 754. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44, the holder main body 751 includes a disk-shaped bottom portion 761, a peripheral wall portion 762 formed along the outer peripheral portion of the bottom portion 761, and a central portion of the bottom portion 761 extending in the same direction as the reference direction (upward direction). ) and a columnar bearing portion 763 (see FIG. 47) erected so as to extend in the direction of . As shown in FIG. 47 , the central axis of the bearing portion 763 is coaxial with the central axis CLX of the operation button 721 , and the rotor 752 is attached to the bearing portion 763 .

Specifically, the rotor 752 has a cylindrical holder main body 751, and the holder main body 751 is inserted into the bearing portion 763 and fixed to the bearing portion 763 using a fastener such as a screw. . When the rotor 752 is attached to the bearing portion 763, the rotor 752 is restricted from lifting from the bottom portion 761 (displacement in the direction of the central axis CLX), but is allowed to rotate about the central axis CLX. .

Central openings 737 and 746 are formed in the central portion of the movable base 741 and the central portion of the housing 726 respectively, and the rotor 752 protrudes toward the light emitting block 725 through these central openings 737 and 746 . A case body 731 of the light emitting block 725 is formed with a bearing portion 733 that engages with the upper end portion of the rotor 752 from the inside.

As shown in FIG. 50, a base plate 742 of a movable base 741 is provided with a pair of projecting pins 747 across a central opening 746 (center axis CLX). Each protruding pin 747 has a pin member extending in a direction perpendicular to the central axis CLX, and is attached to the base plate 742 so as to be rotatable about the central axis of the pin member. there is

The ends (tips) of the pin members on the side of the central axis CLX protrude toward the central opening 746, and roller members 748 are provided on the tips so as to be coaxial with the pin members. The rotor 752 has a set of engagement grooves 772 formed on the outer circumference of the body portion 771 . The groove width dimension of each engaging groove 772 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748), and the protruding pin 747 (roller member 748) is inserted into the engaging groove 772. engaged.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), each engaging groove 772 is composed of a horizontal portion 775 extending in the horizontal direction and a spiral inclined portion 776 extending upward from one end of the horizontal portion 775. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 are continuous, and the protruding pin 747 can move between the horizontal portion 775 and the inclined portion 776 while maintaining the engagement state with the engaging groove 772 . That is, the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted and the rotor 752 are allowed to change their relative positions in the circumferential direction around the central axis CLX while maintaining the engagement between the roller member 748 and the engaging groove 772. It is

As shown in FIG. 50, the holder main body 751 is provided with a stepping motor 753 as a driving portion for the rotor 752 and a power transmission mechanism 754 for transmitting the power of the stepping motor 753 to the rotor 752 . As shown in FIG. 51(b), the power transmission mechanism 754 includes a drive gear 781 fixed to the output shaft of the stepping motor 753, a driven gear 779 fixed to the main body 771 (lower end) of the rotor 752, and It has a connecting gear 782 that connects the driving gear 781 and the driven gear 779 . The stepping motor 753 is connected to the notification/production control device 143 and operates based on a drive signal from the notification/production control device 143 . When this driving force is transmitted to the rotor 752 via the power transmission mechanism 754, the rotor 752 rotates about the central axis line CLX.

In this embodiment, by changing the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 by the lift mechanism 785, the effect button device 40 can be switched between three modes having different appearances. The movement of the lift mechanism 785 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view showing the lift mechanism 785, and FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the projecting pin 747 and the engaging groove 772. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the clockwise direction around the center axis CLX in the plan view of the effect button device 40 is the "positive direction", and the rotation direction of the rotor 752 in the counterclockwise direction. The moving direction is called "reverse direction".

When the projecting pin 747 is positioned on the horizontal portion 775 of the engaging groove 772 as shown in FIG. 52(a), the operating stroke of the operating button 721 is minimized. When the stepping motor 753 rotates forward under this condition, the rotor 752 rotates forward as shown in FIG. 53(a1)→FIG. 53(a2).

When the rotation in the positive direction continues, the protruding pin 747 is pushed upward by the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 as shown in FIGS. 53(a2)→53(a3). Here, the rotor 752 is restricted from downward displacement along the central axis CLX by the holder unit 750, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is moved upward along the central axis CLX. (upward) displacement is allowed. Rotation of the movable base 741 about the central axis CLX is restricted by a shaft 728 . For these reasons, the movable base 741, that is, the operation button 721 is displaced upward along the central axis CLX so as to follow the projecting pin 747 pushed upward.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control), and as shown in FIGS. The output of the drive signal for rotation to the stepping motor 753 is stopped immediately before reaching the vicinity of 773 . As a result, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the movable base 741 is separated upward from the holder unit 750, and the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is expanded.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped immediately before the projecting pin 747 abuts against the upper end portion 773 of the engaging groove 772 by pulse control, and the contact between the projecting pin 747 and the upper end portion 773 is stopped. Although the collision is avoided, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) may be stopped when the protruding pin 747 contacts the upper end portion 773. FIG.

The current supply to the stepping motor 753 continues even after the projecting pin 747 reaches the upper end portion 773 . As a result, a holding torque is generated in the stepping motor 753 to maintain the rotational position. This holding torque is set in consideration of the weight of the operation button 721, and the operation button 721 is held at the position after the stroke is changed (for example, the maximum projecting position). Although the details will be described later, by changing the current supplied to the stepping motor 753, it is possible to change the resistance (resistance) to the pressing operation.

Here, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and relative displacement between the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 is allowed at least in the circumferential direction around the central axis line CLX. there is By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the feel of rotation of the rotor 752 from being transmitted to the player's hand when the pressing operation is performed. This is preferable for suppressing the occurrence of discomfort caused by the operation. In addition, even if the outer button member 722 is turned by hand, it is possible to avoid the operation button 721 from falling due to this. It is possible to suitably suppress the operation from being performed.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the projecting pin 747 is positioned near the upper end portion 773 of the engaging groove 772, the operating stroke of the operating button 721 is maximized. When the stepping motor 753 rotates in the reverse direction under this condition, the rotor 752 rotates in the reverse direction as shown in FIG. 53(b1)→FIG. 53(b2).

As already described, the holder unit 750 restricts the downward displacement of the rotor 752 along the central axis CLX, and the movable base 741 on which the protruding pin 747 is mounted is regulated along the central axis CLX. Displacement to the lower side (downward) along is allowed. Rotation of the movable base 741 about the central axis CLX is restricted by a shaft 728 . For these reasons, the protruding pin 747 follows the right wall portion 777 of the inclined portion 776 and descends under its own weight, and the movable base 741, that is, the operation button 721 is displaced downward along the center axis CLX.

The amount of rotation of the stepping motor 753 is controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal (pulse control). Even after reaching 775, the stepping motor 753 continues to rotate. Then, just before the protruding pin 747 reaches the vicinity of the lower end portion 774 of the engaging groove 772, the output of the drive signal for rotation to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder unit 750 from above, and the extension of the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is released.

In the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) is stopped immediately before the protruding pin 747 contacts the lower end portion 774 of the engaging groove 772 by pulse control, so that the protruding pin 747 and the lower end portion 774 are stopped. Although the collision is avoided, the rotation of the rotor 752 (stepping motor 753) may be stopped when the protruding pin 747 contacts the lower end portion 774. FIG.

After the projecting pin 747 reaches the lower end portion 774, the current supply to the stepping motor 753 is stopped. In other words, the stepping motor 753 does not generate holding torque for maintaining the rotational position. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize an increase in power consumption due to multi-functionalization of the effect button device 40 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between each form of the effect button device 40 and the operation stroke. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40 in the first form, FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40 in the second form, and FIG. 57 is a production button in the third form. Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram showing apparatus 40;

As shown in FIG. 54, in the first mode in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is not enlarged, the operation stroke S1 is the gap between the housing 726 (bottom portion 736) of the operation button 721 and the base plate 742 of the movable base 741. It is the same as Sa. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, in the second mode in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is maximized, the operation stroke S2 is the housing 726 (bottom portion 736) of the operation button 721. and the gap Sa between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom portion 761 ) of the holder unit 750 . As shown in FIG. 56, in the third mode in which the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is expanded to about half that of the second mode, the operation stroke S3 is the same as that of the housing 726 (bottom portion 736) of the operation button 721. and the gap Sa between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the gap Sb between the base plate 742 of the movable base 741 and the holder main body 751 (bottom portion 761 ) of the holder unit 750 .

In other words, the first to third modes are common in that the clearance Sa is included in the operation stroke, and the difference in size of the clearance Sb is configured to be the difference in the operation stroke.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the movement of the effect button device 40 when the pressing operation is performed will be described. Since the second form and the third form have the same movement during operation, the movement of the effect button device 40 in the case of the second respect will be explained, and the movement in the case of the third form will be described. The description of is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), when a pressing operation (pressing operation) is performed under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the first mode, the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 42) accompanies the operation. etc.) is compressed, the displacement (lowering) of the operation button 721 in the same direction as the central axis CLX is allowed. In the first form, the operation stroke is not extended, and the movable base 741 is in contact with the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above. Therefore, the operation button 721 (housing 726) contacts the movable base 741 from above as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the pressing operation (pressing operation) is performed under the condition that the production button device 40 is in the second form, the coil spring 745 is compressed in accordance with the operation. This allows displacement (lowering) of the operation button 721 in the same direction as the central axis CLX. In the second form, the operation stroke is enlarged, and the movable base 741 is spaced upward from the holder main body 751 of the holder unit 750 . The holding torque of the movable base 741 (operation block 701) by the stepping motor 753 is larger than the biasing force by the coil spring 745 (see FIG. 49, etc.). Therefore, at the initial stage of the pressing operation, the operation button 721 is displaced toward the movable base 741 by compressing the coil spring 745, and the displacement of the movable base 741 toward the holder unit 750 is substantially avoided. As shown in FIGS. 58(b) to 58(c), after the operation button 721 comes into contact with the movable base 741 from above, the operation button is moved while maintaining the contact state by continuing the pressing operation. 721 and movable base 741 are displaced together (button unit 720 ) toward holder unit 750 . When the movable base 741 comes into contact with the holder body 751 of the holder unit 750 from above, further displacement becomes impossible.

As already described, the displacement direction (operation direction) when the operation button 721 descends toward the movable base 741 and the displacement direction when the operation button 721 descends toward the holder unit 750 together with the movable base 741. (operation direction) are consistent with each other, avoiding changes in trajectory during the stroke.

As already explained, the game effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 include the operation corresponding effects using the effect button device 40 . Operation-responsive effects are configured to occur in various situations during a game, and in the present embodiment, a first special effect is provided as one of the operation-responsive effects. The first special effect will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 59(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of the first special effects, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic diagram showing patterns of the first special effects.

(First special production)
As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first special effect is configured to be executed in part of the game rounds corresponding to Super Reach. Super reach includes super reach A not corresponding to the first special effect, super reach B not corresponding to the first special effect, super reach C not corresponding to the first special effect, super reach A corresponding to the first special effect, first Super reach B corresponding to special effects and super reach C corresponding to the first special effect are included, and the expectation of transition to the special game state (expectation of jackpot) when each super reach occurs is the first special effect Non-supporting super reach A < 1st special effect non-supporting super reach B < 1st special effect non-supporting super reach C < 1st special effect-supporting super reach A < 1st special effect-supporting super reach B < 1st special effect-supporting super It is set to be higher in the order of reach C.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), for any of the super reach A to C, the production parts (reach display to final display) after transition to the reach display are roughly divided into first part to third part. In the first part that constitutes the early part of the ready-to-win display, a branching effect to super reach A to C is executed, and in the second part that constitutes the middle part of the ready-to-win display, the character display mode is changed. is executed, and a chance-up effect, which is a cut-in display (interruption display), is executed in the third part constituting the final part of the ready-to-win display.

More specifically, in the branch effect executed in the first part, each character corresponding to Super Reach A to C is alternately displayed on the display screen 253a, and one of the characters is stationary displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. By doing so, the super reach that will be the development destination is specified. As already explained, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is set to increase in the order of super reach A<super reach B<super reach C, so the player who expects the transition to the special game state. It is possible to encourage attention to development destinations.

In the chance-up effect executed in the second part, an effect is added to the character displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is suggested by the color of this effect. Three colors of white, blue, and red are provided for the colors of the effect, and the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is set in the order of white<blue<red. In the second part, effects may or may not be added, but when the first special effect occurs, the addition of effects is determined.

The chance-up production executed in the third part is a production in which a cut-in image for chance-up is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the patterns and characters displayed on the display screen 253a. Depending on the size of the in-image, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is suggested. There are three sizes of cut-in images, namely, small, medium and large, and the expectations for transition to the special game state are set in the order of small<medium<large. In the third part, the cut-in image may or may not be displayed, but the display of the cut-in image is determined when the first special effect occurs.

When the first special effect is executed, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 in at least one of the first part to the third part. When the player operates the effect button device 40 according to this suggestion, the effect in each part progresses based on the operation.

Specifically, when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the first part, the super reach to be developed is clearly indicated according to the operation. Specifically, at the timing of the operation, the character corresponding to the development destination is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and the replacement display ends. In the second part, when the production button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion, an effect is added to the character being displayed on the display screen 253a in accordance with the operation. Specifically, an effect of a color corresponding to the current first special effect is added at the timing of the operation. In the third part, when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion, a cut-in image is displayed on the display screen 253a. Specifically, a cut-in image having a size corresponding to the current first special effect is displayed at the timing of the operation.

If the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period even though the operation is suggested in the first part, the development destination is specified at the end timing of the first part. That is, only the timing at which the development destination is specified differs depending on whether or not the effect button device 40 is operated. On the other hand, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the effective operation period even though the operation is suggested in the second part, the effect display in the second part is cancelled. . Also, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the effective operation period even though the operation is suggested in the third part, the cut-in display in the third part is cancelled.

Here, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 60, the setting process for the first special effect executed as part of the regular process (for example, the effect setting process in the process for starting fluctuation) by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 explain.

(Setting processing for the first special effect)
In the setting process for the first special effect, first, in step S1601, the current game state is the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, specifically the second normal game state or the third normal game state. determine whether or not there is If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this setting process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the game round to be executed this time is a game round corresponding to super reach. If the game round to be executed this time is not a game round corresponding to super ready-to-win, the setting process is terminated as it is. When the game round to be executed this time is the game round corresponding to super reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602 and the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, lottery processing for the first special effect is executed. In this lottery process, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special effect according to the result of the lottery. If the result of the winning lottery is the determination result (jackpot result) corresponding to the transition to the special game state, the winning probability is higher than the determination result (loss result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state. The difference is set so that

If the lottery process in step S1603 results in non-winning, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and this setting process ends. If the lottery process in step S1603 results in a winning result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, and the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the determination processing of the effect pattern of the first special effect is executed, and in the subsequent step S1606, after executing the first special effect setting process based on the effect pattern determined in step S1605, end the setting process.

In the first special effect shown in the present embodiment, after the shift to the ready-to-win display, more specifically, after switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode, depending on the timing at which the operation suggestion is performed, the special game state is entered. It is configured so that the transition expectations are different. The types of the first special effect and their allocation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between super reach A to C and the type of the first special effect, FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for super reach A to B, and FIG. Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a minute table;

As shown in FIG. 61, the first special effect includes a first special effect A in which the operation suggestion is performed in the first part, a first special effect B in which the operation suggestion is performed in the second part, and an operation suggestion in the third part. A first special effect C in which suggestions are made, a first special effect D in which operation suggestions are made in the first and third parts, and a first special effect E in which operation suggestions are made in the second and third parts. , The game cycle ends without any operation suggestion in any of the 1st to 3rd parts, and the operation suggestion is performed in the special game state (specifically, the 7th round) that shifts immediately after the game cycle It is roughly divided into 1 special production F.

(For Super Reach A)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(a), in the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A, the timing (during the first part) after 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game cycle, that is, the transition to the reach display The operation suggestion is started at the timing when 2 seconds have passed from the timing, and the operation suggestion ends when the performance button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the first part).

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 seconds have passed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the third part) after 31 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 35 seconds have passed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) after 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 21 seconds have passed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, when 31 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part), the operation suggestion is started again, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or 35 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (third part middle), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 seconds have passed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, when 31 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part), the operation suggestion is started, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 35 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part) ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach A corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round in the special game state shifted after the game round ends (in detail, the first The operation suggestion is started at the start timing of the 7th round), and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 7th round.

(For Super Reach B)
As shown in FIG. 61(b), in the super ready-to-win B corresponding to the first special effect A, the timing (during the first part) after 17 seconds have passed from the start of the game cycle, that is, 2 seconds have passed since the transition to the ready-to-win display. The operation suggestion is started at the timing, and the operation suggestion ends when the performance button device 40 is operated or when 21 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the first part).

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect B, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 seconds have passed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the third part) after 32 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 36 seconds have passed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect D, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) after 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 21 seconds have passed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, when 32 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part), the operation suggestion is started, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part) ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the second part) after 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 seconds have passed (during the second part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, when 32 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part), the operation suggestion is started, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 36 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part) ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach B corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round in the special game state shifted after the game round ends (in detail, the first The operation suggestion is started at the start timing of the 7th round), and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 7th round.

(For Super Reach C)
As shown in FIG. 61(c), in super ready-to-win C corresponding to the first special effect B, the timing (during the second part) when 24 seconds have passed since the start of the game cycle, that is, 2 seconds have passed since the transition to the ready-to-win display. The operation suggestion is started at the timing, and the operation suggestion ends when the performance button device 40 is operated or when 28 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the second part).

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special effect C, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the third part) after 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 37 seconds have passed (during the third part), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special effect E, the operation suggestion is started at the timing (during the first part) after 24 seconds have passed from the start of the game round, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or from the start of the game round. When 28 seconds have passed (during the first part), the operation suggestion ends. After that, when 33 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part), the operation suggestion is started, and when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 37 seconds have passed since the start of the game round (during the third part) ), the operation suggestion ends.

In the super reach C corresponding to the first special effect F, the game round ends without any operation suggestion during the game round, and a predetermined round (seventh round) in the special game state shifted after the game round ends ), and the operation suggestion ends when the effect button device 40 is operated or when 5 sec elapses from the start of the seventh round.

In super reach C, unlike super reach A and super reach B, the first special effect A and the first special effect D are not supported (configured to not occur).

Next, referring to FIGS. 62 and 63, the relationship between the game result and the distribution of the first special effects A to F will be described. In FIGS. 62 and 63, when the effect button device 40 is operated based on the operation suggestion, the effect button device 40 switches from the second mode to the first mode. Triangular marks are attached to items that maintain the second form even if performed.

(For Super Reach A and Super Reach B)
When it is determined that the first special effect is to be executed for the game round in which the super reach A to B corresponding to the losing result is executed, as shown in FIG. 30% is the first special effect B, and 20% is the first special effect C. When it is decided to execute the first special performance for the game round in which the super reach A to B corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, the first special performance A is 10% and the first special performance is 15%. Effect B, 60% is the first special effect C, 5% is the first special effect D, and 10% is the first special effect E. When it is decided to execute the first special performance for the game round in which the super reach A to B corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result is executed, the first special performance A is 10% and the first special performance is 15%. Effect B, 55% is the first special effect C, 5% is the first special effect D, 10% is the first special effect E, and 5% is the first special effect F.

(For Super Reach C)
On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the first special effect for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the out result is executed, as shown in FIG. Effect A, 30% is the first special effect B, and 20% is the first special effect C. When it is decided to execute the first special performance for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed, the first special performance B is 15% and the first special performance C is 70%. , 15% is the first special effect E. When it is decided to execute the first special performance for the game round in which the super reach C corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result is executed, the first special performance B is 15% and the first special performance C is 60%. , 15% is the first special effect E, and 10% is the first special effect F.

That is, when super reach A to C are executed, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state increases in the order of first special effect A<first special effect B<first special effect C, and first special effect For D to F, the transition to the special game state is confirmed, and for the first special effect F, it is especially confirmed that the game state after the special game state ends will be the third normal game state.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 64, the first special effect processing executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular processing will be described.

(First special effect processing)
In the first special effect processing, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the first special effect. If it is a game turn corresponding to the first special effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 and the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 has been switched to the second mode. If the mode has not been switched to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the ready-to-win display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, a switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form, and the first special effect process ends.

Returning to the description of step S1703, if a negative determination is made in step S1703, that is, if it is determined that it is not time to shift to the ready-to-win display, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the return to the second form. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round corresponds to either the first special effect D or the first special effect E described above. If a negative determination is made in step S1705, the first special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not it is time to return to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1706, the first special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, return processing for returning the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed, and then the first special effect processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not it is during the operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button device 40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation activation flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting the operation of the production button device 40 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1709, the first special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, setting processing of an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button device 40 is performed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in a valid operation period counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 . The value of this operation valid period count is decremented each time the MPU 912 executes regular processing (for example, the present first special effect processing). Thereafter, until the operation effective period elapses (until the value of the operation effective period counter becomes "0"), the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted. Also, in step S1710, an operation validation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG.

After the operation suggestion start process is executed in the following step S1711, the first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message "Press the button" for operation suggestion, a pattern simulating a button, and the rest. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the description of step S1708, if an affirmative determination is made at step S1708, that is, if the operation valid period is in effect (if the operation validation flag is stored in the RAM 914), the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the valid operation period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period counter of the RAM 914 is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S1713, and the first special effect processing ends. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1713 and the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1714, operation reception notification processing and operation suggestion end processing are executed. In the operation acceptance notifying process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a sound effect from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the following step S1715, an operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. As a result, when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the first part, the character corresponding to the development destination is stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and in the second part the effect button device 40 is displayed according to the operation suggestion. is operated, the color effect corresponding to the first special effect is added, and when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion in the third part, the first special effect is added. A cut-in image of the corresponding size is displayed. Sound effects and BGM corresponding to these various effects are output from the speaker section 27 .

In subsequent step S1716, delay switching processing is executed. The delay switching process is a process for driving and controlling the stepping motor 753 to hold the effect button device 40 in the first form. Specifically, when the amount of pushing is insufficient at the time of operation, the stepping motor 753 is driven to compensate for the insufficient amount of pushing, and the return to the first form is assisted. is delayed until it is confirmed that the player's hand is released from the effect button device 40 based on . If the player continues to press the effect button device 40 even after the initial valid period has passed, the switch to the first form is executed with the lapse of the valid period as a trigger.

After executing the delay switching process in step S1716, the process proceeds to step S1717, the operation activation flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 is erased, and the first special effect process ends.

Returning to the description of step S1712, if the determination in step S1712 is affirmative, that is, if the effective operation period has passed without the effect button device 40 being operated, the process proceeds to step S1718, and operation suggestion end processing is executed. . In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In subsequent step S1719, switching processing to the first mode is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled to hold the effect button device 40 in the first form. That is, unlike the case of switching to the first form triggered by an operation, the effect button device 40 is promptly switched to the first form when no operation is performed. After that, in step S1717, the operation activation flag is erased, and the first special effect processing ends.

Returning to the description of step S1701, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the game round does not correspond to the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, it is determined whether or not the special game state corresponds to the first special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1720, the first special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1720, the process proceeds to step S1721. In step S1721, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the seventh round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, setting processing of an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button device 40 is performed. As a result, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted thereafter until the operation valid period elapses. Also, in step S1710, an operation validation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. After the operation suggestion start process is executed in the following step S1711, the first special effect process is terminated. In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message "Press the button" for operation suggestion, a pattern simulating a button, and the rest. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the description of step S1721, if a negative determination is made in step S1721, the process proceeds to step S1712. When a negative determination is made in step S1712, each process of steps S1713 to S1717 is executed, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, each process of steps S1717 to S1719 is executed, and then this first special effect end the processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, a supplementary description of the flow of the first special effect will be given. FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and FIG. 66 shows the flow of the game when super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed. It is a timing chart showing.

(Super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A)
At the timing of ta1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display portion DL for the operation port of the main display portion D, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. FIG. At the timing of ta2, the pattern display mode on the display screen 253a has shifted to the ready-to-win display. This game round is a game round in which super reach A corresponding to the first special effect A is executed, and the first part corresponding to the branching effect suggesting the development destination is started at the timing of ta2. At the timing ta2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is extended. However, at this time, the operation suggestion is not started.

After the start of the first part, the display screen 253a shows a swaying display encouraging the transition to super ready-to-win, and then the above-described branch effect, specifically, the replacement display of each character corresponding to super ready-to-win A to C is executed. At the timing ta3 when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the start of the replacement display, the display screen 253a and the speaker section 27 perform the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is validated. be. When the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing of ta4 when the operation suggestion is continued, more specifically at the timing of ta4 when the operation suggestion and the effective period of operation are about to end, the display screen 253a corresponds to Super Reach A by the operation. The image of the fairy that does this will be displayed stationary. In other words, the development destination is specified based on the player's operation.

Then, at the timing of ta5, the first part shifts to the second part, and at the timing of ta6, the third part shifts. After that, the third part ends at the timing of ta7, and at the following timing of ta8, the game result of the game round (for example, the result of the jackpot) is displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a to clearly indicate to the player. The corresponding symbol combination is stop-displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the game result is stop-displayed in the activation opening display section DL.

In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is higher as the timing at which the operation suggestion is started after the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode is delayed. Due to the occurrence of the operation suggestion, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is lowered compared to the case where the operation suggestion occurs in the second part or the third part. However, even if an operation suggestion occurs in the first part, it is difficult to identify the first special effect A and the first special effect D at the time of the operation suggestion by visual inspection or the like. Expectation for the first special effect D can be encouraged. This is preferable in order to prevent the execution of the operation suggestion in the first part from becoming a cause of a rapid decrease in attention to the game.

(Super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C)
At the timing of tb1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operating port display portion DL of the main display portion D, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 as well. At the timing of tb2, the pattern display mode on the display screen 253a has shifted to the ready-to-win display. This game round is a game round in which super reach A corresponding to the first special effect C is executed, and the first part corresponding to the branching effect suggesting the development destination is started at the timing of tb2. At this timing tb2, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke of the effect button device 40 is extended. However, at this time, the operation suggestion is not started.

After the start of the first part, the display screen 253a shows a swaying display encouraging the transition to super ready-to-win, and then the above-described branch effect, specifically, the replacement display of each character corresponding to super ready-to-win A to C is executed. Unlike the example of FIG. 65, in the first part, the image of the fairy corresponding to Super Reach A is displayed stationary on the display screen 253a without starting the operation suggestion, and the player is clearly shown the development destination.

At timing tb4, the first part shifts to the second part, and then at timing tb5, the transition is made to the third part. Also in the second part, the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is not performed, and the operation suggestion is carried over to the third and subsequent parts.

At the timing of tb6 after the start of the third part, the display screen 253a and the speaker unit 27 suggest operation of the effect button device 40, and the operation of the effect button device 40 is validated. When the effect button device 40 is operated at the timing tb7 when the operation suggestion is continued, more specifically, at the timing tb7 just before the operation suggestion and operation valid period ends, the pattern displayed on the display screen 253a by the operation. A cut-in image for increasing the chance is displayed on the display screen 253a so as to cover the characters.

After that, the third part ends at the timing of tb8, and at the following timing of tb9, the game result of the game round (for example, the result of the big win) is displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a to clearly indicate to the player. The corresponding symbol combination is stop-displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the game result is stop-displayed in the activation opening display section DL.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state increases as the timing at which the operation suggestion is started after the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode is delayed. , it is determined that if no manipulation suggestion occurs in the first and second parts, the manipulation suggestion will occur in the third and subsequent parts. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase public attention to the game by lengthening the period of time in which the second mode is maintained.

According to the first embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to be switched between the first mode and the second mode, the impact on the effect button device 40 can be strengthened and attention can be directed to the effect button device 40 itself. Here, when the production button device 40 becomes the second form, the operation of the production button device 40 (operation button 721) is performed based on the lapse of a predetermined waiting period from switching to the second form. It is suggested. A plurality of periods with different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period, and the period during which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form varies in various ways based on the result of the big winning lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the form change but also to the length of the period in which the second form is maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game and improving the degree of attention to the game. In particular, it is possible to make the player who desires to shift to the special game state expect that the period in which the second mode is maintained will be as long as possible (the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in increasing attention to the switching to the second mode.

If the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode with the transition to the ready-to-win display, and the operation suggestions are generated in the first, second, and third parts after the transition to the ready-to-win display, the game It is possible for the person to estimate the period of time during which the second form is maintained from the progress of the display effect without measuring the period. By clarifying the difference between the predetermined standby periods in this way, the effect of improving the degree of attention described above can be exhibited favorably.

The sudden switching of the effect button device 40 to the first mode while waiting for the operation suggestion can be a factor that confuses the player. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the second mode is maintained until the predetermined waiting period elapses. The occurrence can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, if the operation stroke is larger in the second mode than in the first mode, it is possible to suppress the operation from becoming complicated due to the change to the second mode while executing the first special effect. The performance button device 40 can be made conspicuous.

In the above-described first embodiment, the difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the first part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part is , the period from the timing of switching to the second form (the timing of transition to the ready-to-win display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, and in the second part The difference in the period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the third part is the switching timing to the second form (transition to reach display timing) to the generation of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference in the predetermined waiting period from being buried in the flow of the game and becoming difficult to understand.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the first special effect is divided into a plurality of parts (first part to third part), and the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 in the second form is generated in each part. Although the obtained configuration is illustrated, it is not limited to this. As long as a plurality of first special effects (first special effect A to first special effect F) having different waiting periods from completion of switching to the second mode to occurrence of operation suggestion are provided. It is optional whether or not to provide a correlation between the operation suggestion generation timing and each of the above parts.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect A is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect B is executed is set to 7 seconds. , The difference between the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect B is executed and the timing at which the operation suggestion is generated when the first special effect C is executed is made common as 7 seconds, but the timing difference is is optional. However, in order to suppress the confusion of the timing of the operation suggestion, the difference in the timing at which the operation suggestion occurs should be set longer than the period from when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode to the timing at which the first operation suggestion may occur. preferably.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the timing of transition to the ready-to-reach display and the timing of transition to the second mode are configured to be the same, but this is not necessarily the case, and the timing of transition to the second mode is not necessarily limited to this. Optional. For example, it is possible to have a configuration that shifts to the second form before shifting to the ready-to-win display (for example, a configuration to shift to the second form at the start timing of the corresponding game round), or after shifting to the ready-to-win display. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that shifts to two modes.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, by providing a correlation between the transition timing to the ready-to-win display and the switching timing to the second mode, the player watching the pattern display device 253 can switch to the second mode. Although it is configured to suppress overlooking of the timing that occurs, instead of or in addition to this, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the pattern display device 253 and the speaker unit 27 are used to switch to the second mode. It is also possible to have a configuration that suggests or specifies.

For example, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as characters or an image indicating that the effect button device 40 will be transformed, or a message or sound effect indicating that the effect button device 40 is transformed from the speaker unit 27. It is also possible to output

<Modification 5>
In the game round in which the first special effect is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player the period during which the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode. For example, an effect may be added to the outer peripheral portion of the display screen 253a when switching to the second mode, and the effect may change according to the period during which the second mode is maintained. For example, moving from the 1st part (beginning) to the 2nd part (middle) increases the effect by 1 level, and moving from the 2nd part (middle) to the 3rd part (the end) increases the effect by 1 level. It may be configured to be larger. In such a configuration, the effect button device 40 may terminate the display of the effect based on the switching to the first mode.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the counting of the period until the operation suggestion is executed is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if a plurality of periods from switching to the second form in the first special performance to execution of the operation suggestion are provided, and the period until the operation suggestion is executed is counted from the start timing of the game cycle. is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the operation is monitored based on information from the detection sensor 791, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) in the stroke direction is monitored based on information from the rotary encoder 792. However, it is also possible to omit the detection sensor 791 as a configuration in which the rotary encoder 792 also functions as the detection sensor 791 . That is, it does not deny the configuration in which the operation is monitored based on the information from the rotary encoder 792 . In such a configuration, even when the operation button 721 is displaced from the standby position to the operation position, the rotation angle of the rotor 752 may be changed following the displacement of the operation button 721 .

<Modification 8>
In the above-described first embodiment, the height position of the operation detection that triggers the start of the operation-responsive effect is configured to follow changes in the operation stroke, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the height position of operation detection does not change even when the operation stroke changes. In other words, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stroke for moving to the detection position that triggers the start of the operation-responsive presentation changes.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the production button device 40 is in the second form and the amount of protrusion of the operation button 721 from the upper surface portion 28a of the upper swelling portion 28 is changed, the operation is performed by the holding torque of the stepping motor 753. Although the button 721 is configured to be maintained at the maximum protruding position, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the maximum protruding position is maintained by an urging force of an urging member such as a spring.

<Modification 10>
In the game round in which the first special effect is executed, the time elapsed after switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode may be displayed on the display screen 253a or the like as a timer.

<Modification 11>
In the game round in which the first special effect is executed, if the effect button device 40 is operated during the period from switching to the second mode until the operation of the effect button device 40 is suggested (up to the first detection position CP1 In the case of being pushed in), it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the planned operation suggestion or the first special effect is canceled. In this case, the effect button device 40 may be configured to forcibly return to the first form. With such a configuration, the player is urged to wait until the operation suggestion occurs after switching to the second mode, and it is suppressed that the production button device 40 is operated blindly after switching to the second mode. can.

<Modification 12>
In the above-described first embodiment, the difference in period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the first part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part is , the period from the timing of switching to the second form (the timing of transition to the ready-to-win display) to the occurrence of the operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, but the former is longer than the latter. may be increased, or both may be matched.

Also, the difference in the period between the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the second part and the timing at which the operation suggestion for the first special effect is performed in the third part is the switching to the second form. It is configured to be longer than the period from timing (transition timing to ready-to-win display) to occurrence of operation suggestion for the first special effect in the first part, but the former is configured to be longer than the latter. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both are matched.

<Modification 13>
In the above-described first embodiment, the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed is measured from the start timing of the game cycle, but the starting point of period measurement is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the timing at which the operation suggestion is executed when the first special effect is executed is measured from the transition timing to the ready-to-win display.

<Modification 14>
In the above-described first embodiment, the operation button 721 is configured to come into contact with the movable base 741 by being lowered. is preferred. With such an arrangement, it is possible to suitably suppress disturbance of the posture of the operation button 721 when the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 come into contact with each other.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the first special performance, which is one of the operation corresponding performances using the performance button device 40, specifically the configuration related to the second part to the third part is the first embodiment. different from the form. A supplementary description of the configuration of the effect button device 40 will be given below with reference to FIG. 67, and then the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 67( a ), when the effect button device 40 is in the first form, the operation button 721 is lowered by operating the effect button device 40 . In other words, "total operation stroke"="movement range of the operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to the operation button 721 (the button unit 720 as a whole does not move down together).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "total operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 Descending movement range”. Specifically, the holding torque of the stepping motor 753 is larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum projecting position, the biasing force of the coil spring 745 is resisted. While the operation button 721 is lowered, the position held by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum projecting position, the operation button 721 is lowered by itself first. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operation force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It will descend.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720 , the position of the operation button 721 can be identified from detection information from the rotary encoder 792 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second form, there are five detection positions CP1 to CP5 in order from the top between the maximum protruding position and the lower limit position. Detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP<b>1 is a position where an operation is detected based on detection information from the detection sensor 791 . On the other hand, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 are positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. FIG.

The distance L1 from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the distance L2 from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, and the distance L3 from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3. , the distance L4 from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4 and the distance L5 from the fourth detection position to the fifth detection position CP5 are uniform.

Next, the relationship between the second part and the third part in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) illustrates the case of super reach A, but the basic configuration of super reach B and super reach C is the same.

In the third part, as the display mode of the character image CA, the low expectation mode (previous death) in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is relatively low and the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state are relatively high. A high expectation mode (after transformation) is provided. In the second half of the second part, the transformation effect of the character is performed, and when the transformation effect is successful and the display mode of the character image CA is switched from the low expectation mode to the high expectation mode, the high expectation mode is performed. By executing the effect in the third part while maintaining , the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is relatively increased. On the other hand, if the transformation effect fails, the display mode of the character image CA is maintained in the low expectation mode even after the shift to the third part. As a result, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is relatively low.

In the first half of the second part, this premonition effect of the transformation effect is executed. Specifically, the effect EF is added and updated to the character image CA being displayed. As shown in FIG. 69(b), five levels of LV1 to LV5 are provided for the size of the effect EF to be added, increasing in order of LV1<LV2<LV3<LV4<LV5. The degree of success expectation of the transformation production is differentiated so that it becomes higher as the size of the effect EF becomes larger.

The trigger for adding/updating the effect EF is the operation of the effect button device 40 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), when the first detection position is reached, the effect EF is added in the state of LV1, and when the second detection position CP2 is reached, the effect EF is changed from LV1 to LV2. is updated to After that, the magnitude of the effect EF is updated from LV2 to LV3 at a portion of the time when the third detection position CP3 is reached, and the magnitude of the effect EF is updated from LV3 to LV3 at a portion of the time when the fourth detection position CP4 is reached. LV4 is updated, and the magnitude of the effect EF is updated from LV4 to LV5 in a part of the case when reaching the fifth detection position CP5.

Here, as update patterns of the effect EF, four update patterns A to D are provided, and one of these update patterns is set when it is decided to execute the first special effect. be. Here, each update pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 70(b).

In the update pattern A, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, and the effect EF of LV2 is maintained without being changed between the second detection position CP2 and the fifth detection position CP5.

In the update pattern B, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF of LV3 is updated between the third detection position and the fifth detection position CP5. maintained without

In update pattern C, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is updated to LV4 when displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4 , and the effect EF of LV4 is maintained without being updated when it is displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5.

In update pattern D, the effect EF of LV1 is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, and the effect EF is added when the operation button 721 is displaced from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2. is updated to LV2, the effect EF is updated to LV3 when displaced from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and the effect EF is updated to LV4 when displaced from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4 , and the effect EF is updated to LV5 when the position is displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, when the operation button 721 is operated, the effect level changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721. Subsequent development (directing in the third part) is suggested. Here, referring to the flowcharts of FIGS. 71 and 72, the effect change processing (first special effect execution processing for the second part) executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 ) will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the first special effect execution process for the second part, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the current game time is the game time corresponding to the first special effect. . If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the processing for execution ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1802 to execute cooperative display execution processing. This cooperative display processing will be described later.

In the following step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect button device 40 is in the second form. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the effect button device 40 is configured to switch from the first mode to the second mode at the transition timing to the ready-to-win display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the processing for execution ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not it is the operation suggestion start timing. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process for execution ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, an operation valid period setting process is executed in step S1806, and an operation validation flag is set in various flag storage area 933 of RAM914. After that, after executing operation suggestion start processing in step S1807, this execution processing ends.

Returning to the description of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If a negative determination is made in step S1809, the process for execution ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In subsequent step S1811, effect addition processing is executed to add an effect EF to the character image CA being displayed on the display screen 253a. In the effect addition process, a sound effect corresponding to the effect addition is output from the speaker section 27 and an effect addition command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 performs processing for adding the LV1 effect EF to the character image CA being displayed on the display screen 253a based on the reception of the effect addition command.

In the subsequent step S1812, a cooperation acceptance flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. In the following step S1813, valid period resetting processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect button device 40 is in the second form so that the operation stroke is extended, and the effect change linked (interlocked) with the movement of the operation button 721 is generated using the extended stroke. do. Regarding the period during which this effect change occurs, although the effective period for accepting operations is the principle, if the operation is performed just before the end of the effective period due to the extension of the stroke, the effect change will occur. There may not be enough time for Specifically, since the effective period of the effect update is measured using a timer counter that measures the operation effective period, in step S1813, in order to secure (earn) a period for generating such an effect change, Instead of accepting operation=resetting the timer counter, extend the effective period. Specifically, the valid operation period is extended by 1 second from the initially set period. After that, in step S1814, the operation enable flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process for execution ends.

Returning to the description of step S1808, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, that is, if the operation valid period has passed, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, operation suggestion end processing is executed. After that, in step S1816, a switching process for returning the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed, and in step S1814, the operation activation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the main execution is performed. end the processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the linked display execution process will be described. In the cooperative display execution process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the effect branch timing. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the transformation effect in the second half of the second part. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if the first half of the second part is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the validity period after resetting in step S1813 is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, this cooperative display execution processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the valid period after resetting. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the process advances to step S1904 to execute position specifying processing of the operation button 721 based on detection information from the rotary encoder 792. FIG. Specifically, it is determined at which of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 the operation button 721 is positioned. Specifically, whether or not the displacement has occurred from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, whether or not the displacement has occurred from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, and whether or not the displacement has occurred from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP3. It is determined whether or not it has been displaced to the position CP4, and whether or not it has been displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5.

In the following step S1905, if the displacement is from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 in step S1904, or if the displacement is from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, then from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position When it is displaced to the position CP4, or when it is displaced from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5, the effect EF is updated based on the current update mode.

Note that when the operation button 721 is released during operation, the operation button 721 rises by one section due to the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and the effect level changes even if the position of the operation button 721 changes. will not be In other words, the effect EF of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the downward movement of the operation button 721, but does not change in conjunction with the upward movement, which is an irreversible relationship.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, that is, if the effective period has passed, the process advances to step S1906 to execute switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode, and then execute this cooperative display processing. finish.

Returning to the description of step S1901, if the determination in step S1901 is affirmative, that is, if it is time to start the transformation effect, which is the second half of the second part, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the cooperation reception flag is stored in the flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the operation-responsive display process is executed in step S1908, and then this cooperative display execution process ends. In the operation-responsive display process, the display mode of the character image CA is changed to the display mode (low-expectation mode/high-expectation mode) set at the start of the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S1907, that is, if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid period despite the operation suggestion, a negative determination is made in step S1907 and the process proceeds to step S1909. , the operation-incompatible display processing is executed, and then the cooperative display execution processing is terminated. In the operation-independent display process, the display mode of the character image CA is set to the low-expectation mode regardless of the mode set at the start of the game cycle. That is, when the effect button device 40 is not operated, the display mode of the character image CA remains in the low expectation mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the flow of the first special effect B corresponding to the update pattern D in this embodiment will be described. 73 and 74 exemplify the case of super reach A, but even in the cases of super reach B and super reach C, the basic flow of effects is the same.

In FIG. 73(1), it has developed into super reach, and the character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed stationary in the center of the display screen 253a. Also, at this timing, the production button device 40 is already in the second mode, and the operation stroke is extended.

At a predetermined timing after the transition to the second part, the design display device 253 and the speaker section 27 suggest the operation of the effect button device 40 . In addition, in the operation suggestion, a message for operation suggestion is displayed at the top of the display screen 253a, and an image simulating a button in the second form and the remaining operation effective period are displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. Although indicators are displayed, descriptions of these images are omitted.

When the player presses the effect button device 40 and the operation button 721 is lowered from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, as shown in FIG. EF is added. After that, the effect level is updated from LV1 to LV2 at the timing when the operation button 721 moves down from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2 (see FIG. 73(3)), and the operation button 721 moves to the second detection position. The effect level is updated from LV2 to LV3 at the timing when CP2 is lowered to the third detection position CP3 (see (4) in FIG. 73), and the timing when the operation button 721 is lowered from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4. The effect level is updated from LV3 to LV4 (see FIG. 74 (5)), and the effect level is updated from LV4 to LV5 at the timing when the operation button 721 is lowered from the fourth detection position CP4 to the fifth detection position CP5. (See FIG. 74(6)).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(7), the display mode of the character image CA is switched from the low-expectation mode to the high-expectation mode in the transformation effect. After that, the process proceeds to the third part while maintaining the display mode of the character image CA (the state in which the high expectation mode and the effect EF are added).

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

A character image is displayed when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined position") on the path along which the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is displaced by pressing the effect button device 40. An effect EF is added to CA, and the size of the effect EF is changed when the operation means reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5 (corresponding to the "specific position") after the addition of the effect EF. . In this way, if the effect EF is added and the size is changed in conjunction with the operation of the operation means 1, it is possible to achieve an unprecedented novel performance. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

When reaching the third detection position CP3 to the fifth detection position CP5, the size of the effect EF does not necessarily change, and there are cases where the size does not change. Generating such a branch is advantageous in suppressing the change based on the operation from becoming monotonous and enhancing the effect of increasing the degree of attention described above.

In order to realize a configuration in which the size of the effect EF is changed in conjunction with an operation, it is assumed that the impact of the size change will be stronger if the change has a sense of speed to some extent. Here, if a time limit is set for the size change as shown in the present embodiment, the player is urged to operate the operation button 721 toward the maximum pressing position at once, which contributes to strengthening the impact described above. can.

As shown in the present embodiment, when the operation button 721 reaches each position of the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP5, the size of the effect EF can be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the expressive power in changing the size.

As described above, in the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the change in size of the effect EF are linked, by switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode and extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance, The cooperation between the two can be strengthened. Further, it is assumed that the operation of the operation button 721 is often executed vigorously. In this respect, the configuration in which the operation stroke is extended in advance makes it easier to earn a grace period for the size change of the effect EF. This is preferable for suppressing deterioration in identifiability due to, for example, excessively rapid size change.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described second embodiment, the effect level is updated when the operation button 721 is lowered while the effect EF is added to the character image CA, but there is no limitation to this. For example, if the user releases the operation button 721 before the effect finally changes, the effect may be updated to become smaller.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described second embodiment, the first detection position CP1 to the fifth detection position CP5 are set so that the intervals between the detection positions of the operation button 721 are uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation button 721 is pressed, the lowering speed of the operation button 721 can be increased on the back side with momentum. In view of such circumstances, a difference may be provided so that the distance increases from the upper side to the lower side. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the process of changing the effect level from becoming difficult to see.

Also, the distance from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1 does not necessarily have to be aligned with other distances. In view of the fact that the conditions for executing the operation-responsive effect are satisfied when the player reaches the first detection position CP1, it is possible to make the distance from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1 larger than other distances. .

<Modification 3>
Regarding the update pattern of the effect level shown in the second embodiment, if the change of the effect level stops in the middle of the operation, it will not change any more. An update pattern may be provided in which the effect level jumps over a plurality of levels at the fifth detection position CP5).

<Modification 4>
In the above-described second embodiment, when it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, the reception conditions for the operation corresponding effect are established. It is not limited to this. When it is determined that the operation button 721 has reached the maximum pressed position (fifth detection position CP5) based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reception condition for the operation corresponding effect is established.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, when the effect button device 40 is operated in the second mode in which the stroke expansion of the effect button device 40 is extended, the movement of the operation button 721 is interlocked. However, when the effect button device 40 is operated in the first mode in which the stroke extension of the effect button device 40 is not extended, the effect level of the character image CA changes. A configuration is also possible in which the effect level of the character image CA changes in conjunction with the movement of the operation button 721 . If the stroke of the operation button 721 is short, the effect level changes at short pitches, so it is assumed that it will be difficult to enjoy the process of change. In view of such circumstances, in order to link the operation of the operation button 721 with the change of the effect level, it is preferable to extend the operation stroke of the operation button 721 .

<Modification 6>
It is also possible to vary the resistance torque (for example, static torque or drive torque) generated in the stepping motor 753 when the button unit 720 descends. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the resistance torque is increased as the maximum protruding position approaches the maximum pressing position. By increasing the operation resistance on the far side in the operation direction in this way, it is possible to prevent the size change of the effect from ending too early and making the change difficult to identify.

<Modification 7>
It is not always necessary to keep the intervals between the detection positions CP1 to CP5 constant. For example, the difference may be provided such that the distance increases from the maximum protruding position to the maximum pressing position. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the required period of time required for movement between positions as the depth side in the operation direction increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size change of the effect from ending too early and making the change difficult to identify. Also, the difference may be provided so that the distance increases as the position approaches the maximum protruding position from the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 8>
When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the direction of the pressing operation, the size of the effect EF can be changed. It may be configured such that the effect EF cannot be changed in size when the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2 to the fourth detection position CP4 based on the displacement in the direction. With such a configuration, even if a hand is released from the operation button 721 before reaching the fifth detection position CP5, the rebound of the operation button 721 may cause the effect EF to be rewound. do not have. This is preferable for avoiding unintended size changes due to operational errors or the like.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as one of the operation-responsive effects related to the effect button device 40, a second special effect interlocking with the movable effect device provided in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It is different from the form of Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 6, 75 and 76, the configuration relating to the second special effect will be described. FIG. 75 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing types of the second special effect.

As shown in FIG. 75 , the pachinko machine 10 includes a first movable effect device 300 and a second movable effect device 400 provided on the front door frame 14 . The first movable effect device 300 is arranged on the front portion of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14 , and the second movable effect device 400 is arranged on the upper surface portion of the upper frame portion of the front door frame 14 . Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a third movable effect device 803 and a fourth movable effect device 804 in addition to the first movable effect device 300 and the second movable effect device 400 .

The third movable effect device 803 is arranged above the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The third movable effect device 803 has a movable decorative body that can move between a standby position avoiding overlap with the display screen 253a and a direction position overlapping the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect of 803 is executed, the movable decorative body is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

The fourth movable effect device 804 is arranged below the game board unit 80 (see FIG. 6). The fourth movable effect device 804 has a movable decorative body that can move between a standby position avoiding overlap with the display screen 253a and a direction position overlapping the display screen 253a from the front. When the effect of 804 is executed, the movable ornament is configured to move from the standby position to the effect position.

By moving the movable decorative bodies of the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 to the effect position, the overlap with the display screen 253a (specifically, the pattern variable display area ME) becomes larger. It is sufficient if it is configured, and it is also possible to have a configuration that overlaps the display screen 253a even at the standby position. However, in order to enhance the impact of the presentation, it is preferable to make the overlap with the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) smaller at the standby position than at the presentation position.

Incidentally, the movable decorative bodies of the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 also have a light emitting function, similarly to the first movable effect device 300 and the second movable effect device 400, and can be moved to the effect position. It is configured to emit light when it moves.

The first movable effect device 300, the second movable effect device 400, the third movable effect device 803, and the fourth movable effect device 804 all have a function of suggesting the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state. Differences are provided in the degree of expectation when each effect device 300, 400, 803, 804 operates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, in the second special effect A in which the first movable effect device 300 operates, the transition to the special game state is confirmed, and in other cases, the second movable effect device 400 operates. The second special effect B has the highest degree of expectation of transition, followed by the second special effect C in which the third movable effect device 803 is activated, and the second special effect D in which the fourth movable effect device 804 is activated. The difference is set so that the expectation of

All of the second special effects A to D are common in that they are effects executed by being operated under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the second mode. In such a configuration, although it is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game due to the diversification of effects, the following adverse effects occur due to the scattering of points that the player should pay attention to. In other words, in the performance using the movable production device, the strongest impact is at the timing when the movable production device starts to operate, but the movement at the start of the operation of the movable production is scattered due to the scattered points of interest. more likely to miss. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised to eliminate such inconvenience. The device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75, 77 and 78. FIG. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram of the front door frame 14 viewed from the front side of the gaming machine, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 75, the front door frame 14 is provided with an annular illumination portion 24 in which a plurality of light emitting portions LT1 to LT14 are arranged so as to surround the window portion 22. As shown in FIG. The annular illumination part 24 has a first light emitting part LT1 adjacent to the effect button device 40 at the head, a second light emitting part LT2, a third light emitting part LT3, a fourth light emitting part LT4, a fifth light emitting part LT5, and a sixth light emitting part. LT6, seventh light emitting unit LT7, eighth light emitting unit LT8, ninth light emitting unit LT9, tenth light emitting unit LT10, eleventh light emitting unit LT11, and twelfth light emitting unit LT12 in this order toward first movable effect device 300. They are arranged at equal intervals, and the last twelfth light-emitting part LT12 is adjacent to the first movable effect device 300. - 特許庁A thirteenth light emitting unit LT13 and a fourteenth light emitting unit LT14 are arranged outside the eleventh light emitting unit LT11 so as to bypass the eleventh light emitting unit LT11 from the outside. The fourteenth light emitting unit LT14 is adjacent to the second movable effect device 400. As shown in FIG. In other words, the arrangement of the light-emitting portions that constitute the annular illumination portion branches into a route toward the first movable effect device 300 and a route toward the second movable effect device 400 .

Note that, as shown in FIG. 77, the seventh to ninth light emitting units LT7 to LT9 are arranged along the left and right edges of the display screen 253a, thereby suppressing a change in distance from the display screen 253a. there is In the upper part of the display screen 253a (specifically, the part aligned side by side with the ninth light emitting part LT9) and the lower part of the display screen 253a (more specifically, the part aligned side by side with the seventh light emitting part LT7), there are interlocking electrodes that interlock with the annular illumination part 24. A display area CE is provided, and the annular illumination part 24 and the interlocking display area CE constitute teaching means for teaching the player the movable effect to be operated in the second special effect.

This teaching means is configured to teach an action target based on the operation of the performance button device 40, and the configuration relating to this teaching is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 78, a supplementary description of the configuration of the effect button device 40 will be given.

When the effect button device 40 is in the first mode, the operation button 721 is lowered by operating the effect button device 40 . In other words, "total operation stroke"="movement range of the operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to the operation button 721 (the button unit 720 as a whole does not move down together).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "total operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 Descending movement range”. Specifically, the holding torque of the stepping motor 753 is larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum projecting position, the biasing force of the coil spring 745 is resisted. While the operation button 721 is lowered, the position held by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum projecting position, the operation button 721 is lowered by itself first. When the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791, the operation force of the player's pressing operation exceeds the holding torque of the stepping motor 753, so that the entire button unit 720 is integrated. It will descend.

Here, within the movement range of the button unit 720 , the position of the operation button 721 can be identified from detection information from the rotary encoder 792 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, in the case of the second form, 13 detection positions CP1 to 13th detection position CP13 in order from the top between the maximum protruding position and the lower limit position. Detection position is set. The uppermost first detection position CP<b>1 is a position where an operation is detected based on detection information from the detection sensor 791 . On the other hand, the second detection position CP2 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 are positions where the descent of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. FIG.

The distance from the first detection position CP1 to the second detection position CP2, the distance from the second detection position CP2 to the third detection position CP3, the distance from the third detection position CP3 to the fourth detection position CP4, . . The distances from the 12th detection position CP12 to the 13th detection position CP13 are uniform. The distance from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1 is larger than each of these distances.

Next, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 79 to 80, the second special effect processing executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular processing will be described.

(Second special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 79, in the second special effect processing, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the second special effect. When a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process for the second special effect is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, a second special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period of the effect button device 40 is in effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not it is time to elapse the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process for the second special effect is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S2006. Thereafter, in step S2007, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and the second special effect processing ends. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the description of step S2004, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if it is the timing when the grace period for switching to the second mode has passed, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, operation suggestion start processing is executed in step S2009, and the second special effect processing ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message "Press the button" for operation suggestion, a pattern simulating a button, and the rest. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

Returning to the description of step S2003, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S2011, and the second special effect processing ends. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011 and the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2012, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S2013, the interlocking flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. Thereafter, in step S2014, processing for setting a waiting period is executed. This standby period is a period referred to when operating the movable effect device designated as an operation target when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 but does not reach the 13th detection position CP13. is.

Thereafter, guidance display start processing is executed in step S2015, and the second special effect processing ends. By executing the guidance display start process, a plurality of arrow images directed from the left and right edges of the display screen 253a toward the third movable effect device 803 and the fourth movable effect device 804 are displayed in the interlocked display area CE of the display screen 253a. AR is displayed. Specifically, three arrow images AR1 to AR3 pointing from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 to the third movable effect device 803 are displayed in the upper interlocking display area CE, and the seventh light emission is displayed in the lower interlocking display area CE. Five arrow images AR4 to AR8 pointing from the part LT7 to the fourth movable effect device 804 are displayed. However, these arrow images AR1 to AR8 are all translucent, and all of the light emission levels are LOW.

Returning to the description of step S2010, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation button 721 being operated, operation suggestion end processing is executed in step S2016, After executing the switching process to the first form in the subsequent step S2017, the process for the second special effect is terminated. Note that the processes in steps S2016 and S2017 are the same as the processes in steps S1718 and S1719.

(Second special effect execution process)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80, the processing for executing the second special effect in step S2002 will be described.

In the process for executing the second special effect, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the movable effect device is in operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operating flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the interlocking flag is stored in the flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process for executing the second special effect is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the waiting period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S<b>2104 , position specifying processing is executed to specify the position of the operation button 721 based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 .

In the following step S2105, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation button 721 is the thirteenth detection position CP13. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the position of the operation button 721 has changed since the previous process for the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process for executing the second special effect is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process advances to step S2107 to execute light emission target shift processing. The details of this shift processing will be described later.

Returning to the description of step S2105, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, guidance display end processing is executed. Specifically, the first to fourteenth light emitting units LT1 to LT14 are all turned off, and the first to eighth arrow images AR1 to AR8 displayed on the display screen 253a are hidden.

In subsequent step S2109, a second special effect start process is executed. Specifically, the movable effect device corresponding to the second special effect of this time is operated. After that, in step S2110, the interlocking flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and in the following step S2111, the operating flag is stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the second special Terminate the production execution process.

Returning to the description of step S2103, if the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, that is, if the waiting period has elapsed, after executing each process of steps S2108 to S2111, End the process.

Returning to the description of step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if an operating flag is stored in various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the second special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process for executing the second special effect is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, after executing the second special effect end processing in step S2113, the second special effect execution processing is ended. By executing the second special effect end processing, the movable effect device that is the target of operation returns to the state (standby state) before the second special effect.

Here, a supplementary description of the shift processing in step S2107 will be given with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 81, update patterns (shift patterns) of lighting targets of the light emitting units LT1 to LT14 and the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are set for each of the second special effects A to D. FIG.

(Regarding the second special production A)
When the second special effect A is executed, first, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission unit LT1 to the second light emission unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts to the second light emission unit LT2. to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission unit LT6 to the seventh light emission unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission unit LT7. to the eighth light emitting portion LT8, and when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emission portion LT8 to the ninth light emission portion LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts from the tenth light emitting unit LT10 to the eleventh light emitting unit LT11, When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP<b>12 , the light emitting target shifts from the eleventh light emitting unit LT<b>11 to the twelfth light emitting unit LT<b>12 adjacent to the first movable effect device 300 . Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the twelfth light emitting part LT12 is turned off, and the first movable effect device 300 is activated. That is, the first movable effect device 300 rotates and emits light as the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT12 ends (see FIG. 82).

(Regarding the second special production B)
When the second special effect B is executed, first, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission unit LT1 to the second light emission unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts to the second light emission unit LT2. to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission unit LT6 to the seventh light emission unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission unit LT7. to the eighth light emitting portion LT8, and when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emission portion LT8 to the ninth light emission portion LT9, and the operation button 721 moves to the tenth detection position CP10. When the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emitting target shifts from the tenth light emitting unit LT10 to the thirteenth light emitting unit LT13, When the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target shifts from the thirteenth light emitting unit LT13 to the fourteenth light emitting unit LT14 adjacent to the second movable effect device 400. FIG. Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, the fourteenth light emitting part LT14 is turned off, and the second movable effect device 400 is activated. That is, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT10 and LT13 to LT14 ends, the second movable effect device 400 rotates and emits light (see FIG. 83).

(Regarding the second special effect C)
When the second special performance C is executed, the performance button device 40 is first switched from the first mode to the second mode, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the performance button device 40. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission unit LT1 to the second light emission unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts to the second light emission unit LT2. to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emission target shifts from the sixth light emission unit LT6 to the seventh light emission unit LT7, and when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts to the seventh light emission unit LT7. to the eighth light emitting unit LT8, and when the operation button 721 reaches the ninth detection position CP9, the light emission target shifts from the eighth light emitting unit LT8 to the ninth light emitting unit LT9. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10, the light emitting target shifts from the ninth light emitting unit LT9 to the first arrow image AR1 (the light emission level of the first arrow image AR1 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 moves to the first arrow image AR1. When the 11th detection position CP11 is reached, the light emission target shifts from the first arrow image AR1 to the second arrow image AR2 (the light emission level of the second arrow image AR2 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the 12th detection position CP12 The light emission target shifts from the second arrow image AR2 to the third arrow image AR3 adjacent to the third movable effect device 803 (the light emission level of the third arrow image AR3 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, and the third movable effect device 803 is activated. That is, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT9 and the arrow images AR1 to AR3 is completed, the third movable effect device 803 (movable decoration) descends and emits light (see FIG. 84).

(Regarding the second special effect D)
When the second special effect D is executed, first, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode, and when the switching is completed and the operation suggestion is started, the operation button of the effect button device 40. 721 lights up. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, the light emission target shifts from the operation button 721 to the first light emitting unit LT1. When the operation button 721 reaches the second detection position CP2, the light emission target shifts from the first light emission unit LT1 to the second light emission unit LT2, and when the operation button 721 reaches the third detection position CP3, the light emission target shifts to the second light emission unit LT2. to the third light emitting unit LT3, and when the operation button 721 reaches the fourth detection position CP4, the light emitting target shifts from the third light emitting unit LT3 to the fourth light emitting unit LT4, and the operation button 721 moves to the fifth detection position CP5. When it reaches, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth light emitting unit LT4 to the fifth light emitting unit LT5, and when the operation button 721 reaches the sixth detection position CP6, the light emitting target shifts from the fifth light emitting unit LT5 to the sixth light emitting unit LT6, When the operation button 721 reaches the seventh detection position CP7, the light emitting target shifts from the sixth light emitting section LT6 to the seventh light emitting section LT7. After that, when the operation button 721 reaches the eighth detection position CP8, the light emission target shifts from the seventh light emitting unit LT7 to the fourth arrow image AR4 (the light emission level of the fourth arrow image AR4 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 When reaching the ninth detection position CP9, the light emitting target shifts from the fourth arrow image AR4 to the fifth arrow image AR5 (the light emission level of the fifth arrow image AR5 becomes HI), and the operation button 721 reaches the tenth detection position CP10. Then, the light emission target shifts from the fifth arrow image AR5 to the sixth arrow image AR6 (the light emission level of the sixth arrow image AR6 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the eleventh detection position CP11, the light emission target shifts from the fifth arrow image AR5 to the sixth arrow image AR6. The image AR6 is shifted to the seventh arrow image AR7 (the light emission level of the seventh arrow image AR7 becomes HI), and when the operation button 721 reaches the twelfth detection position CP12, the light emitting target changes from the seventh arrow image AR7 to the fourth movable effect. Shift to the eighth arrow image AR8 adjacent to the device 804 (the light emission level of the eighth arrow image AR8 becomes HI). Then, when the operation button 721 reaches the thirteenth detection position CP13, the arrow images AR1 to AR8 are hidden, and the fourth movable effect device 804 is activated. That is, when the guidance (teaching) by the light emitting parts LT1 to LT7 and the arrow images AR4 to AR8 is completed, the third movable effect device 803 (movable decoration) descends and emits light (see FIG. 85).

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

The configuration in which the second special effect is executed as the operation-responsive effect by the movable effect device based on the player's operation of the effect button device 40 is preferable for prompting the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the effect button device 40 and the movable effect device becomes long, so that the movable effect device may be out of sight and the beginning of the second special effect may be overlooked. As for the second special effect, the effect is accompanied by the movement of the decorative body, and the impact at the beginning of the effect tends to be strong. In view of such circumstances, it is not desirable to overlook the beginning of the presentation in order to increase the degree of attention to the game. In particular, as shown in the present embodiment, when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operated are used together, more specifically, when the effect execution positions of the ornaments of the movable effect devices do not overlap each other. is concerned that such inconveniences will become prominent.

Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the second special effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button device 40, the decoration body operates after the operation of the effect button device 40 is started. By the time the second special effect is started, the movable effect device to be operated in the current second special effect is taught. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned overlooking, and to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention by the second special effect.

Operates from when the effect button device 40 reaches the first detection position CP1 (corresponding to the "predetermined detection position") and the condition for executing the second special effect is satisfied until the condition for starting the second special effect is satisfied. A subject is taught. As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention described above can be favorably exhibited.

When the effect button device 40 (operation button 721) is pressed, the conditions for executing the second special effect are met, and the operation target is taught. For example, even if a player who does not expect teaching stops the pressing operation after reaching the first detection position CP1, the second special effect is executed, so that it is possible to meet the needs of various players. In other words, it is possible to reduce the chances of giving the player the impression that the teaching function is troublesome.

In addition, when compared with the configuration in which the condition for execution of teaching → operation corresponding performance is satisfied along with the operation of the operation means, the type of the second special performance is revealed from the content of the teaching, and the operation is performed before reaching the predetermined detection position. It is also advantageous in that there is no inconvenience such as interrupting the

By shifting the light-emitting target along the route connecting the production button device 40 and the action target, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight toward the action target. can. In particular, by linking the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light emitting target, the player can arbitrarily control the shift speed while suppressing the complication of the operation.

As described above, in the configuration in which the movement of the operation button 721 and the shift of the light emission target are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721 in advance. In addition, it is assumed that the operation button 721 is often operated vigorously, and there is concern that the teaching period may be extremely shortened due to the above linkage. In this regard, if the operation stroke is extended, the teaching period can be increased, and the missing of the teaching can be suitably suppressed.

When the effect button device 40 is operated, there is a high possibility that the player's attention is directed to the effect button device 40 in order to determine the aim of the operation. Therefore, in the case of teaching, the player's attention can be guided to the teaching means by first causing the light-emitting portion (the first light-emitting portion LT1) closest to the effect button device 40 to emit light.

By making the route for teaching partly overlap on the effect button device 40 side, the initial light emitting point is common for any teaching. This is preferable in favorably suppressing oversight of teaching start.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described third embodiment, the function of teaching the movable effect portion to be operated based on the fact that the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 and the conditions for executing the second special effect are satisfied is activated. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the function of teaching the movable effect device to be operated is activated based on the start of the operation suggestion.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described third embodiment, the movable effect device is operated after the completion of teaching of the movable effect device to be operated. It is possible.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described third embodiment, the teaching is interlocked with the operation button, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which teaching is performed in a non-interlocking manner with the operation button when the start condition is established.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described third embodiment, when the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1 during the effective operation period, the condition for executing the second special effect is established. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution condition for the second special effect is established based on the fact that the 721 has reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, which is the maximum pressing position.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the first light emitting unit LT1 to the seventh light emitting unit LT7 (light emitting portions) are shared in each of the second special effects A to D, but a common light emitting unit (light emitting portion) is provided. It is also possible to configure without

<Modification 6>
In the above-described third embodiment, when an operation suggestion is made, one of the movable effect devices is operated based on the operation of the operation button 721. However, when the operation button 721 is operated, A configuration (gase production) in which the movable production device does not operate may be used together.

<Modification 7>
In the third embodiment, the operation stroke from the maximum projecting position to the operation detection position (first detection position CP1) and the operation stroke between each detection position detected by the rotary encoder 792 are the same (uniform). It is also possible to

<Modification 8>
In the above-described third embodiment, the operation target is taught by shifting the light emission target toward the movable effect device that is the operation target. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of light-emitting objects increases during the teaching process.

<Modification 9>
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the shift speed of the light emitting object changes so as to be relatively slow on the effect button device 40 side and relatively fast on the movable effect device side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long, and to appropriately prevent the teaching from being overlooked. For example, it is preferable to set each interval between the first detection position CP1 to the 13th detection position CP13, which triggers the shift of the light emission target, to be shorter as the position is closer to the 13th detection position CP13.

<Modification 10>
Either the first half or the latter half of the period from when the operation suggestion is made in the game round related to the second special effect until the operation effective period of the effect button device 40 elapses is based on the operation of the effect button device 40 as described above. It is also possible to set the teaching corresponding period during which the teaching is performed and the teaching non-corresponding period during which the above-described teaching is not performed even if the performance button device 40 is operated. For example, it is preferable that a teaching start period during which teaching is started elapses before an operation effective period of the effect button device 40 elapses.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the third special effect, which is one of the operation corresponding effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The third special effect is the same as the first special effect and the second special effect in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the second mode. However, the structure differs from the first special effect and the second special effect in that the flow of subsequent effects changes according to the pressing position (hold position) of the operation button 721 . Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the third special effect and the configuration related thereto will be described. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40, FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the projection amount and the torque, and FIG. 87 is a display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 during the third special production. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the .

When the effect button device 40 is in the first mode, the operation button 721 is lowered by pressing the effect button device 40 . In other words, "total operation stroke"="movement range of the operation button 721", and the object to be moved is limited to the operation button 721 (the button unit 720 as a whole does not move down together).

On the other hand, when the effect button device 40 is in the second form, "total operation stroke" = "movement range in which the operation button 721 descends independently" + "the entire button unit 720 Descending movement range”. Specifically, the torque (static torque and driving torque) by the stepping motor 753 described above is larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and when the operation button 721 is pressed from the maximum projecting position, the coil spring 745 While the operation button 721 descends against the urging force of , the position itself held by the stepping motor 753 does not change. Therefore, when the operation is performed at the maximum projecting position, the operation button 721 is lowered by itself first. After the operation button 721 descends and reaches the detection position where the operation is detected by the detection sensor 791 , the operating force of the pressing operation exceeds the torque of the stepping motor 753 , so that the torque of the stepping motor 753 is applied to the entire button unit 720 . You will have to resist and descend.

Here, the position of the operation button 721 can be specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 in the movement range where the entire button unit 720 moves. That is, when moving from the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1, the movement is specified based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, and in the range beyond the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position, the above The position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721 ) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792 . In particular, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the range from the first detection position CP1 to the maximum pressing position in the total operation stroke consists of a first area E1 in the upper stage, a second area E2 in the middle stage, and a third area in the lower stage. Based on detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is possible to specify in which of these three areas E1 to E3 the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is located.

As exemplified in FIG. 86(b), the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is determined when the effect button device 40 is in the first form or when the operation button 721 is in the maximum protruding position in the second form. When the first reference torque TQ1, which is a static torque generated when the operation button 721 is positioned, and when the effect button device 40 is in the second form (except when the operation button 721 is positioned at the maximum protruding position) It is roughly divided into a second reference torque TQ2 and a third reference torque TQ3, which are drive torques to be generated. The first reference torque TQ1 is a torque for holding the button unit 720 in the first form, and the first reference torque TQ1 does not move the button unit 720 up and down. On the other hand, the second reference torque TQ2 and the third reference torque TQ3 act as a driving force (biasing force) that moves the button unit 720 toward the maximum protruding position. These three values increase in the order of first reference torque TQ1<second reference torque TQ2<third reference torque TQ3.

When the operation button 721 is not pressed under the condition that the second reference torque TQ2 or the third reference torque TQ3 is generated in the stepping motor 753, the operation button 721 does not generate the driving force of the stepping motor 753. It moves to the maximum protruding position by the biasing force of the coil spring 745, and waits at the maximum protruding position.

When the operation button 721 is positioned at the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2, or at the boundary between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the stepping motor 753 is activated. A third reference torque TQ3 is generated, and a second reference torque TQ2 is generated in the stepping motor 753 in other portions. That is, the boundary portion (boundary and its vicinity) of each area is a high torque section in which the driving torque (resistance) generated in the stepping motor 753 is greater than that in other portions. By increasing the resistance at the boundaries in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp from the feel of his/her hand that the boundaries of each area have been reached.

Next, the outline of the third special effect will be described with reference to FIG. The third special effect is an effect corresponding to an operation that occurs in part of the game rounds related to Super Reach A to C. After development to Super Reach, the character image CA corresponding to Super Reach is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. is started under the conditions shown in When the third special effect is started, the pattern in the ready-to-win display is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 253a, three door images TA are displayed in the left part of the display screen 253a, and the right side of the display screen 253a is displayed. An operation indicator indicating the amount of operation of the operation button 721 is displayed in the section. The operation indicator is composed of a gauge GA that indicates the total operation stroke of the operation button 721 and an icon IG that moves up and down within the gauge GA according to the operation position of the operation button 721 . The gauge GA displays the boundaries of the first area E1, the second area E2, and the third area E3, and the door image TA displays a pattern or the like that outlines the effect that will be the development destination.

When the display on the display screen 253a switches to that corresponding to the third special effect, the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form, and the operation stroke is extended. After the extension of the stroke is completed, a message suggesting the operation of the effect button device 40 (for example, "Press and hold the button to select the door") is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 253a. When the effect button device 40 is operated, the height position of the icon IG is changed according to the position of the operation button 721 . In addition, in the third special effect, the operation button 721 is operated to blink the door image TA to which the character image CA moves. It will be changed. Specifically, when the icon IG is located in the portion (upper portion) corresponding to the first area E1 on the gauge GA, the upper door image TA blinks, and the icon IG is displayed in the second area on the gauge GA. When the icon IG is located in the portion (middle portion) corresponding to E2, the middle door image TA blinks, and the icon IG is located in the portion (lower portion) corresponding to the third area E3 on the gauge GA. In this case, the lower door image TA blinks.

After that, when the operation button 721 remains in the same area for a predetermined period (when held), the door image TA to be selected is confirmed, and the character image is directed toward the door image TA. CA will move. As described above, each door image TA is associated with a ready-to-win display development destination, and thereafter the effect selected by the player is executed.

Note that the blinking speed of the door image TA increases as the hold period increases, and blinking ends when the selection target is determined. If the preset operation valid period elapses before the hold period elapses, development to the effect corresponding to the blinking door image TA at that time is confirmed, and the operation valid period is reached. When the operation button is not operated (when the game does not reach the first detection position CP1), the third special effect is canceled halfway.

Next, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 88 to 90, the third special effect processing executed as part of regular processing in the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described.

(Third special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third special effect processing, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the third special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process for the third special effect is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, a third special effect execution process is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the operation effective period of the effect button device 40 is in effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether or not it is time to elapse the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. When a negative determination is made in step S2205, the process for the third special effect is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode is executed in step S2206. Thereafter, in step S2207, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and the processing for the third special effect is ended. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period.

Returning to the description of step S2204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if it is the time when the grace period for switching to the second mode has passed, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, an operation valid period setting process is performed. Thereafter, operation suggestion start processing is executed in step S2209, and the present third special effect processing ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "Press the button for a long time to select a door"), and the display control device 142 to output the operation suggestion start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "Press and hold the button to select a door" for operation suggestion, The pattern display device 253 is controlled to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Returning to the description of step S2203, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S2211, and the third special effect processing ends. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2211 and the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2212, an operation acceptance flag is set in various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914. FIG. As a result, development to any one of the three selection-type effects in the third special effect is determined. In the subsequent step S2213, a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 sec) is set to the hold counter for measuring the hold period provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and the third special effect processing ends.

Returning to the description of step S2210, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the operation valid period has passed, the process proceeds to step S2214. In step S2214, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and ends the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, the period indicator indicating the remaining valid period, etc. Let

In subsequent step S2215, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, in step S2216, the operation reception flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the third special effect processing ends.

(Second special effect execution processing)
Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 89, the processing for executing the third special effect in step S2202 will be described.

In the third special effect execution processing, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not an operation reception flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process for executing the third special effect is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, the position of the operation button 721 is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. FIG. In subsequent step S2303, torque change processing is executed. Here, the torque change processing will be described with reference to FIG. 90 .

(torque change processing)
In the torque change process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is positioned at the boundary between the areas E1 to E3. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set as the third reference torque TQ3 in step S2404. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the operation button 721 is positioned at the maximum projecting position. The detection information from the detection sensor 791 is referred to in this determination. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by stepping motor 753 is set to first reference torque TQ1. If a negative determination is made in step S2403, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is set as the second reference torque TQ2.

Returning to the description of FIG. 89, after executing the torque change process in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined in which of the first area E1 to third area E3 the position of the operation button 721 specified in step S2302 is included. In subsequent step S2305, it is determined whether or not the valid operation period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the area in which the operation button 721 is located has changed since the previous execution of the third special effect processing. If no area change has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S2306 and the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the values of the hold counters provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 are updated (decremented by 1). In subsequent step S2308, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold counter is "0", that is, whether or not the hold period described above has elapsed. If the hold period has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S2308, and the third special effect execution processing is terminated as it is. If the hold period has passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2308 and the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, display processing corresponding to the third special effect is executed. As a result, development to the effect selected by the player is confirmed, and the character image CA moves toward the selected door image TA.

Returning to the description of step S2306, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, that is, if the area where the operation button 721 is located has changed, the predetermined value (equivalent to 3 seconds) is reset to the hold counter. (Reset.

Returning to the description of step S2305, if the operation valid period has passed before the value of the hold counter becomes "0", display processing corresponding to the third special effect is executed in step S2309. In this process, the development destination is determined so that an effect corresponding to the current position of the operation button 721 is executed, and the movement of the character image CA toward the determined door image TA is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 91, the torque change accompanying the flow of the third special effect will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the third special effect.

(Torque change)
At the timing tc1, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DU for the operating port and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 are started. At the timing of tc2, it shifts to the ready-to-win display, and at the timing of tc3, it develops to the third special effect. The torque generated in the stepping motor 753 of the effect button device 40 is changed from the first reference torque TQ1, which is static torque, to the second reference torque TQ2, which is driving torque, in accordance with the start of the third special effect. As a result, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) starts moving toward the maximum protruding position. Immediately after, at the timing of tc4, the button unit 720 (operation button 721) reaches the maximum protruding position, and the switching of the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form is completed. At this timing tc4, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1, and the button unit 720 is held (stopped) at the maximum projecting position by the first reference torque TQ1.

By pressing the operation button 721 at the timing of tc5, the operation button 721 is lowered. When the operation button 721 passes through the boundary between the first area E1 and the second area E2 in the process of lowering the operation button 721, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the third reference torque TQ3, and the operation resistance is temporarily reduced. To increase. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operation resistance is reduced. After that, the operation button 721 continues to be lowered, and when the operation button 721 passes through the boundary portion between the second area E2 and the third area E3, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 switches to the third reference torque TQ3. Temporarily increases control resistance. After passing through the boundary portion, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the second reference torque TQ2, and the operation resistance is reduced. At timing tc7 when the hold period has passed after the operation button 721 reaches the third area E3, the direction of the second reference torque TQ2 generated in the stepping motor 753 is reversed, and the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is pressed. It will be lowered.

By pulling down the button unit 720 (operation button 721), the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form. When switching to the first form of the effect button device 40 is completed at the timing of tc8, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to the first reference torque TQ1.

(Flow of the 3rd special production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of the third special effect. 92 and 93 are schematic diagrams illustrating the flow of the third special effect, group (a) shows the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and group (b) shows the effect button device 40. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92(1)→FIG. 92(2), the game round related to the third special effect corresponds to the super ready-to-win display. A character image CA corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center of the . As shown in FIG. 92(2)→FIG. 92(3), when the third special effect is developed, a plurality (three) of door images TA corresponding to the subsequent development are displayed on the left side of the display screen 253a. Displayed so as to be arranged vertically, operation indicators (gauge GA and icon IG) indicating the amount of operation of the operation button 721 are displayed on the right side of the display screen 253a.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the operation button 721 is pressed and held in the second area E2. As for the operation indicator on the display screen 253a, an icon is stationary displayed in the central portion of the gauge GA, and the central door image TA among the three door images TA is displayed blinking. When a predetermined hold period elapses while the operation button 721 is held in the second area E2, the character image CA moves toward the door image TA selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 93(4). Along with this, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form.

In the example shown in FIG. 93, the door image TA in the center corresponds to the singing effect. After the character image CA reaches the center door image TA, the singing effect is executed in the center of the display screen 253a (see FIG. 93(4)→FIG. 93(5)). The game result of the game round is clearly indicated to the player depending on whether or not the third special effect (singing effect) is successful. After the end of the third special effect, as shown in FIGS. 93(5) to 93(6), the character image CA is hidden, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stop-displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. .

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

When the period of stay in which the operation button 721 is operated (held) in any one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 reaches the reference period, the operation button 721 is operated (held) according to the stay area of the operation means. develop into a performance. By realizing such a novel operation-responsive effect, the effect of using the effect button device 40 to improve the degree of attention to the game can be exhibited favorably.

In the case of a configuration in which the development destination changes according to the stay area of the operation button 721, each area becomes smaller, making it difficult to operate to hold the desired area, which encourages active participation in the game (effect button There is a concern that the holding operation of the device 40 will be difficult to perform. In other words, there is a concern that the difficulty of the hold operation will hinder the achievement of the effect of improving the degree of attention. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the third special effect, which is one of the operation corresponding effects, is executed, the effect button device 40 is displayed before the operation suggestion of the effect button device 40 is performed. is switched to the second form, and by increasing the operation stroke in advance, it is possible to enlarge each of the areas E1 to E3. As a result, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

In a configuration where the development destination can branch depending on the hold position of the operation button 721, it may be difficult to grasp the position of the operation button 721 only by tactile information. Such difficulty hinders the diversification of rendering patterns by subdividing all operation strokes into a plurality of areas. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-described inconvenience can be preferably resolved by teaching the player information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operation button 721 and the area.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, except for the case where the operation button 721 is positioned at the maximum protruding position during the effective period of operation in the third special effect, the stepping motor 753 is configured to generate drive torque. is not limited to It is also possible to configure the operation button 721 to generate static torque during the effective period of operation in the third special effect. In this case, while the operation button 721 is positioned at the boundary between the areas E1 to E3, it is preferable to increase the resistance to the operation by increasing the static torque.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 is changed to the third reference torque TQ3 at the boundary between the areas E1 to E3, thereby increasing the resistance to operation. is not limited to It is also possible to set the torque generated by the stepping motor 753 to be the second reference torque TQ2 in the boundary portion between the areas E1 to E3 so as not to increase the operation resistance.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the first area E1 does not include the maximum protrusion position to the first detection position CP1. When the operation button 721 is positioned at the maximum protruding position when the operation valid period elapses as a result of the action of releasing the button, it is handled in the same manner as the case where it is held in the first area E1. It is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure the first area E1 to include the maximum protruding position to the first detection position CP1.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the operation button 721 reaches the first detection position CP1, which is the operation detection position, so that the condition for developing the third special effect is met. can be changed to That is, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the conditions for developing the third special effect are established when the operation button is held in a predetermined area for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the maximum protruding position may be included in the first area, or may not be included in the first area. However, in the case of including the maximum protruding position, it is preferable to start counting the hold period when the position is displaced from the maximum protruding position at least once. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous determination as if the first area E1 was selected even though the operation button 721 was not operated.

<Modification 5>
In the third special effect shown in the fourth embodiment, the magnitude of the drive torque generated by the stepping motor 753 during the effect selection period (during the operation valid period) is changed with the passage of time. It is also possible to With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the difficulty of holding the operation button 721 in a desired area, and to prevent the hold operation from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 6>
When the third special effect is executed, at least one of the first area E1 to the third area E3 is set as the winning area, and the operation button 721 is held in the winning area according to the operation suggestion, and the hold operation is performed. is performed, an effect corresponding to the winning of the area is executed, while the effect corresponding to the non-winning of the area is executed when the hold operation is performed by holding the operation button 721 in an area other than the winning area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to use the pattern display device 253, the speaker unit 27, or the like to teach the player period information indicating the period of stay in the area of the operation button 721. FIG. However, in a configuration in which the operation button 721 is held and operated, there is a possibility that the operation button 721 will move between areas due to a slight increase or decrease in force. If an event such as resetting the hold period (stay period) being measured occurs frequently due to such movement between areas, the player may feel annoyed, and the operation button 721 may not be operated. be done. In view of the fact that it is necessary to adjust the force when holding, the above-mentioned instruction of the period of stay (display of period information) is not performed at the beginning of the stay when the player stays continuously in the area. preferably.

<Modification 8>
Although the first area E1 to the third area E3 have the same size in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to enlarge the second area E2 between the first area E1 on the maximum protruding position side and the third area E3 on the maximum pressing position side.

When performing the hold operation of the operation button 721, it is assumed that the operation of staying in the second area E2 between the upper and lower areas E1 and E3 is difficult because of the presence or absence of a guideline. In this case, it is assumed that the player who desires easy operation will easily exclude the second area E2 from the options. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this modified example, the above concerns can be alleviated.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the fourth special effect, which is one of the operation corresponding effects using the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The fourth special effect is the same as the first special effect and the second special effect in that the operation button 721 is set to be operated under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the second mode. However, the configuration differs from the first to third special effects in that the second form is maintained over a plurality of game rounds. The fourth special effect and the configuration related thereto will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the display mode, FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a during the second display mode, and FIG. 95(b) is a display during the third display mode. A schematic diagram showing the screen 253a, and FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display mode and the variable display mode.

As shown in FIG. 94, the results of the lottery based on the winning of the operation ports 83a and 83b are the 16R variable probability jackpot result, the 4R probability variable jackpot result A, the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B. is provided.

The 16R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 shifts to the third normal game state A corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode of the lottery mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 16 rounds. is. This third normal game state A is continued until the next big win.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result A is a jackpot that shifts to a third normal game state A in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high-probability mode after the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds ends. This is the result. This third normal game state A is continued until the next big win.

The 4R probability variable jackpot result B is a jackpot that shifts to a third normal game state B in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the high-probability mode after the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds ends. This is the result. This third normal game state B is continued until the next big win.

The 4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot that shifts to a second normal game state A in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low-probability mode after the end of the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds. This is the result. This second normal game state A is continued until the number of games played reaches a specified number (100 times).

The 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot that shifts to a second normal game state B in which the support mode by the electric accessory 91 corresponds to the high-frequency support mode and the lottery mode corresponds to the low-probability mode after the special game state corresponding to 4 rounds ends. This is the result. This second normal game state B is continued until the number of games played reaches a specified number of times (100 times).

When the 16R probability variable jackpot result is obtained, "7", "7", and "7" are stop-displayed as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot result on the effective line of the display screen 253a, and the 4R probability variable jackpot result A is displayed. In this case, "1", "1", "1", "3", "3", "3", and "5" are displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a as a symbol combination indicating that the 4R probability variable jackpot result is A. ', '5', '5', '9', '9', and '9' are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B are obtained, "2", "2", "2", and "4" are displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a. Any one of "4", "4", "6", "6", "6", "8", "8", and "8" is stopped and displayed. In other words, it is difficult to specify which of the 4R probability variable jackpot result B, the 4R normal jackpot result A, and the 4R normal jackpot result B from the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed. Of these, the 4R normal jackpot result A is clearly indicated to the player by the display effect during the special game state that it is the 4R normal jackpot result A, while the 4R probability variable jackpot result B and the 4R normal jackpot result B are not It will be shifted to the normal game state with the clear indication.

Incidentally, if a supplementary explanation is given for each game state, the first normal game state is a game state advantageous to the game hall, and the second normal game state A, the second normal game state B, the third normal game state A, and the third normal game state. Both the normal game state B and the special game state (open/close execution mode) are advantageous to the player.

Here, first to fourth display modes are provided as display modes for determining the background display on the display screen 253a and the BGM output from the speaker unit 27. FIG.

The first display mode corresponds to the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode. During the first display mode, the background of the display screen 253a is blue, and the first normal game state is clearly indicated by the first display mode.

The second display mode corresponds to the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the low probability mode. During the second display mode, the background of the display screen 253a becomes yellow, and the second normal game state A is clearly indicated by the second display mode. During this second display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(a), the characters "CHANCE ZONE" are displayed above the display screen 253a, and the number of remaining games to be maintained in the game state is counted down.

The third display mode corresponds to a second normal game state B corresponding to high frequency support mode and low probability mode and a third normal game state B corresponding to high frequency support mode and high probability mode. During the third display mode, the background of the display screen 253a is green, suggesting that either the second normal game state B or the third normal game state B is in effect depending on the third display mode. During this third display mode, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the characters "WARNING" are displayed above the display screen 253a. However, unlike the second display mode, the number of remaining games is not displayed even in the second normal game state B with the number of times limited.

The fourth display mode corresponds to the third normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode. During the fourth display mode, the background of the display screen 253a turns red, and the third normal game state A is clearly indicated by the fourth display mode.

In the present embodiment, the third display mode among the first to fourth display modes corresponds to the fourth special effect. Here, with reference to FIG. 96, a supplementary description of the third display mode will be given.

In the third display mode corresponding to the second normal game state B, the variation display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete off and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C are limited. It is configured not to occur. As for the variable display time, 2 to 8 sec is set for complete failure, and 10 sec for normal reach A is set.

In the third normal game state B, the display mode is changed to the third display mode until the number of games executed in the third normal game state B reaches the specified number of times, and when the specified number of times is reached, the display mode is switched to the fourth display mode. there is In the third display mode, as in the second display mode, the variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is limited to complete deviation and normal reach A, and normal reach B and super reach A to C are limited. is configured so that it does not occur. As for the variable display time, 2 to 8 sec is set for complete failure, and 10 sec for normal reach A is set. In the fourth display mode, the variable display mode of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a is completely out of the range, and either normal reach A to B or super reach A to C is provided, and the above limitation does not occur. As for the variable display time, 1 to 6 sec is set for complete failure, 20 sec is set for normal reach A, 24 sec is set for normal reach B, 36 sec is set for super reach A, and 36 sec is set for super reach A. In the case of reach B, 37 sec is set, and in the case of super reach C, 38 sec is set. That is, in the fourth display mode, the variable display time for the game rounds that are completely lost is shorter than in the third display mode, while the variable display time for the ready-to-win display is the same as in the third display mode. is longer than

Here, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 97, display mode change processing performed as a part of regular processing by MPU912 of information and production control device 143 is explained.

(Display mode switching process)
In the display mode switching process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the third display mode is being set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third display mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the first normal game state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, after executing the first display mode setting process in step S2503, this display mode switching process ends.

In the first display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the first display mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 933, and the display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the first display mode, and a first display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142 . Upon receiving the first display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to display corresponding to the first display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2502, when negative determination is made in the step S2502, that is, when it is not the transition timing to the first normal game state, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the second display mode setting process is executed in step S2505, and then this display mode switching process ends.

In the second display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, and the second display mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 933, and is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to the BGM corresponding to the second display mode, and a second display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142 . Upon receiving the second display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to display corresponding to the second display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2504, if a negative determination is made in step S2504, that is, if it is not the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the fourth normal jackpot result A ends, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the third display mode setting process is executed in step S2507, and then this display mode switching process ends.

In the third display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, and the third display mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 933, and output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the third display mode, and a third display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142 . Upon receiving the third display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to display corresponding to the third display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2506, if a negative determination is made in step S2506, that is, if it is not the timing at which the opening and closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to 4R probability variable jackpot result B or 4R normal jackpot result B ends, The process advances to step S2508. In step S2508, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 4R probability variation jackpot result A ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2508, the present display mode switching processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, after executing the fourth display mode setting process in step S2509, this display mode switching process ends.

In the fourth display mode setting process, the display mode flags stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 are erased, the fourth display mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 933, and the display mode flag is output from the speaker unit 27. The BGM is switched to BGM corresponding to the fourth display mode, and a fourth display mode command is transmitted to the display control device 142 . Upon receiving the fourth display mode command, the MPU 952 of the display control device 142 switches the background of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) to display corresponding to the fourth display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, that is, if the current display mode is the third display mode, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game cycle. If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the present display mode switching process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, it is determined whether or not a third display mode halfway end flag, which will be described later, is stored in various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2502. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the third display mode halfway end flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process proceeds to step S2505. That is, when the third display mode halfway end flag is stored, the display mode is shifted to the second display mode. In addition, in the second display mode to which the third display mode is terminated halfway, the variable display time is not changed, and the BGM, background display, etc. are simply switched to those corresponding to the second display mode.

Next, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 98 to 102, the fourth special effect processing executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of the regular processing will be described.

(Fourth special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 98, in the fourth special effect processing, first, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the third display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode (special game state) corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B or the 4R normal jackpot result B is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the fourth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the final round (fourth round). If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the fourth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, a switching process is executed to drive and control the stepping motor 753 to switch the effect button device 40 to the second mode. That is, when the transition to the third display mode is confirmed, the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form in the final round in the opening/closing execution mode (special game state). This switching is completed before the end of the opening/closing execution mode, that is, before the start of the third display mode.

Returning to the description of step S2601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the third display mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, it is determined whether the current game state is the third normal game state B or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, after executing the third normal game state processing in step S2606, the fourth special effect processing is terminated. When a negative determination is made in step S2605, after the second normal game state processing is executed in step S2607, the fourth special effect processing is terminated.

The third normal game state processing of step S2606 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 100. FIG.

(Third normal game state processing)
As shown in FIG. 99, in the third normal game state process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is during the valid operation period. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process advances to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the process for the third normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, an operation valid period setting process is performed. As a result, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation effective period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S2702, when a negative determination is made in step S2702, that is, when the game round corresponds to the result of being out, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the game round corresponding to the out reach. If a negative determination is made in step S2705, the process for the third normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not there is a game corresponding to a big hit result in subsequent game times to be executed during the third normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2706, the process for executing the third special effect is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, a continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. After executing the process of step S2707, the process of setting the effective period of operation is executed in step S2704, and the third special effect execution process ends.

Returning to the description of step S2701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting an operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, operation suggestion start processing is executed in step S2710.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message "Press the button" for operation suggestion, a pattern simulating a button, and the rest. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

After executing the process of step S2710, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2708, if the negative determination is made in step S2709, after executing the third normal game state operation corresponding process in step S2711, this 3 End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state in step S2711 will be described.

(Processing corresponding to operation for the third normal game state)
In the operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, proceeding to step S2802. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, operation corresponding display processing and operation suggestion end processing are executed. In the operation-responsive display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out, and a message indicating the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, any one of "Chance", "Extreme Heat", and "Super Lucky" is selected based on the game result. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S2804, the valid operation period is cleared. After that, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. When a negative determination is made in step S2805, after performing switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode in step S2806, the operation corresponding processing for the third normal game state is terminated. Specifically, when the effect button device 40 is already in the first form, it is maintained in the first form, and when it is in the second form, the stepping motor 753 generates driving torque for descent. Then, the performance button device 40 is forcibly switched to the first mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, after executing the continuation process in step S2807, the third normal game state operation corresponding process is terminated. The continuation process is a process for maintaining the effect button device 40 in the first mode until the end of the game round, and returning it to the second mode at the start of the next game round. In other words, when the continuation flag is set, even if the performance button device 40 is operated during the effective period of operation and the result of failure is clearly indicated, the second mode is restored. Further, in the continuation process, the continuation flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the second normal game state processing of step S2607 will be described.

(Second normal game state processing)
As shown in FIG. 101, in the second normal game state processing, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the game cycle corresponding to the big win result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, an operation valid period setting process is performed. As a result, the operation of the effect button device 40 is effectively accepted until the operation effective period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S2902, if a negative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if it is not the start timing of the game cycle corresponding to the big hit result, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the game round corresponding to the first loss reach after the transition to the second normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the process for the second normal game state is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, after executing the operation effective period setting process in step S2903, the second normal game state process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect button device 40 is being suggested. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the process advances to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting an operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, operation suggestion start processing is executed in step S2907.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message "Press the button" for operation suggestion, a pattern simulating a button, and the rest. The symbol display device 253 is controlled so as to display an indicator indicating the validity period.

After executing the process of step S2907, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2905, if the negative determination is made in step S2906, after executing the second normal game state operation corresponding process in step S2908, this 2 End the normal game state processing. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state in step S2908 will be described.

(Processing corresponding to operation for second normal game state)
In the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the production button device 40 has been operated based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, proceeding to step S3002. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, operation correspondence display processing and operation suggestion end processing are executed. In the operation-responsive display process, the display screen 253a is blacked out, and a message indicating the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. As this message, one of "extreme heat" and "super lucky" is selected based on the game result. It should be noted that "super lucky" corresponds to a big win result, and "extreme heat" corresponds to both a big win result and a losing result.

In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

In the subsequent step S3004, the operation valid period is cleared, and in step S3005, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed. After that, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of games executed during the current second normal game state has reached the specified number of times. When a negative determination is made in step S3006, the midway end flag of the third display mode is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3007, and the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state is terminated. . When the affirmative determination is made in step S3006, the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state is terminated as it is. Thus, in the present embodiment, even before reaching the specified number of times, if the effect button device 40 is operated during the valid operation period, or if the effect button device 40 is not operated during the valid operation period, When the operation valid period has passed, the third display mode may end in the middle and the display mode may shift to the second display mode.

Returning to the description of step S3001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, that is, if the operation valid period has passed, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, operation suggestion end processing is executed, and in subsequent step S3009, operation non-corresponding display processing is executed. In the operation-independent display process, the variable display of the pattern is continued without performing the above-described blackout display.

After that, the processing of steps S3005 to S3007 is executed, and the operation corresponding processing for the second normal game state ends.

Next, the flow of the fourth special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. FIG. 103 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the fourth special effect occurs, and FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the fourth special effect. In addition, in FIG. 103, the case where the big hit result is obtained in the fifth game round in the third normal game state B is illustrated.

(Flow of the 4th special production)
The game round started at td1 corresponds to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B. In this game round, a symbol combination (for example, "2", "2", "2") corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result B is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a at the timing of td2. At the timing td3 after the fixed display period has passed, the first normal game state is shifted to the special game state. In accordance with this, the display mode is also switched from the first display mode to a display mode (special display mode) corresponding to the special game state.

At timing td4 when the final round (fourth round) ends in the special game state, the effect button device 40 switches from the first form to the second form. At the same time, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 and the speaker section 27 inform that the production button device 40 is switched to the second mode.

At the timing of td5, the special game state is shifted to the third normal game state B, and the first game cycle in the third normal game state B is started. In the third normal game state B, the display mode is switched to the third display mode, and the characters "WARNING" corresponding to the third display mode are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a (Fig. 104(a1)). reference). At timing td6, the fifth game cycle after transition to the third normal game state B is started. This game cycle corresponds to a big hit result.

At the timing td6 when the game cycle is started, an operation effective period is set during which the operation of the effect button device 40 is effective. Thereafter, the operation of the effect button device 40 is valid until the operation valid period elapses. At the timing of td7 after the display mode on the display screen 253a becomes the ready-to-win display, the player is suggested to operate the effect button device 40 (see FIG. 104(a2)). At the timing of td8 when the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion, the display screen 253a is blacked out and a message (for example, "Super Lucky" or "Extreme heat") indicating the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state is displayed. (See FIG. 104(a3)). At the same time, the operation suggestion and operation effective period described above will end. By this operation, the effect button device 40 switches from the second mode to the first mode.

Immediately after, at the timing of td9, the display of the blackout and the message is canceled, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the big win is stop-displayed on the effective line of the display screen 253a, clearly indicating to the player that the result of the big win has been achieved. (See FIG. 104(a4)). After that, it shifts to a special game state at the timing of td10.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

In the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the form of the production button device 40 (corresponding to the "state suggesting means") provided on the front door frame 14, which is the "front part of the game machine", is the second. It is suggested that the game state is advantageous to the player by taking the form. As for the front door frame 14, since it is a portion that is more likely to be seen by other players than the pattern display device 253 or the like arranged on the back side of the game machine, the front door frame 14 is provided with an effect. By using the button device 40 to suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player, it is possible to favorably arouse the player's sense of superiority during the game on the game machine.

Here, the effect button device 40 can be operated even when it is in the second form. In this way, if the effect button device 40 can be operated in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the effect button device 40 is set to give the player a good impression of the effect button device 40, which is the state suggesting means. This is advantageous in raising the degree of attention to the fact that it is the second form.

When the effect button device 40 (second form) is operated in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the effect corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery related to the game round in which the operation is performed is executed. be done. Since the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B are game states advantageous to the player, these operations increase the chances of producing effects advantageous to the player. This is advantageous in improving the player's impression of the effect button device 40 and increasing attention to the second mode of the effect button device 40 .

When the effect button device 40 in the second mode in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B is operated according to the operation suggestion, the subsequent mode is divided into the first mode and the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to impart tension to the operation of the effect button device 40 .

When it is determined to return to the second mode during the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, at least until the game round in which the effect button device 40 is operated according to the operation suggestion is completed. It is configured to delay the return. In this way, by delaying the return until the end of the game cycle, it is possible to preferably prevent the movement of the effect button device 40 from being transmitted to the player's hand, thereby reducing the attention to the game.

When the effect button device 40 is switched to the second form, the projection amount of the effect button device 40 from the front door frame 14 is increased. Although this is preferable in terms of making the effect button device 40 conspicuous, it becomes difficult to access behind the effect button device 40 . It is not preferable in terms of improving the convenience of the effect button device 40 and increasing the degree of attention of the effect button device 40 that the restrictions regarding the arrangement of the effect button device 40 become stronger due to such circumstances. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the production button device 40 is configured to switch to the second mode in the high-frequency support mode in which the loss of game balls is suppressed, the production button device 40 can be used as storage means. Even if it is arranged around the upper plate 33 (particularly on the front side), the performance button device 40 can be prevented from substantially hindering the replenishment of game balls. In this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by alleviating the restrictions on the arrangement of the effect button device 40. FIG.

When the fourth special effect is executed in the third display mode, there is no need to switch the button to the second mode when the effect is started. In this way, by eliminating the need for a preliminary operation for switching the form of the effect button device 40, it is possible to preferably avoid the exposure of the fourth special effect due to the preliminary operation.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, after making it substantially difficult to identify the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, it corresponds to the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B During the third display mode, the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form, thereby suggesting that the game state is advantageous to the player. In light of the fact that the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B have different degrees of advantage but are both advantageous to the player, the display mode is divided to make it easier to identify each game state. By maintaining the effect button device 40 in the second mode in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, it is possible to suggest that the game state is advantageous to the player. .

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect is executed in the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, which are "advantageous state", but the low frequency support mode and low probability mode As long as the game state is more advantageous to the player than the corresponding first normal game state, the application target of the fourth special effect is arbitrary. For example, instead of or in addition to the second normal game state B and the third normal game state B, the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and low probability mode, the second normal game state A corresponding to the high frequency support mode and high probability mode It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the fourth special effect is executed in the 3 normal game state A.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the fourth special effect is generated not only in the game rounds related to the jackpot result but also in part of the game rounds related to the losing result, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which the fourth special effect occurs only in game rounds related to the result of the big win, that is, a configuration in which the occurrence of the fourth special effect=the confirmation of the big win may be adopted.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described fifth embodiment, in the game round corresponding to the result of the jackpot in the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, the operation suggestion is performed after a certain period of time after the operation of the operation button is activated. In other words, even if the operation button is operated before the operation suggestion is performed, the configuration is such that the operation acceptance→operation corresponding performance can occur. By changing this, the operation suggestion may be performed at the same time as the operation is validated. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs an operation suggestion after operation validation only about a part of jackpot result.

<Modification 5>
When the effect button device 40 is operated outside the operation effective period in the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, the effect button device 40 is switched to the first form by the operation and is maintained in the first form. It is also possible to As a result, it becomes difficult to confirm the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 33, or it becomes difficult to access the upper tray 33, so that the player's impression of the fourth special effect is preferably deteriorated. can be suppressed to It should be noted that, when the operation is performed outside the valid operation period, the effect button device 40 may be switched from the first mode to the second mode in the game round in which the fourth special effect is executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second form in part of the second normal game state and the third normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, thereby providing a game advantageous to the player. It was configured to suggest that it is in a state. Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of balls in possession is reduced as the game progresses, but the number of balls in possession gradually decreases as the number of game rounds increases. It is also possible to change the configuration to maintain the effect button device 40 in the second form when the game state (so-called small win RUSH, etc.) in which the number of balls in possession increases (slightly increases) as the game progresses. . With such a configuration, it is substantially unnecessary to replenish the upper tray 33 with game balls or the like during the game state. It is possible to suitably avoid the effect button device 40 from interfering with the progress of the game.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described fifth embodiment, when the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode is established, the mode of the effect button device 40 is maintained in the second mode, thereby creating a game state advantageous to the player. Although the configuration suggests that it is, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of the normal game state corresponding to the third display mode, by maintaining the above-described second movable effect device 400 in the projecting state, it is suggested that the game state is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that By configuring the second movable effect device 400 to be switched to a non-protruding state by the player's push-down operation, it is preferable to make it difficult to see the data display machine located above the pachinko machine 10 in the island facility of the game hall. can be avoided.

<Modification 9>
When the effect button device 40 is operated during the period in which the effect button device 40 is in the second form during the third display mode and the operation suggestion is not performed, the effect button device 40 is in the third display mode. may be configured to limit the return to the second form. As described above, in the configuration in which the effect button device 40 functioning as the state suggesting means suggests that the game state is advantageous to the player, the effect button device 40 may be operated recklessly. If the performance button device 40 fails, the suggesting function will not work properly. This is not preferable because it impairs the reliability of the state suggesting function of the game machine (the production button device 40). In this respect, with the configuration shown in this modified example, the chances of the effect button device 40 being recklessly operated can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Regarding the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the form of the effect button device 40 is divided into a first form in which the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is relatively small and a second form in which the operation stroke is relatively large. It is switchable, and in some operation corresponding effects, by prompting the player to operate the effect button device 40 in a state where the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode, the degree of attention to the effect button device 40 is improved. Ta.

In such a configuration, it is assumed that the greater the change before and after switching, the greater the impact of switching to the second mode. In view of such circumstances, for example, it is effective from the viewpoint of increasing attention to take measures such as further increasing the operation stroke in the second mode. However, it is assumed that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40 if the operation stroke is to be greatly extended. Considering the premise that the effect button device 40 is an object to be operated by the player, a decrease in the strength of the effect button device 40 causes malfunction of the effect button device 40, etc., and is a factor that lowers the reliability of the gaming machine. It is feared that One of the features of the present embodiment is that, in consideration of such circumstances, it is devised to appropriately exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention while suppressing the deterioration of the reliability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the sixth special effect accompanied by the form change of the effect button device 40 and various configurations related to the sixth special effect are characteristic. The sixth special effect is an effect that is executed after transition to the ready-to-win display (after development) in the game round corresponding to the ready-to-win display, and under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the first mode. The operation button 721 under the condition that the production button device 40 is in the second mode is shown in the first half part in which the operation corresponding production (cut-in production using the character image) is executed based on the operation of the operation button 721. and a second half part for executing an operation corresponding effect (interlocking effect of the first movable effect device 300) based on the operation of .

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the sixth special effect is the sixth special effect X executed in the game round corresponding to the losing result, and the sixth special effect X executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result. It is roughly divided into production Y. In the sixth special effect Y, when the operation button 721 is operated during the operation effective period of the second half part, the first movable effect device 300 performs the light emission effect. Effect X is different in that the first movable effect device 300 does not execute the light-emitting effect when the operation button 721 is operated during the operation effective period of the second half part.

Hereinafter, the processing for the sixth special effect (process for the sixth special effect) executed by the MP912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described first with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 105(b) and 106. The sixth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of the regular process, like the first special effect process described above.

(6th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 105(b), in the sixth special effect processing, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the sixth special effect. Whether or not to execute the sixth special effect is determined by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 at the start of the game cycle. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the sixth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102.

In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first half part is in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not an operation corresponding effect (a cut-in effect using a character image) based on the first operation is being executed, and if the operation corresponding effect is not being executed, various flag storage areas of the RAM 914 It is determined whether or not 933 stores either a continuation flag or a non-continuation flag, which will be described later. If the operation corresponding effect is being executed, or if the operation corresponding effect is not being executed but neither the continuation flag nor the non-continuing flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 to determine whether the effect is for the first half part. Proceed to processing. After the first half part processing is executed in step S3103, the sixth special effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the operation corresponding effect is not being executed and either the continuation flag or the non-continuation flag is stored, a negative determination is made in step S3102 and the flow advances to step S3104 to execute the second half part processing. After execution, the sixth special effect processing is terminated.

Next, the processing for the first half part will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Processing for the first half part)
In the processing for the first half part, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first operation (hereinafter referred to as the first operation) in the sixth special effect is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting the first operation. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the processing for the first half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, processing for setting the validity period of the first operation is performed. During this valid period, the operation of the operation button 721 is monitored based on detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791 .

In the subsequent step S3204, a suggestion start process for the first operation is executed. In the suggestion start process for the first operation, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as “Press a button”). Outputs a suggested start command for the operation. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays the message "Press!!" , controls the symbol display device 253 to display an indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

After that, in step S3205, hold standby processing is executed, and the sixth special effect processing ends. In the sixth special effect shown in the present embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter referred to as second operation) is suggested after the completion of the first operation. The operation button 721 pushed to the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held at the operation completion position, and is restricted from returning to the initial position. Here, with reference to FIG. 107, a supplementary description of the configuration related to the regulation will be given.

The movable base 741 of the production button device 40 is provided with a hold mechanism 795 that holds the operation button 721 at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position). The hold mechanism 795 has a movable piece 796 that is slidable in a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of the operation button 721, and a drive section (solenoid) that slides the movable piece 796. As shown in FIG. The movable piece 796 of the hold mechanism 795 is on standby at a retracted position that does not overlap with the movement trajectory of the operation button 721 when the drive section is de-excited, and the operation button 721 is operated by energizing the drive section. It is configured to move to a projecting position that overlaps the track.

As shown in FIGS. 107(a)→107(b), when the drive portion of the hold mechanism 795 is excited, the movable piece 796 moves from the retracted position toward the projecting position, and the tip of the movable piece 796 moves from the operation button 721. It is pressed against a vertical wall. When the operation button 721 is lowered from this state to the maximum pressing position, the tip of the movable piece 796 enters the groove 739 formed on the side surface of the operation button 721 as shown in FIGS. The movable piece 796 and the groove portion 739 are engaged. As a result, the operation button 721 is held at the operation completion position, and the return to the position before the operation is restricted. After that, the driving portion of the hold mechanism 795 is de-excited and the movable piece 796 moves to the retracted position, so that the operation button 721 returns to the position before the operation by the biasing force of the coil spring 745 (FIG. 107(c)→see FIG. 107(a)). In the following description, the state in which the return of the operation button 721 is restricted by the hold mechanism 795 is referred to as the "hold state", and the state in which the return is not restricted is referred to as the "free state".

Returning to the description of FIG. 106 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if it is determined that the first operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the first operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S3207, the process for the first half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, the process proceeds to step S3208.

In step S3208, reception notification processing of the first operation and suggestion end processing are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the following step S3209, an operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In this operation-response effect execution processing, a sound effect for an operation-response effect (character image cut-in effect) is output from the speaker unit 27, a command for the operation-response effect is transmitted to the display control device 142, and the operation response is performed. Set the performance execution period (2 sec). Upon receipt of the command, the display control device 142 displays (cut-in display) the character image selected based on the win/loss result in the game round on the display screen 253a.

After that, in step S3210, the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process for the first half part ends.

Returning to the description of step S3206, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, that is, if the effective period of the first operation has passed without the first operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, the suggestion ending process of the first operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In the subsequent step S3212, hold standby cancellation processing is executed. Specifically, the driving portion of the hold mechanism 795 is de-excited, and the movable piece 796 is returned to the retracted position. In the subsequent step S3213, a non-continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process for the first half part ends.

Next, the second half part processing in step S3104 (see FIG. 105(b)) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

(Processing for second half part)
In the second half part processing, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the second half. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303. In step S3303, a process for starting a guidance effect to draw the player's attention to the effect button device 40 is executed, and then the second half part processing is terminated. In the guidance effect start processing, output of sound effects for switching to the second mode from the speaker unit 27 is started, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the guidance effect command. The motion picture for guidance effect is an animation motion picture in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first mode to the second mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, that is, if it is not the start timing of the second half part, continuation processing is executed in step S3304, and then this second half part processing ends. This continuation process will be described later.

Returning to the description of step S3301, if a negative determination is made in step S3301, that is, if the continuation flag is not stored in the flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not a discontinuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If the discontinuation flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3305, and the processing for the second half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the discontinuation process is executed in step S3306, and then the second half part process is terminated. In the discontinuation process, the speaker unit 27, the lamp unit 24, and the display control device 142 are controlled to execute an alternative effect (non-operation corresponding effect) when the first operation is not performed on the effect button device 40. .

Next, the continuation processing in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Continuation processing)
In the continuation process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the second operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the effect button device 40 to the second mode after the switching grace period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403. In step S3403, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3403, this continuation processing ends.

If the determination is made in step S3403, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S3404. Thereafter, hold release processing is executed in step S3405. In the hold release process, the driving portion of the hold mechanism 795 is de-excited to return the movable piece 796 to the retracted position. After that, in step S3406, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and this processing for continuation ends. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period. Then, at the timing when the grace period elapses, the guidance effect described above is completed.

Returning to the description of step S3402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, that is, if it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S3407. In step S3407, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the determination in step S3407 is affirmative, the process advances to step S3408. In step S3408, processing for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S3409, suggestion start processing for the second operation is executed, and this continuation processing ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "One shot!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the guidance effect described above ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is performed.

Returning to the description of step S3407, if a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3410. In step S3410, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is blocked by the hand and the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second mode is canceled.

After that, in step S3411, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and this continuation process is terminated. By the alternative effect execution processing, the alternative effect that does not correspond to the operation of the effect button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the description of step S3401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, that is, if the second operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S3412. In step S3412, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3412, the process proceeds to step S3413.

In step S3413, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3413, and this continuation process ends. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3413 and the process proceeds to step S3414. In step S3414, a second operation reception notification process and a suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the following step S3415, an operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the operation corresponding effect execution process, an effect is executed to clearly indicate the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, in the case of a hit result, the first movable effect device 300 performs a light-emitting effect (fixed effect), and displays a character "V" in the center of the display screen 253a. displays the word "sorry". After that, the process proceeds to step S3416, the continuation flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the continuation process ends.

Returning to the description of step S3412, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3412, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has passed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3417. In step S3417, second operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S3418, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, after executing the alternative effect execution process in step S3419, the continuation process is terminated. In the alternative effect, the light emitting effect by the first movable effect device 300 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the flow of the sixth special effect will be described. FIG. 110(a) group is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 253a and the first movable effect device 300, and FIG. 110(b) group is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 110, the game round in which the sixth special effect (more specifically, the sixth special effect Y) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and FIG. The sixth special effect progresses in the order of 110(3)→FIG. 110(4)→FIG. 110(5).

At the timing after the variable display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-win display, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 and a message for suggesting an operation (for example, "Press! !”) and an indicator showing the remaining operation effective period are displayed. When the operation button 721 is operated during the operation valid period, a cut-in image of the character is displayed based on the operation. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 110, it is a game round corresponding to the winning result, and an image of a girl holding a flag with the characters "Super heat" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a. When the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position (maximum pressed position) by this first operation (first operation), the operation button 721 is held by the hold mechanism 795, and the return to the initial position is restricted. becomes. In other words, the operation button 721 remains at the operation detection position (maximum pressed position) even after the player's hand is removed from the operation button 721 . After completion of the cut-in display, the sixth special effect shifts from the first half part to the second half part.

Note that the first half of the sixth special effect can also occur as an operation corresponding effect other than the sixth special effect, that is, the first half of the effect can occur independently. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to identify from the first half part that the present effect is the sixth special effect.

After shifting to the second half part, the display on the display screen 253a is switched from the image of the girl to the above-described animated moving image for guidance effects. This moving image suggests to the player that the effect button device 40 is likely to be switched, and prompts the player to pay attention to the effect button device 40 . Switching from the first mode to the second mode of the effect button device 40 is started after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the induction effect. Specifically, the operation button 721 is lifted by releasing the movement restriction by the hold mechanism 795 and driving and controlling the stepping motor 753 .

At the timing when the switching to the second mode is completed, the guidance effect is finished, and the operation suggestion of the operation button 721 is started. For example, the display screen 253a displays a button icon imitating the operation button 721 in the second form, a message for suggesting an operation (for example, "One shot!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation effective period. be.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 110, game rounds correspond to winning results. Therefore, when the player operates the operation button 721 during the operation valid period, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 is executed, and the character "V" is displayed on the display screen 253a to indicate the winning result. will be displayed. As a result, the player is clearly informed that the game round is a winning result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode in the sixth special effect. FIG. 111 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode.

At the timing te1 after the start of the sixth special effect (first half part), the operation suggestion of the operation button 721 is started, and the driving part of the hold mechanism 795 is switched from non-excitation to excitation along with the start of the operation suggestion. At the timing te2 after that, the player operates the operation button 721, and at the timing te3 immediately after that, the operation button 721 reaches the lower limit position (operation detection position). As a result, the cut-in display described above is executed.

At this timing, the hold mechanism 795 is already in the hold standby state, and the operation button 721 is held at the lower limit position by the hold mechanism 795 . At the subsequent timing te4, the player's hand is released from the operation button 721 and the pressure is released, but since the operation button 721 is held by the hold mechanism 795, it returns to the upper limit position (initial position). no.

At timing te5 after the cut-in display ends and the second half part is started, the drive section of the hold mechanism 795 is switched from excitation to non-excitation, and output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is started. As a result, the operation button 721 starts moving toward the upper limit position (initial position), and the movable base 741 also starts moving from the lower limit position toward the upper limit position.

Here, in the effect button device 40, from the viewpoint of posture stability, there is a slight time lag between when the stepping motor 753 starts to operate and when the movable base 741 starts to rise (for example, FIG. 53, etc.). However, during the time lag, the biasing force of the coil spring 745 first causes the operation button 721 to rise independently, and thereafter the biasing force of the coil spring 745 causes the operation button 721 to rise, and the driving force of the stepping motor 753 causes the movable base 741 to rise. do. As a result, the stroke is extended by a continuous movement without a break, and the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are simultaneously moved in parallel (overlapping the rising period) to improve the responsiveness of the stroke extension. Improvements have been made.

If the effect button device 40 is configured to switch between the first mode and the second mode as described above, the visual impact of the effect button device 40 can be enhanced, and attention can be directed to the effect button device 40 itself. Here, increasing the amount of displacement of the operation button 721 when switching from the first mode to the second mode is advantageous in enhancing the impact when switching to the second mode. However, if the amount of displacement is simply increased, there is a concern that it will be difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40 in the second form. This is not preferable because it may cause the performance button device 40 to malfunction. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operation button 721 is moved to the back side of the standby position (initial position or upper limit position) of the operation button 721 in the first mode. By setting it as the structure which stops at a predetermined position (lower limit position), the displacement amount at the time of switching to a 2nd form can be earned. As a result, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention even more preferably while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, when the first operation (first operation) → second operation (second operation) continues, the operation detection position (maximum pressing position) is reached by the first operation. The configuration is such that the operation button 721 is held. In other words, the player's operation is used as means for once lowering the operation button 721 before switching to the second mode. By changing this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an actuator such as a motor is used to temporarily lower the operation button 721 to the operation detection position before switching to the second mode. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to require continuous operation of the operation button 721 for the sixth special effect that assumes switching to the second mode, and the first half part can be omitted.

Note that, when the first half part is used as a preparatory part for the second half part, it is possible to omit the operation corresponding effect based on the first operation and set the first operation as the preparatory operation for the second operation.

<Modification 2>
When the entire stroke is the drive range of the stepping motor 753, the operation button 721 may be stopped at the lower limit position by controlling the stepping motor 753 to stop when the operation button 721 reaches the lower limit position. A configuration may be adopted in which output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped and the operation button 721 remains at the lower limit position due to its own weight.

<Modification 3>
A specific configuration for restricting the operation button 721 from returning to the initial position after reaching the operation detection position (maximum pressed position) is arbitrary. For example, instead of restricting the return to the initial position by engaging the movable piece 796 and the groove 739, it may be configured to restrict the return to the initial position by attracting magnetic force such as a magnet. It is possible.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position when switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form are set. Although the configuration is such that the operation periods are overlapped, the manner in which the operation periods are overlapped may be arbitrarily changed. For example, instead of moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position at the beginning of switching when switching from the first mode to the second mode of the effect button device 40, the configuration is such that the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position at the end of switching. is also possible. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position overlaps the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position when switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form. It is also possible to configure such that the entire operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the entire operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position overlap.

<Modification 5>
In the sixth embodiment, the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position when switching the effect button device 40 from the first form to the second form are set. Although it is configured to overlap, it is not limited to this. When switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation period for moving the operation button 721 to the upper limit position and the operation period for moving the movable base 741 to the upper limit position do not overlap. be. For example, when switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode, the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position and then the movable base 741 is moved to the upper limit position, or the movable base 741 is moved to the upper limit position. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation button 721 is moved to the upper limit position after the movement.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the stepping motor 753 is started to be driven at the same time as the release of the hold of the operation button 721 (release of the movement restriction to the initial position). It is also possible to configure to start However, in order to enhance the impact of switching to the second mode, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to identify the preceding motion of the stepping motor 753 so that the switching to the second mode is not revealed in advance.

<Seventh Embodiment>
As shown in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration in which an operation corresponding effect interlocked with the movable effect device is executed based on the operation in the state where the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode (state in which the operation stroke is extended). It is advantageous to improve the degree of attention to the game. However, if this kind of behavior occurs in the final phase of a game cycle, there is a concern that the operation → the movable production device will not operate, and the result will be more likely to be missed, and a negative impression will likely remain as a reaction to heightened expectations. be done. This can be a factor in refraining from performing operations in the second mode, and further refraining from performing operations in the first mode. On the other hand, if the suggestion of the operation in the second mode is directly linked to the winning result, not only will the significance of operating the effect button device 40 diminish, but also the operation opportunity, that is, the mode switching function of the effect button device 40 will be exhibited. It is assumed that the chances of One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of these circumstances. Specifically, the seventh special effect, which is the operation corresponding effect associated with the operation in the second form, is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 112, the outline of the seventh special effect will be described. Note that descriptions of the configurations common to the above-described embodiments are basically omitted.

The seventh special performance is a performance that occurs in the final stage of the game round performance in which the ready-to-win display occurs, and is mainly the seventh special performance X that is executed when the result of the lottery is a losing result, and the lottery mainly of the winner. It is roughly classified into a seventh special performance Y which is executed when the result of the lottery is a winning result, and a seventh special performance Z which is executed only when the result of the win/fail lottery is a winning result.

In the seventh special effect X, the operation of the operation button 721 is suggested after switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode, and when the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation, the third movable effect device 803 is inactive. In other words, the seventh special effect X is a different and rich effect. On the other hand, in the seventh special effect Y, the operation of the operation button 721 is suggested after the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode, and when the operation button 721 is operated according to the suggestion, the 3 movable effect device 803 is configured to operate. In other words, the seventh special effect Y is a rich effect.

Regarding the seventh special effect X and the seventh special effect Y, the number of times of switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode is one time. On the other hand, in the seventh special effect Z, the number of times the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode is two times. Specifically, after switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode, even if the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion, the third movable effect device 803 does not operate. However, after that, the effect button device 40 switches to the second mode again, and when the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after the switching, the third movable effect device 803 is configured to operate. In other words, while the seventh special effect X and the seventh special effect Y are composed of one part, the seventh special effect Z is executed after the effect corresponding to the seventh special effect X is executed. 7 special effect It has a two-part structure for executing a unique effect. Since the seventh special effect Z is generated only in the case of a win result, the win is determined when the third movable effect device 803 is operated by the second operation suggestion.

In the following description, for convenience, the seventh special effect X and the seventh special effect Y and the first half of the seventh special effect Z are referred to as the "first part", and the second half of the seventh special effect Z is referred to as the "second part". ".

Next, the processing for the seventh special effect (processing for the seventh special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 113 to 117. FIG. The seventh special effect processing is processing executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Seventh special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 113, in the seventh special effect processing, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the seventh special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the seventh special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first part. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, the process advances to step S3503, and the start processing of the guidance effect to prompt the player's attention to the effect button device 40 is executed. In the guidance effect start processing, output of sound effects for switching to the second mode from the speaker unit 27 is started, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the guidance effect command. The motion picture for guidance effect is an animation motion picture in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first mode to the second mode. In addition, in the guidance effect start processing of step S2503, the third movable effect device 803 is switched from the light-off state to the lighting state or the blinking state.

After executing the process of step S3503, or when a negative determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3504. In step S3504, it is determined whether or not the first part is in progress. If the determination in step S3504 is affirmative, the process for the seventh special effect is terminated after the process for the first part is executed in step S3505. If a negative determination is made in step S3504, the process for the second part is executed in step S3506, and then the process for the seventh special effect ends.

(Processing for the first part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the first part processing, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first operation (hereinafter referred to as first operation) is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602. In step S3602, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the effect button device 40 to the second mode after the switching grace period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the process for the first part ends.

When the determination is made in step S3603, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S3604. After that, in step S3605, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and the processing for the first part ends. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period. It should be noted that the guidance effect described above is completed at the timing when the grace period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S3602, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, that is, if it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the determination in step S3606 is affirmative, the process advances to step S3607. In step S3607, processing for setting the validity period of the first operation is performed. After that, in step S3608, suggestion start processing for the first operation is executed, and the processing for the first part ends.

In the first operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and the operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Press!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the guidance effect described above ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is performed.

Returning to the description of step S3606, if a negative determination is made in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is blocked by the hand and the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second mode is canceled.

After that, in step S3610, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the first part ends. By the alternative effect execution processing, the alternative effect that does not correspond to the operation of the effect button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the description of step S3601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, that is, if the first operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S3611. In step S3611, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3611, the process proceeds to step S3612. In step S3612, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3612, and the process for the first part ends. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3612 and the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, reception notification processing of the first operation and suggestion end processing are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the subsequent step S3614, a first operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the first operation corresponding effect execution process, when the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect Y, while the third movable effect device 803 is maintained in the lighting state or the blinking state, it is directed toward the center of the display screen 253a. move. As a result, the degree of expectation as a winning result is greatly increased. On the other hand, if the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect X or the seventh special effect Z, the third movable effect device 803 is stopped while the third movable effect device 803 is stopped at the standby position. Switch to the off state. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning results is lowered.

After performing the first operation corresponding effect execution process in step S3614, the process proceeds to step S3615. In step S3614, it is determined whether or not the current seventh special effect is the seventh special effect Z. If a negative determination is made in step S3614, the process for the first part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3614, the second part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 in step S3616, and the process for the first part ends.

Returning to the description of step S3611, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3611, that is, if the effective period of the first operation has passed without the first operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3617. In step S3617, the suggestion ending process of the first operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S3618, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, in step S3619, the process for executing the alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the first part ends. In the alternative effect, the interlocking effect by the third movable effect device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result or the like.

Next, the process for the second part in step S3506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Processing for the second part)
In the process for the second part, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the second operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not switching to the second mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S3703, the process proceeds to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether or not it is during the switching trigger valid period. In the present embodiment, the switching trigger to the second mode is set when the operation button 721 is out of the operation detection position, that is, when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is OFF. is established until 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the second part. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3705.

In step S3705, based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether the operation button 721 is out of the operation detection position (whether it is OFF). If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the process for the second part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, the process advances to step S3706 to execute switching start processing to the second mode. Now, with reference to FIG. 116, processing for switching to the second mode is executed.

(Switching start processing to the second mode)
In the switching start processing to the second mode, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the switching trigger effective period remains. For example, when the player releases the operation button 721 and the operation button 721 returns to the initial position before the second half part starts, it is determined that the switching trigger effective period remains, and the remaining period is 3 seconds. becomes. Further, when the operation button 721 is turned off at the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the second half part, it is determined that the effective switching period does not remain (the remaining period becomes 0 seconds).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, low-speed drive processing is executed. In this embodiment, a low-speed drive control mode for rotating the stepping motor 753 at a low speed (first speed) and a high-speed drive control mode for rotating the stepping motor 753 at a high speed are provided as drive control modes for the stepping motor 753. ing. The low-speed drive processing shown in step S3802 is drive control processing in a low-speed drive control mode, and the stepping motor 753 rotates at a low speed by this processing. As a result, the movable base 741 rises at a low speed.

In the subsequent step S3803, a speed change flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. Although the details will be described later, by setting the speed change flag, the drive control mode of the stepping motor 753 is switched from the low-speed drive control mode to the high-speed drive control mode. After that, in step S3804, low-speed drive period setting processing is executed, and this switching start processing ends. In the low-speed drive period setting process, the low-speed drive period is set by referring to a map stored in the ROM 913, specifically, a map showing the relationship between the remaining period and the low-speed drive period. Although the details will be described later, this map is configured such that the longer the remaining period, the longer the low-speed drive period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the low-speed drive period.

Returning to the description of step S3801, if a negative determination is made in step S3801, that is, if the remaining period is 0, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3805, and then this switching start processing ends. The high-speed drive processing shown in step S3805 is drive control processing in a high-speed drive control mode, and the stepping motor 753 rotates at high speed (second speed) by this processing. As a result, the movable base 741 rises at high speed.

It should be noted that the difference between the first speed and the second speed is such that both are slower than the rotation speed (third speed) of the stepping motor 753 when switching the production button device 40 to the second mode in the first part. is provided. As already explained, when switching to the second form occurs in the second half, the result of winning is practically clarified. The reason for intentionally delaying the switching to the second mode in the second half part as described above is to secure the leeway to enjoy the switching to the second mode.

Returning to the description of FIG. 115, after executing the switching start processing to the second mode in step S3706, the setting processing of the switching grace period is executed in step S3707, and the guidance effect start processing is executed in step S3708. After that, the process for the second part ends. In the second part of the seventh special effect, the period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 5 seconds. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period. That is, the required period and grace period are longer than those of the first part. Further, the guidance effect is basically the same moving image as the guidance effect executed in step S3503, but the deformation speed of the button in the animation is changed to be slower than in step S3505. Also, at the beginning of the animation, a cut-in display indicating that the seventh special effect will continue is executed. It should be noted that the guidance effect described above is completed at the timing when the grace period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S3704, if a negative determination is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3709. In step S3709, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the switching trigger effective period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3709, the process for the second part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3709, the process for the second part is terminated after performing the alternative effect execution process in step S3715, which will be described later.

Returning to the description of step S3703, if the determination in step S3703 is affirmative, that is, if the effect button device 40 is being switched to the second mode, the switching speed change process is executed in step S3710. After that, the process for the second part ends. Here, the switching speed changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117 .

(Switching speed change processing)
In the switching speed change process, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not a speed change flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S3901, this switching speed change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the low-speed driving period set in step S3804. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, this switching speed change processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, high-speed drive processing is executed in step S3903, and then this switching speed change processing ends. By executing the high-speed drive process, the stepping motor 753 switches from low-speed rotation to high-speed rotation, and the rising speed of the movable base 741 (operation button 721) switches from low speed to high speed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, a supplementary description of the low/high speed switching pattern will be given. FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing the game flow when the seventh special effect Z is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 118, the operation corresponding effect is executed at the timing of tf1, and the transition to the second part is performed at the timing of tf2. With the transition to the second part, the above-described switching trigger valid period is reached. If the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed by the time the second part is started (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off), the stepping motor 753 is turned on at the start timing of the second part. Start slow rotation. As a result, the movable base 741 (operation button 721) starts rising at a low speed. In this case, the low speed drive period is the longest, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 is switched from low speed to high speed at timing tf6 when the low speed drive period has elapsed. After that, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at the timing of tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

On the other hand, as indicated by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 118, when the operation button 721 completes returning to the initial position at the timing of tf3 during the switching trigger valid period (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off), , the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at a low speed at the timing of tf3. As a result, the movable base 741 (operation button 721) starts rising at a low speed. In this case, the low-speed driving period becomes shorter than when the low-speed operation starts at timing tf2, and the operation of the stepping motor 753 changes from low speed to high speed at timing tf5 after the low-speed driving period has elapsed. switch to After that, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at the timing of tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

Next, as indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 118, when the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off) at the timing of tf4 when the switching trigger effective period ends, , the stepping motor 753 starts rotating at high speed at the timing of tf4. As a result, the movable base 741 starts rising at high speed. In this case, the low speed drive period is 0. After that, the movable base 741 reaches the upper limit position at the timing of tf7, and the stepping motor 753 stops.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the return of the operation button 721 to the initial position is completed (when the detection sensor 791 is turned off) at any timing during the switching trigger valid period, The period from the start of the second part to the timing when the movement of the movable base 741 is completed (timing of tf7) is set to be the same. In the second part, the timing at which switching to the second mode starts differs depending on the timing at which the player releases the operation button 721. It is a device to suppress the excessive diversification of the flow of production in.

Returning to the description of step S3702 in FIG. 115, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, that is, if it is time to elapse the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S3711. In step S3711, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the determination in step S3711 is affirmative, the process advances to step S3712. In step S3712, processing for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. After that, in step S3713, the suggestion start process for the second operation is executed, and the process for the second part ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "One shot!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the guidance effect described above ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is performed.

Returning to the description of step S3711, if a negative determination is made in step S3711, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is blocked by the hand and the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second mode is canceled.

After that, in step S3715, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the second part ends. By the alternative effect execution processing, the alternative effect that does not correspond to the operation of the effect button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the description of step S3701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the second operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S3716, the process proceeds to step S3717.

In step S3717, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation). If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S3717, and the process for the second part ends. If the second operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3717 and the process proceeds to step S3718. In step S3718, second operation reception notification processing and suggestion end processing are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the subsequent step S3719, a second operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the second operation corresponding effect execution processing, an effect is executed to clearly indicate the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, in the case of a hit result, the third movable effect device 803 is driven to move the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 from the standby position to the effect position. Along with this, effect display is performed on the display screen 253a so as to emphasize the decoration.

Returning to the description of step S3716, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3716, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has passed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S3720. In step S3720, a suggestion end process for the second operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S3721, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first form is executed. After that, the process for the second part is terminated after the execution process of the alternative effect is performed in step S3722. In the alternative effect, the interlocking effect by the third movable effect device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 119 to 120, the flow of the seventh special effect when the seventh special effect (seventh special effect Z) is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result is supplemented. explain. Figure 119 (a) group and Figure 120 (a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable production device 803, Figure 119 (b) group and Figure 120 (b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40 It is a diagram. In the example shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the game round in which the 7th special effect (more specifically, the 7th special effect Z) is executed corresponds to the winning result. )→FIG. 119(3)→FIG. 119(4)→FIG. 120(5)→FIG. 120(6)→FIG. 120(7)→FIG. 120(8).

The seventh special effect (seventh special effect Z) is started after the variable display mode of the symbol on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-win display. After the display screen 253a has executed the guidance effect indicating that the form change will occur, a button icon imitating the operation button 721 and a message for suggesting an operation (for example, "Press!!") are displayed on the display screen 253a. An indicator showing the remaining operation valid period is displayed.

When the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the button icon being displayed is displayed in pieces, and the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 remains at the standby position. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the result of losing is temporarily displayed on the display screen 253a.

Immediately after the symbol combination corresponding to the missing result is temporarily stopped and displayed, a girl's cut-in display occurs on the display screen 253a, and the symbols start to change again. Thereafter, the display is switched from the cut-in display to the animation moving image of the guidance effect, and the form of the effect button device 40 is switched again to the second form. At this time, the speed at which the operation button 721 rises is set to be slower than when switching to the second mode occurs in the first part.

After the operation button 721 rises to some extent at low speed, the speed changes from low speed to high speed, and the switching to the second mode is quickly completed. After switching to the second form is completed, a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message for suggesting an operation (for example, "One shot!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation effective period are displayed on the display screen 253a. be done.

When the operation button 721 is operated by the player during this operation suggestion, the movable decoration of the third movable effect device 803 falls from the waiting position to the effect position, and the effect of emphasizing the movable decoration is displayed on the display screen 253a. is displayed. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the hit result is stopped (determined display) on the display screen 253a.

If the production button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in the present embodiment, the visual impact of the production button device 40 is enhanced so that attention is directed to the production button device 40 itself. can be encouraged to When the operation button 721 is operated after switching the effect button device 40 to the second form, the first special effect (effect not interlocked with the third movable effect device 803) with a relatively low degree of expectation, which is the winning result, and the winning result. or the second special effect (effect interlocked with the third movable effect device 803) with a relatively high degree of expectation. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though the expectations for the second special effect are aroused, there is a concern that the impression that the second mode→operation was useless will remain. In this case, even if the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode and the operation is urged, there is a concern that the chances of the operation being performed will decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the effect button device 40 returns to the second mode when the first special effect is executed. By enabling the re-operation in the second form, it is possible to leave the expectation for the opportunity of generating the highly anticipated operation-responsive effect. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience and using the effect button device 40 to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the present embodiment, when the first special effect on the disadvantageous side is executed, the second special effect can be generated by returning to the second mode and re-operating. To suppress a rapid decrease in the degree of attention to a game of a player who expects a second special performance when the special performance occurs.

As a configuration for avoiding returning to the second mode when the second special performance on the advantageous side is executed, there is a configuration that can return to the second mode only when the first special performance on the disadvantageous side is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the degree of attention to the game when the first special effect is executed.

By diversifying the displacement speed of the operation button 721 when the effect button device 40 is switched from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to suitably suppress the return motion from becoming monotonous. In particular, by switching the displacement speed from low speed to high speed and ensuring a drive period at low speed, it is possible to appropriately prevent overlooking of the movement of the operation button 721 . It is configured such that the earlier the timing at which the condition for starting the return operation is met, the longer the displacement period at low speed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure a long drive period at low speed as much as possible.

Earning the drive time at low speed as described above is preferable in terms of improving the player's satisfaction. However, delaying the progress of the presentation by such a function causes excessive diversification of the progress pattern of the presentation. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the game cycle to the completion of the return to the second mode is the same regardless of the timing at which the conditions for starting the return action are satisfied. The above concern can be eliminated favorably by limiting the above.

Promptly switching to the second form for the first time is preferable for enhancing the impact. By making the required switching period for the first time and the required switching period for the second time different, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the switching to the second mode has simply occurred twice. In particular, by differentiating the second switching to the second form so that the required period is longer than the first switching to the second form, it is possible to earn a period of time to follow the movement at the time of return and play the game. It is preferable in terms of improving the satisfaction level of users.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, the effect button device 40 is switched to the second mode in the second part to indicate that the result is a win, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the production button device 40 is switched to the second form in the latter part, it is possible to adopt a configuration that does not result in a hit (can result in a miss). In other words, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the seventh special effect Z can occur even in game rounds corresponding to the result of losing.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, when switching the effect button device 40 to the second form in the second part, the switching speed (the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753) is switched from low speed to high speed during switching. , it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the switching is not performed. That is, the switching speed when switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode in the second part may be limited to the speed of 1.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the switching speed when switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode in the second part is slower than the switching speed when switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode in the first part. Although the difference is provided so as to be the same, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to make the switching speed in the first part different from the switching speed in the second part, the switching speed when switching the effect button device 40 to the second mode in the second part is the same as the switching speed in the first part. It is also possible to provide a difference that is faster than the switching speed when switching to the second mode.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh special effect Z in the seventh embodiment, by using the hold mechanism shown in the sixth embodiment, when the operation button 721 is operated in the first half part, the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressing position), and the hold is released when switching to the second mode in the second part.

<Eighth embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of modes with different operation strokes of the operation button 721 . In this embodiment, the eighth special effect, which is an effect corresponding to operation using the mode switching function of the effect button device 40, is characteristic. The eighth special effect is divided into a first half part in which an operation corresponding effect is executed based on a long press operation (first operation) and a second half part in which an operation corresponding effect is executed based on a single operation (second operation). In addition, it is an effect that the operation suggestion is executed at most twice during the eighth special effect of 1. The configuration relating to the eighth special effect will be described below, focusing on differences from the above embodiments. First, referring to the flowcharts of FIGS. 121 to 124, the process for the eighth special effect (process for the eighth special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The eighth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(8th special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 121, in the eighth special effect processing, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the eighth special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4001, the eighth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. Specifically, this determination is made based on whether or not a later-described second half part shift flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, that is, if the second half part shift flag is not stored, the first half part processing is executed in step S4003, and the eighth special effect processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S4002, that is, if the second half part transition flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the second half. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, guidance effect start processing is executed in step S4005. In the guidance effect start processing, output of sound effects for switching to the second mode from the speaker unit 27 is started, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the guidance effect command. The motion picture for guidance effect is an animation motion picture in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first mode to the second mode.

After executing the induction effect start process of step S4005, or when a negative determination is made in step S4004, the second half part process is executed in step S4006, and the eighth special effect process is terminated.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 122, in the first half part processing, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the first operation, which is a long press operation, is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4102. In step S4102, it is determined whether or not it is time to start suggesting the first operation. If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the processing for the first half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103. In step S4103, processing for setting the validity period of the first operation is executed. In the subsequent step S4104, processing for setting the determination reference period for the first operation is performed. The determination reference period is a period during which the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressed position), and is a reference period for determining that the operation is completed in later determination processing. There are multiple candidates for this criterion period, and a relatively long period is likely to be set in the case of a losing result, and a relatively short period is likely to be set in the case of a winning result. . After that, in step S4105, the suggestion start process of the first operation is executed, and the process for the first half part ends.

As an effect similar to the eighth special effect, a similar special effect in which the latter part of the eighth special effect is omitted is provided. In other words, the outline of this similar special effect is the same as the first half of the eighth special effect, and it is difficult to identify from its behavior whether it is the similar special effect or the eighth special effect. ing. Even in this similar special effect, there are multiple candidates for the criterion period, and in the case of a losing result, a relatively long period is likely to be set, and in the case of a winning result, a relatively short period is set. Easier to set. Then, in the game round which is the result of winning, the first movable effect device 300 operates immediately when the long press period reaches the reference period for determination, and the fact that the result is the winning is clearly shown to the player, while the result of losing is shown to the player. , the first movable effect device 300 remains inactive even if the long press period reaches the criterion period.

In the suggestion start process of the first operation, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as “long press the button”), and the display control device 142 is operated. Output a suggested start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "press and hold the button" for operation suggestion, which is the first form. The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating the button being pressed and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. Further, on the display screen 253a, an operation indicator whose display mode changes according to the long pressing period of the operation button 721 is displayed. When the operation indicator becomes MAX, it is suggested to the player that the operation has been completed.

Returning to the description of step S4101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the first operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4107. In step S4107, it is determined whether or not the accumulated period of the long press operation (first operation) has reached the determination reference period. If a negative determination is made in step S4107, the process for the first half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, the process proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, operation completion notification processing and suggestion end processing of the first operation are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the subsequent step S4109, a first operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the first operation corresponding effect execution process, a countdown display of "3"→"2"→"1"→"0" is performed on the display screen 253a. Note that the eighth special effect does not end in the first half, and the first movable effect device 300 remains inactive even after the countdown display is completed.

Thereafter, in step S4110, the second half part shift flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. Then, in step S4111, after the hold standby process, which is the control process of the driving unit of the hold mechanism 795 (see the sixth embodiment), is executed, the first half part process is terminated.

In the eighth special effect shown in the present embodiment, a second operation (hereinafter referred to as second operation) is suggested after the completion of the first operation. The operation button 721 pushed to the operation completion position (maximum pressing position) by the first operation is held at the operation completion position, and is restricted from returning to the initial position.

Returning to the description of step S4106, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, that is, if the time has come when the validity period of the first operation has passed, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether or not the first operation is being continued. That is, it is determined whether or not the first operation is continued until the timing when the operation valid period elapses even though the first operation is not completed within the operation valid period. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, it is considered that the operation is completed even though the condition related to the determination reference period is not satisfied, and each process of steps S4108 to S4111 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4112, the process proceeds to step S4113. In step S4113, suggestion end processing for the first operation is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period. After that, after executing the alternative effect execution process in step S4114, the process for the first half part ends.

Next, the second half part processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Processing for second half part)
In the second half part processing, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the second operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, it is determined whether or not it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the process proceeds to step S4203. In step S4203, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the process proceeds to step S4204.

In step S4204, processing for setting a grace period for switching is performed. In subsequent step S4205, hold standby cancellation processing is executed. As a result, the movable piece of the hold mechanism 795 moves from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the return restriction of the operation button 721 to the initial position is released. As a result, the operation button 721 starts moving toward the initial position by the biasing force of the coil spring 745 .

After that, in step S4206, the processing for setting the stop position of the movable base 741 is executed, and the second half part processing ends. In the stop position setting process, the stop position of the movable base 741 in the current eighth special effect, ie, the form of the effect button device 40, is determined based on the success/fail result. In the present embodiment, in addition to the first, second, and third modes, the production button device 40 has a protrusion level (operation stroke) of the operation button 721 of the first mode and the third mode. An intervening fourth configuration is provided. That is, as shown in FIGS. 124(a) to 124(d), the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is configured to increase in the order of the first mode<fourth mode<third mode<second mode. In the following description, for convenience, the protrusion level of the first form is "LV0", the protrusion level of the fourth form is "LV1", the protrusion level of the third form is "LV2", and the protrusion level of the second form is "LV3". called.

As shown in FIG. 124(e), the eighth special effect includes the eighth special effect A defined to have a protrusion level of "LV1" and the eighth special effect A defined to have a protrusion level of "LV2". It is roughly divided into the 8th special effect B and the 8th special effect C defined so that the protrusion level is “LV3”, and the special effects are in the order of 8th special effect A < 8th special effect B < 8th special effect C The difference is provided so that the degree of expectation for transition to the game state is high. In step S4206, which one of the eighth special effects A to C is to be used as the current eighth special effect is determined based on the success/failure result and the operation status of the first operation.

Specifically, when the first operation shifts to the second half without reaching the criterion period, "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates, and either "LV1" or "LV2" is set. . At this time, the difference is provided so that "LV2" is more likely to be set in the case of a hit result, and "LV1" is more likely to be set in the case of a miss result.

On the other hand, when the first operation reaches the determination reference period and shifts to the second half part, any one of the projection level "LV1" to the projection level "LV3" is set. At this time, if it is a hit result, it is likely to be set in the order of "LV1" < "LV2" < "LV3", and if it is a loss result, it is likely to be set in the order of "LV3" < "LV2" < "LV1". The difference is set so that

Returning to the description of step S4203 in FIG. 123, if a negative determination is made in step S4203, that is, if it is not time to start switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S4207. In step S4207, it is determined whether or not it is in the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4207, the process for the second half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, the form switching process is executed in step S4208, and then the second half part process is terminated. Now, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 125, the form switching process will be described.

(Mode switching processing)
In the mode switching process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the stepping motor 753 is being rotated at a low speed. If a negative determination is made in step S4301, the process proceeds to step S4302. In step S4302, it is determined based on detection information from the detection sensor 791 whether or not the operation button 721 is turned off. If a negative determination is made in step S4302, the present mode switching processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the mode switching process ends after low-speed drive processing is executed in step S4303.

In this low speed driving process, the stepping motor 753 is rotated at a low speed. Here, the "low speed" in the present embodiment means that the projection level of the effect button device 40 is set according to the expected degree of transition to the special game state, like the first special effect shown in the first embodiment. This speed is lower than the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 when the form is switched in the special effect of the type that does not change. By lengthening the period required for form switching in this way, it is possible to prevent the process of generating a difference in projection level from being overlooked.

Returning to the description of step S4301, if the vehicle is being driven at a low speed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301 and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, it is determined whether or not the movable base 741 has reached the stop position set in step S4206. If a negative determination is made in step S4304, the present mode switching processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4305, the stepping motor 753 is stopped. Thus, the mode switching of the effect button device 40 is completed.

Returning to the description of step S4202 in FIG. 123, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching, the process proceeds to step S4209. In step S4209, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the determination in step S4209 is affirmative, the process advances to step S4210. In step S4210, processing for setting the validity period of the second operation is performed. Thereafter, in step S4211, suggestion start processing for the second operation is executed, and the second half part processing ends.

In the second operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "Press a button"), and an operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "One shot!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the guidance effect described above ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is performed.

Returning to the description of step S4209, if a negative determination is made in step S4209, the process proceeds to step S4211. In step S4211, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. In other words, if the movement of the operation button 721 is blocked by the hand and the switching to the second mode is not completed within the grace period, the switching to the second mode is canceled.

After that, in step S4212, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the second half part process ends. By the alternative effect execution processing, the alternative effect that does not correspond to the operation of the effect button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the description of step S4201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, that is, if the second operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S4214. In step S4214, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the second operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S4214, the process proceeds to step S4215.

In step S4215, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated (second operation). If the second operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4215, and the process for the second half part ends. If the second operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4215 and the process proceeds to step S4216. In step S4216, second operation reception notification processing and suggestion end processing are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the subsequent step S4217, a second operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the second operation corresponding effect execution processing, an effect is executed to clearly indicate the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable effect device 300 is driven to perform the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 . Along with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Returning to the description of step S4214, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4214, that is, if the valid period of the second operation has passed without the second operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S4218. In step S4218, second operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S4219, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, after executing the alternative effect execution process in step S4220, the process for the second half part ends. In the alternative effect, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the extinguishing effect (blackout effect) of the pattern display device 253 are not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result.

Below, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 126 and 127, supplementary explanation of the flow of the eighth special effect when the eighth special effect (eighth special effect C) is executed in the game round corresponding to the winning result. do. Figure 126 (a) group and Figure 127 (a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the first movable production device 300, Figure 126 (b) group and Figure 127 (b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40 It is a diagram. In the example shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the game round in which the eighth special effect (more specifically, the eighth special effect C) is executed corresponds to the winning result, and FIG. )→FIG. 126(3)→FIG. 126(4)→FIG. 127(5)→FIG. 127(6)→FIG. 127(7)→FIG. 127(8).

After the variable display mode of the symbols on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-win display, the eighth special effect (the eighth special effect C) is started. The eighth special effect in the present embodiment is a so-called mission effect, and the player is notified of information indicating what kind of event should occur in this effect to shift to the special game state. Specifically, a message "Turn on the patrol lamp" is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a.

After that, instead of the message, a message such as "Press and hold the button" for suggesting operation, a pattern imitating a button with an extended operation stroke, and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period are displayed. A display device 253 is controlled. Further, on the display screen 253a, an operation indicator whose display mode changes according to the long pressing period of the operation button 721 is displayed.

When the operation button 721 is long-pressed according to the operation suggestion, the display mode of the operation indicator changes according to the period during which the long-press is continued. When the period during which the long press is continued reaches a predetermined criterion period, a message (for example, characters of "completion") indicating the completion of the operation is displayed on the display screen 253a. Along with this, the operation button 721 is held at the operation detection position (maximum pressed position), and the return to the initial position is restricted. After that, a guidance effect for drawing attention to the operation button 721 is executed on the display screen 253a. In the guidance effect, first, the characters "Pay attention to the button" and the pattern of the arrow pointing toward the operation button 721 are displayed, and then the moving image imitating the shape change of the effect button device 40 is displayed.

The form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to any one of the second to fourth forms in accordance with the display of the moving image. That is, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is changed. The degree of expectation for mission achievement, that is, the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is higher in the order of protruding level LV1 < protruding level LV2 < protruding level LV3. It is assumed that attention will be paid to the behavior of

After the transformation of the production button device 40 is completed, the display screen 253a displays a button icon imitating the operation button 721, a message for suggesting an operation (for example, "One shot!!"), and an indicator indicating the remaining operation effective period. is displayed.

When the player operates the operation button 721 during this operation suggestion, the display screen 253a is blacked out and the first movable effect device 300 starts the light emission effect. After that, the symbol combination corresponding to the hitting result on the effective line of the display screen 253a is stop-displayed (determined display) while the light-emitting effect is being continued.

According to the present embodiment, after the operation button 721 is operated and the effect is executed, by releasing the operation button 721, the operation button switches to any of the protrusion levels LV1 to LV3. These protrusion levels LV1 to LV3 are determined according to the result of the lottery. In this way, if the displacement destination (return destination) of the operation button 721 can be changed according to the result of success or failure, it is possible to suitably suppress the rapid decrease in attention to the effect button device 40 triggered by the operation. .

When the shape change of the effect button device 40 occurs continuously, it is not preferable to increase the impression that the shape change is simply repeated, in order to improve the degree of attention. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the displacement speed of the operation button 721 in the form change after the operation is slower than the displacement speed of the operation button 721 in the form change before the operation. , the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed. In the transformation after the operation, since the degree of expectation may differ depending on the arrival position, by making the displacement slowly on purpose, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, when the protrusion level is switched based on the operation of the operation button 721, the protrusion level LV1 to the protrusion level LV3 are switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the protrusion level is switched based on the operation of the operation button 721, the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV3 can be set as the switching target.

<Modification 2>
In the case of executing the eighth special effect in the eighth embodiment, when switching the mode of the effect button device 40 along with the transition to the second half part, the switching operation is temporarily stopped at the boundary portion of each projecting level. It is good also as a structure to make it slow down or a structure to slow down.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth special effect in the eighth embodiment, the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 when switching the form of the effect button device 40 with the transition to the second half part is set to the protrusion level "LV1" to the protrusion level "LV3". , but the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may be different according to the set protrusion level. For example, the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may increase as the amount of protrusion increases, or the rotation speed of the stepping motor 753 may increase as the amount of protrusion decreases.

<Modification 4>
In the eighth embodiment, if the operation period of the first operation in the first half does not reach the criterion period, the protrusion level "LV3" is excluded from the setting candidates for the protrusion level of the operation button 721 in the second half. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration including the protrusion level "LV3".

<Modification 5>
In the eighth embodiment, the operation period of the first operation in the first half part does not reach the criterion period, and the operation period of the first operation in the first half part reaches the criterion period. Although the configuration is such that the setting mode of the protrusion level is different, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the setting mode of the protrusion level in the second half part to be the same between when the operation period of the first operation has not reached the judgment reference period and when the judgment reference period has been reached.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the ninth special effect is executed in which the shape change of the effect button device 40 continues over a plurality of game rounds. are different in form and composition. The configuration relating to the ninth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 128, the setting process for the ninth special effect (the ninth special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The ninth special effect setting process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Ninth special effect setting process)
In the ninth special effect setting process, first, in step S4401, a hold command indicating that the hold information has been added from the main control device 162, or a shift command indicating that the hold information is digested and the next game round is started. It is determined whether or not any has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, the process proceeds to step S4402. In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the ninth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a ninth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4403.

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not it is planned to execute an operation corresponding production using the production button device 40 in the current game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, one of the currently stored holds is tentatively determined. In this provisional decision, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold corresponding to the reach indication, and if there are a plurality of holds corresponding to the reach indication, one hold is selected from among the plurality of holds as the 10th special. Tentatively decided as a candidate for production. In this determination, a hold with a longer variable display time is treated preferentially than a hold with a shorter variable display time so as to be more likely to be subject to provisional decision.

If there is no hold that is subject to provisional determination, a negative determination is made in step S4405, and the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. If there is a hold to be tentatively determined, an affirmative determination is made in step S4405 and the process proceeds to step S4406.

In step S4406, it is determined whether or not all of the holds preceding the tentatively determined hold correspond to complete loss (result of loss of reach display incompatibility). If a negative determination is made in step S4406, the ninth special effect setting process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4406, a ninth special effect lottery process is executed in step S4407. By winning the lottery process, provisional decision → start confirmation (final decision).

When the start of the ninth special effect is determined, an affirmative determination is made in step S4408 and the process proceeds to step S4409. In step S4409, the maximum number of steps up to the finally determined target suspension is specified. Specifically, the number of holds existing between the finally determined target hold and the hold related to the current game cycle is specified.

In the following step S4410, the final form of the effect button device 40 before operation suggestion is determined based on the pending information (C1, C2, C3, CS) subject to the tentative decision. In the effect button device 40 according to the present embodiment, as the protrusion levels of the operation button 721, protrusion levels LV0 to LV5 are provided, and protrusion level LV1 < protrusion level LV2 < protrusion level LV3 < protrusion level LV4 < protrusion. A difference is provided so that the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state increases in the order of level LV5. That is, as for the ninth special effect, the ninth special effect A whose final form is the protrusion level LV1, the ninth special effect B whose final form is the protrusion level LV2, and the ninth special effect C whose final form is the protrusion level LV3. , a ninth special effect D in which the final form is a protrusion level LV4, and a ninth special effect E in which the final form is a protrusion level LV5 (see FIG. 129(a)).

Incidentally, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 129(b), the difference in the amount of protrusion at each protrusion level is set to be basically the same, but the protrusion level LV0 and the protrusion level LV1 are different. The amount difference X1 is differentiated to be larger than the differences X2 to X5 between the other protrusion levels. This is a device to enhance the impact of the appearance when changing form for the first time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 128, after the final form is determined in step S4410, the process up to the final form, that is, the form switching pattern is determined in step S4411. After that, in step S4412, a mode switching process is executed to switch the effect button device 40 from the projection level LV0 to the projection level LV1. This ninth special effect setting process is ended.

As for the mode switching pattern, when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the protruding level also rises by at least "1 level". In other words, it is configured such that an event such as the protrusion level lowering as the game progresses does not occur. However, it is difficult for the player to specify which game round the ninth special effect has started, and the expectation is that the ninth special effect will continue as long as possible. .

In addition, there are cases where there are multiple protrusion levels that can change as the game progresses by "1", and such behavior may cause the protrusion level to rise at once. Even when the number of reservations is small, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's attention from becoming low.

For example, FIG. 130(a) illustrates a form switching pattern when the final form is the protrusion level LV3. Pattern 1 is stepped up in order from protrusion level LV1→protrusion level LV2→protrusion level LV3, and pattern 2 is stepped up from protrusion level LV1 to protrusion level LV2 by skipping protrusion level LV2. That is, in pattern 1, the corresponding hold count (excluding the hold being executed) is "2", and in pattern 2, the corresponding hold number (excluding the hold being executed) is "1". there is

FIG. 130(b) exemplifies the form switching pattern when the final form is the protruding level LV4. In pattern 1, the steps are stepped up in order from protrusion level LV1→protrusion level LV2→protrusion level LV3→protrusion level LV4, and in pattern 2, protrusion level LV1→protrusion level LV2 is skipped over protrusion level LV3 to protrusion level LV4. In the pattern 3, the protrusion level LV1 is skipped over the protrusion level LV2, stepped up to the protrusion level LV3, and then stepped up to the protrusion level LV4. In the pattern 4, the protrusion level LV1 to the protrusion level is stepped up. LV2 and projection level LV3 are skipped and stepped up to projection level LV4. That is, in pattern 1, the corresponding hold count (excluding the hold being executed) is "3", and in pattern 2 and pattern 3, the corresponding hold number (excluding the hold being executed) is "2". , and in pattern 4, the corresponding hold count (excluding the hold being executed) is "1".

Next, processing for the ninth special effect (processing for the ninth special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 131 and 132 . The ninth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Ninth special effect processing)
In the ninth special effect processing, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the ninth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM914. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the ninth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4502. In step S4502, it is determined whether or not it is the game round related to the ninth special effect, that is, the game round related to the target hold finally determined in the ninth special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S4503, the ninth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4504. In step S4504, it is determined whether or not it is a game round related to mode switching. If a negative determination is made in step S4504, the ninth special effect processing is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, the mode switching process is executed in step S4505, and then the ninth special effect process is terminated. In the form switching process of step S4505, the form of the production button device 40 is switched according to the form switching pattern determined in step S4411.

Returning to the description of step S4502, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4506. In step S4506, processing for the final game round (processing for the final game round) relating to the ninth special effect is executed. The final game replay process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 132 .

(Processing for final game play)
In the final game replay process, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, the process proceeds to step S4602. In step S4602, it is determined whether or not the grace period for switching to the final form has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the final game round for the ninth special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4603, the process for the final game round ends as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, processing for setting a grace period for switching is performed. In subsequent step S4605, form switching processing is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753, and the movable base 741 is lifted so that the production button device 40 takes the final form determined in advance.

Returning to the description of step S4602, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, that is, if the switching grace period has passed, the process proceeds to step S4606. In step S4606, it is determined whether or not it is the operation activation timing for activating the operation of the operation button 721 . If a negative determination is made in step S4606, the process for the final game cycle is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4606, the process proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, processing for setting an operation valid period is performed. After that, in step S4608, an operation suggestion start process is executed to suggest an operation of the operation button 721, and this final game replay process ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Press!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

Returning to the description of step S4601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S4609, the process proceeds to step S4610.

In step S4610, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. If no operation has been performed, a negative determination is made in step S4610, and the final game cycle process is terminated. If the operation has been performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S4610 and the process proceeds to step S4611. In step S4611, an operation reception notification process and a suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the following step S4612, an operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the operation corresponding effect execution process, an effect is executed to clearly indicate the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable effect device 300 is driven to perform the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 . Along with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Returning to the description of step S4609, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, that is, if the operation valid period has passed without any operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S4610. In step S4610, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S4614, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, after performing the execution process of the alternative effect in step S4615, the final game cycle process is terminated. In the alternative effect, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the extinguishing effect (blackout effect) of the pattern display device 253 are not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 133, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of the ninth special effect when the ninth special effect (ninth special effect E) is executed. FIGS. 133(a) to 133(f) are schematic diagrams in which the reserved display area NE and the effect button device 40 on the display screen 253a are arranged vertically, and in the example shown in FIG. 133, FIG. The game round progresses in the order of (b)→FIG. 133(c)→FIG. 133(d)→FIG. 133(e)→FIG. 133(f). In addition, in FIG. 133, the hold that triggered the start of the ninth special effect and the hold corresponding to the final game round in the ninth special effect match, and the hold is reserved to distinguish it from other holds. Although the display modes of the icons are different, the actually displayed pending icons have the same appearance as the other pending icons. However, this does not apply if this 9th special effect occurs overlapping with other pending notice effects, and if the appearance of the pending icon of the relevant pending icon is changed to a special one that is different from other pending icons There is also

Triggered by the fact that a winning to the operation port 83a occurs during the game and the number of reservations has increased from "3" to "4", the reservation display area NE of the display screen 253a (specifically, the fourth in the reservation number display area Da A pending icon is added to the unit pending display area Da4). This added hold (hereinafter referred to as applicable hold) corresponds to the winning result, and the hold related to the game round being executed and the preceding three holds all correspond to complete loss (operation corresponding effect does not occur).

When the lottery for generating the ninth special performance is won for the relevant suspension, the performance corresponding to the operation is generated in the final phase of the game cycle related to the relevant suspension, and the form of the performance button device 40 changes at the timing when the suspension is acquired. . Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is switched from the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV1. At the same time, the characters "Waiting for Opportunity" are displayed at the top of the display screen 253a as a suggestion of the ninth special effect, and the effect is added to the outer peripheral portion of the display screen 253a. The characters and effects of "waiting for an opportunity" are hidden when the ninth special effect ends.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 133, although the newly added hold is the start opportunity and the final game round of the ninth special effect, the start opportunity and the final game in the ninth special effect shown in the present embodiment times do not always match. The non-specification of the target in this way is a device to widen the range of estimation of the number of occurrences of morphological changes.

As shown in FIG. 133(b)→FIG. 133(c), when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 is also switched from the projection level LV1 to the projection level LV2. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 133(c)→FIG. 133(d)→FIG. 133(e)→FIG. It switches in the order of LV3→protrusion level LV4→protrusion level LV5. The protrusion level LV5 is maintained until the effect button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and is switched to the protrusion level LV0 (first form) by the player's operation or the elapse of the operation effective period.

Note that the projection level maintenance control is executed from the start of the ninth special effect until the operation effective period of the final game round is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated in the middle, the display automatically returns to the latest form. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation stroke from being shortened when the operation suggestion is made and the impact at the time of operation to be reduced.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the standby position of the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40 provided on the front door frame 14 is changed so as to correspond to the number of stored reservation information. there is In other words, the form of the effect button device 40 changes as the game round progresses. By changing the form of the performance button device 40 provided at a position close to the player each time the game round progresses, the fact that the game round is progressing is emphasized and the degree of attention to the game is dramatically increased. can be improved.

It is preferable to increase the number of standby positions of the operation button 721 in order to achieve diversification. However, if the standby position is set indiscriminately, it becomes difficult to ensure the strength of the effect button device 40, and there is a concern that the reliability of the effect button device 40 may be impaired. In this regard, by setting a plurality of standby positions so as to line up in the operation direction as shown in the present embodiment, that is, by limiting the positions in the operation stroke, such concerns can be dispelled.

As shown in this embodiment, each time the number of preceding holds decreases, the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is extended so as to change the projecting level so that the player can determine how long the extension of the operation stroke continues. can draw the attention of Since there is an upper limit to the number of pending information that can be stored, there is also a substantial upper limit to the extension of the operation stroke. increased attention.

According to the configuration in which the protrusion level is changed at the timing when the pending icon displayed in the pending display area NE shifts, the correlation between the movement of the operation button 721 and the number of pending information can be strengthened. As a result, the performance button device 40 can substantially function as a pending number display part similar to the pending display area NE, and it is easy to know that the game has progressed under the situation where the performance button device 40 is focused. becomes perceptible.

<Modification 1>
When the operation button 721 is operated while the ninth special effect is being executed, it is also possible to use the operation as a trigger to terminate the ninth special effect in the middle.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the width of the change in the protrusion amount when the protrusion level LV0→the protrusion level LV1 and the protrusion level LV(N)→the protrusion level LV(N+1) (N=1 to 4 ), but it is also possible to unify these widths.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration includes both the case where the ninth special effect is started with the shift of the hold as a trigger and the case where the ninth special effect is started with the addition of the hold as a trigger. , but not limited to. It is also possible to limit the start trigger to one of pending shift and pending addition.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described ninth embodiment, the form switching pattern for the ninth special effect includes a form switching pattern that skips a part of the forms. be.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, when the ninth special effect is executed, at least one step of form change occurs each time the game round progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to add a pattern in which the shape change does not occur as the game progresses.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, each of the first to eighth implementations described above is configured to execute the tenth special effect in which the form change of the effect button device 40 is continued over a plurality of game rounds. are different in form and composition. The configuration relating to the tenth special effect will be described below, focusing on the differences from those embodiments. First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 134, setting processing for the tenth special effect (tenth special effect setting process) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The tenth special effect setting process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Tenth special effect setting process)
In the tenth special effect setting process, first, in step S4701, a hold command indicating that the hold information has been added from the main control device 162, or a shift command indicating that the hold information is digested and the next game round is started. It is determined whether or not any has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, it is determined whether or not the tenth special effect has been set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a tenth special effect flag, which will be described later, is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4702, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, it is determined whether or not it is planned to execute an operation corresponding production using the production button device 40 in the current game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4703, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4703, the process advances to step S4704. In step S4704, one of the currently stored holds is tentatively determined. In this provisional decision, first, it is determined whether or not there is a hold corresponding to the reach indication, and if there are a plurality of holds corresponding to the reach indication, one hold is selected from among the plurality of holds as the 10th special. Tentatively decided as a candidate for production. In this determination, a hold with a longer variable display time is treated preferentially than a hold with a shorter variable display time so as to be more likely to be subject to provisional decision.

If there is no hold that is subject to provisional determination, a negative determination is made in step S4705, and the tenth special effect setting process is terminated. If there is a hold to be tentatively determined, an affirmative determination is made in step S4705 and the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4706, it is determined whether or not all of the holds preceding the tentatively determined hold correspond to complete loss (result of loss of reach display incompatibility). If a negative determination is made in step S4706, the tenth special effect setting process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, a tenth special effect lottery process is executed in step S4707. By winning the lottery process, provisional decision → start confirmation (final decision).

When the start of the tenth special effect is determined, an affirmative determination is made in step S4708 and the process proceeds to step S4709. In step S4709, the maximum number of steps up to the finally determined target suspension is specified. Specifically, the number of holds existing between the finally determined target hold and the hold related to the current game cycle is specified.

In the following step S4710, it is determined which form the initial form of the effect button device 40 should be based on the tentatively determined pending information (C1, C2, C3, CS). In the effect button device 40 according to the present embodiment, as the protrusion levels of the operation button 721, protrusion levels LV0 to LV5 are provided, and protrusion level LV1 < protrusion level LV2 < protrusion level LV3 < protrusion level LV4 < protrusion. They are differentiated so that the amount of protrusion increases in the order of level LV5. Although the difference in the amount of protrusion at each protrusion level is basically set to be about the same, the difference in the amount of protrusion between the protrusion level LV0 and the protrusion level LV1 is the difference between the other protrusion levels. differentiated to be greater than Although the details will be described later, in the tenth special effect, the operation suggestion of the operation button 721 is generated in the corresponding game round. At this time, the projection level of the effect button device 40 is the projection level LV1, but this is a device for clarifying the difference from the first form, which is the projection level LV0.

After determining the initial form in step S4710, the process proceeds to step S4711. In step S4711, form switching processing is executed to switch the protrusion level of the effect button device 40 so as to be the initial form determined in step S4710. Thereafter, in step S4712, the tenth special effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the tenth special effect setting process is terminated.

Unlike the ninth special effect, the form switching pattern in the tenth special effect is defined as follows. That is, when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the projecting level is also lowered by "1 level". In other words, the number of holds and the protruding level are completely linked, and it is possible to identify which hold is the target from the initial form and the 10th special effect is progressing.

Next, the process for the tenth special effect (process for the tenth special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The tenth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Tenth special effect processing)
In the tenth special effect processing, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the tenth special effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM914. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the tenth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, the process advances to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not it is the game round related to the tenth special effect, that is, the game round related to the target hold finally determined in the tenth special effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

In step S4803, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game cycle. If a negative determination is made in step S4803, the tenth special effect processing is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, the process proceeds to step S4804, and after executing the form switching process, the tenth special effect process is terminated. In the form switching process of step S4804, the form of the production button device 40 is switched so that the projection level is lowered by "one level".

Returning to the description of step S4802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, processing for the final game round (processing for the final game round) relating to the tenth special effect is executed. The final game replay process will be described below.

(Processing for final game play)
In the final game replay process, first, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in effect. If it is during the operation valid period, it is determined whether or not the mode switching grace period in the final game round has passed. If it is not the timing when the grace period has passed, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the final game round related to the tenth special effect. If it is not the start timing of the final game round, the process for the final game round is terminated as it is. When it is time to start the final game round, the processing for setting the grace period for switching the form change described above and the form switching process for the effect button device 40 are executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 753, and the movable base 741 is lowered so that the production button device 40 reaches the projection level LV1, which is the final form.

On the other hand, if the grace period for mode switching described above has passed, it is determined whether or not it is time to validate the operation of the operation button 721 . If it is not the operation validating timing, the process for the final game cycle is terminated as it is. If it is the operation valid timing, an operation valid period setting process is performed. After that, an operation suggestion start process is executed to suggest an operation of the operation button 721, and the final game cycle process ends.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Press!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

On the other hand, if it is during the valid operation period, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the valid operation period has passed. If it is not the time when the operation valid period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated based on the detection information from the detection sensor 791 . If no operation has been performed, the process for the final game cycle is terminated. If the operation has been performed, an operation reception notification process and a suggestion end process are executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a pattern for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

Subsequently, an operation corresponding effect execution process is performed. In the operation corresponding effect execution process, an effect is executed to clearly indicate the game result of the current game round to the player. Specifically, the first movable effect device 300 is driven to perform the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 . Along with this, the display screen 253a is temporarily turned off (blackout effect).

Here, if it is during the operation valid period but the operation valid period has passed, that is, if the operation valid period has passed without any operation being performed, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

Subsequently, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, the process for executing the alternative effect is executed, and then the final game cycle process is terminated. In the alternative effect, the light emission effect by the first movable effect device 300 and the extinguishing effect (blackout effect) of the pattern display device 253 are not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of the tenth special effect when the tenth special effect is executed. FIGS. 136(a) to 136(f) are schematic diagrams in which the reserved display area NE and the effect button device 40 on the display screen 253a are arranged vertically, and in the example shown in FIG. 136, FIG. The game round progresses in the order of (b)→FIG. 136(c)→FIG. 136(d)→FIG. 136(e)→FIG. 136(f). In FIG. 136, the hold that triggered the start of the 10th special effect and the hold corresponding to the final game round in the 10th special effect match, and the hold is reserved to distinguish it from other holds. Although the display modes of the icons are different, the actually displayed pending icons have the same appearance as the other pending icons. However, this does not apply if the 10th special effect is generated overlapping with other pending notice effects, and if the appearance of the relevant pending icon is changed to a special one that is different from the other pending icons. There is also

Triggered by the fact that a winning to the operation port 83a occurs during the game and the number of reservations has increased from "3" to "4", the reservation display area NE of the display screen 253a (specifically, the fourth in the reservation number display area Da A pending icon is added to the unit pending display area Da4). This added hold (hereinafter referred to as applicable hold) corresponds to the winning result, and the hold related to the game round being executed and the preceding three holds all correspond to complete loss (operation corresponding effect does not occur).

When the lottery for generation of the 10th special performance is won for the relevant suspension, an operation corresponding performance is generated in the final stage of the game cycle related to the relevant suspension, and the form of the performance button device 40 changes at the timing when the suspension is acquired. . Specifically, the protrusion level of the operation button 721 is switched from the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV5. At the same time, the text "Waiting for Opportunity" is displayed in the upper portion of the display screen 253a as a suggestion of the tenth special effect, and the effect is added to the outer peripheral portion of the display screen 253a. The characters and effects of "waiting for an opportunity" are hidden when the tenth special effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 136(b)→FIG. 136(c), when the number of game rounds advances by "1", the form of the effect button device 40 is also switched from the projection level LV5 to the projection level LV4. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 136(c)→FIG. 136(d)→FIG. 136(e)→FIG. It switches in the order of LV3→protrusion level LV2→protrusion level LV1. The protruding level LV1 is maintained until the effect button device 40 is operated in the final game round, and is switched to the protruding level LV0 (first mode) by the player's operation or the elapse of the operation effective period.

Note that the projection level maintenance control is executed from the start of the tenth special effect until the operation effective period of the final game round is set. Even if the operation button 721 is operated in the middle, the display automatically returns to the latest form. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation stroke from being shortened when the operation suggestion is made and the impact at the time of operation to be reduced.

As shown in the present embodiment, each time the number of preceding hold information decreases, the operation stroke of the operation button 721 is reduced so as to change the projecting level, thereby determining how long the reduction of the operation stroke continues. It can draw people's attention. Since there is an upper limit to the number of hold information that can be stored, there is also a practical lower limit to the reduction of operation strokes. increased attention.

<Modification 1>
According to the tenth embodiment, during the tenth special effect, the projection level is lowered by a certain level each time the game round progresses, but it is not possible to change the lowered projection level each time. not something to do. For example, there may be a "1 level" drop, a "2 level" drop, a "3 level" drop, and a "4 level" drop.

<Modification 2>
According to the tenth embodiment, during the tenth special effect, the protrusion level is always lowered each time the game round progresses, but a pattern is provided in which the protrusion level is not effective in some game rounds. is also possible.

<Modification 3>
According to the tenth embodiment, the projection level of the production button device 40 is defined to be the projection level LV1 in the final game round (when the operation is suggested) in the tenth special production, but it is limited to this. not to be The protruding level in the final game round (when the operation is suggested) may be other than the protruding level LV1. For example, the protrusion level LV0 may be set, or the protrusion level LV2 or higher may be set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of candidates for the projection level in the final game round, and to have a configuration in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state differs according to the candidates. For example, a difference may be provided between the expectations so that the protruding level in the final game round increases in the order of protruding level LV0<protrusive level LV1<protrusive level LV2<protrusive level LV3<protrusive level LV4<protrusive level LV5.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of modes with different operation strokes of the operation button 721 . In this embodiment, the eleventh special effect, which is an effect corresponding to operation using the mode switching function of the effect button device 40, is characteristic.

In the eleventh special effect, the tactile difference is produced by varying the operation resistance (resistive torque) when the operation button 721 is operated according to the operation suggestion after setting the effect button device 40 to the second form. It is an effect to be generated, and is roughly divided into the 11th special effect A which is set so that the operation resistance is relatively small, and the 11th special effect B which is set so that the operation resistance is relatively large. (See schematic diagram in FIG. 137(a)).

When the effect button device 40 switches to the second form, the static torque (holding torque) of the stepping motor 753 holds the button unit 720 (movable base 741) at the maximum projecting position (upper limit position). As described in other embodiments, the static torque of stepping motor 753 is sufficiently large compared to the biasing force of coil spring 745 supporting operation button 721 . Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the second form, the operation button 721 is first lowered by compressing the coil spring 745, and the operation button 721 After contacting the movable base 741 , the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 descend together against the resistance torque of the stepping motor 753 .

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 137(a), in the section (first detection position CP1 to thirteenth detection position CP13) in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are lowered together, the resistance torque is It is not a variable section, but roughly divided into a variable section of resistance torque (fourth detection position CP4 to thirteenth detection position CP13) and a non-variable section (first detection position CP1 to fourth detection position CP4). be done. Although the details will be described later, this non-variable section is a speed detection section for detecting the displacement speed of the operation button 721, and the stepping motor 753 is generated in accordance with the speed detected in this speed detection section. It is configured such that the resistance torque is corrected. Hereinafter, the processing for the 11th special effect (processing for the 11th special effect) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The eleventh special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Eleventh special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 138, in the eleventh special effect processing, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not it is a game round corresponding to the eleventh special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the eleventh special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, the process advances to step S4902. In step S4902, 11th special effect main processing is executed, and in subsequent step S4903, torque variable processing is executed. The details of the eleventh special effect main process and torque variable process will be described later.

In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 is within the effective period of operation. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process advances to step S4905. In step S4905, it is determined whether or not it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process advances to step S4906 to determine whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If it is not the time to start switching to the second mode, a negative determination is made in step S4906, and the eleventh special effect processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4907.

In step S4907, switching processing to the second mode is executed. Specifically, it starts outputting a drive signal to the stepping motor 753 . Thereafter, in step S4908, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and the processing for the eleventh special effect is ended.

Returning to the description of step S4905, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, that is, if it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, an operation valid period setting process is executed. In subsequent step S4910, operation suggestion start processing is executed.

In the operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a voice such as "press a button"), and an operation suggestion start command is sent to the display control device 142. Output. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Press!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period.

In the following step S4911, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is ended, and the movable base 741 (operation button 721) is stopped. More specifically, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from drive torque to static torque. As a result, when the operation button 721 is operated, a resistance torque that hinders the operation is generated, and even if the movable base 741 descends against the resistance torque, the movable base 741 is prevented from returning to the position. The Rukoto. In other words, the active operation of the operation button 721 ends when the drive torque is switched to the stationary torque.

In the subsequent step S4912, it is determined whether or not the current 11th special effect corresponds to the 11th special effect B. If a negative determination is made in step S4912, the eleventh special effect processing is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4912, after setting the variable torque flag in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the eleventh special effect processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S4904, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4904, that is, if the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S4914. In step S4914, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the valid operation period. If a negative determination is made in step S4914, the process proceeds to step S4915. In step S4915, based on detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has reached the first detection position CP1. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4915, the process proceeds to step S4916.

In the present embodiment, the operation itself is effectively accepted based on reaching the first detection position CP1. No difference. However, since the operation is continued even after reaching the first detection position CP1, the player may feel that the current effects are the 11th special effect A (low expectation) and the 11th special effect B (high expectation) due to the difference in operation resistance. ) can be guessed.

In step S4916, operation suggestion partial end processing is executed. In the operation suggestion partial end processing, an operation suggestion partial end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion partial end command, and terminates the display with the indicator showing the remaining validity period. It should be noted that the display of the message for suggesting operation and the pattern imitating the button continues to be displayed.

In the subsequent step S4917, the interlocking flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and in step S4918, after the standby time setting process is executed, the eleventh special effect process ends. In the standby time setting process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 1 sec) is set in a standby counter provided in various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 . The value of this waiting counter is decremented by one each time the eleventh special effect processing is executed.

Returning to the description of step S4914, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4914, that is, if the operation valid period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4919. In step S4919, operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, an operation suggestion end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating the button, and the indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

After that, in step S4920, a process for switching to the first form is executed, and the eleventh special effect process ends. The eleventh special effect shown in the present embodiment is configured such that the third movable effect device 803 is operated by operating the operation button 721 according to the operation suggestion. If not, the operation of the third movable effect device 803 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the 11th special effect main process of step S4902 (see FIG. 138) will be described.

(Eleventh special effect main process)
In the eleventh special effect main process, first, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the third movable effect device 803 is in operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5001, the process proceeds to step S5002. In step S5002, it is determined whether or not an interlocking flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S5002, the eleventh special effect main process is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5002, the process proceeds to step S5003. In step S5003, the value of the waiting counter is referenced to determine whether or not the waiting period set in step S4918 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5003, position specifying processing is executed in step S5004. Specifically, based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the position of the button unit 720 (specifically, the movable base 741) is specified. Specifically, it specifies which of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 is located. If the button unit 720 has not reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, the eleventh special effect main process is terminated. If it has reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, the process proceeds to step S5006.

In step S5006, operation processing of the third movable effect device 803 is executed. As a result, the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 emits light and descends from the standby position to the effect position. After that, at step S5007, the interlocking flag stored in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and at step S5008, the operating flag is set in the various flags storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. Then, after executing operation suggestion complete end processing in step S5009, the eleventh special effect main processing is ended. In the operation suggestion complete end process, an operation suggestion complete end command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the operation suggestion complete end command, and hides the message for operation suggestion and the pattern imitating the button which have been displayed.

Returning to the description of step S5003, when the affirmative determination is made in the step S5003, that is, when the waiting period has passed, after executing each process of steps S5006 to S5009, the eleventh special effect main process exit. That is, in the eleventh special effect shown in the present embodiment, the operation condition is established by pushing the operation button 721 to the first detection position CP1 according to the operation suggestion, and if the operation button 721 has not reached the thirteenth detection position CP13, The third movable effect device 803 is configured to operate after waiting for the waiting period to elapse.

Returning to the description of step S5001, when the determination in step S5001 is affirmative, that is, when the third movable effect device 803 is in operation (when the flag in operation is stored in the flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914). , the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the eleventh special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S5010, the eleventh special effect main process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5010, the eleventh special effect main process is terminated after executing the eleventh special effect end process in step S5011.

Next, referring to FIG. 140, the torque varying process in step S4903 (see FIG. 138) will be described.

(Torque variable processing)
In the torque variable processing, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not a torque variable flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, this torque varying process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, position specifying processing of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) is executed. Specifically, based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 79, it is determined at which of the first detection position CP1 to the thirteenth detection position CP13 the button unit 720 is positioned.

In subsequent step S5103, it is determined whether or not the position of the button unit 720 (more specifically, the movable base 741) has changed. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, this torque varying process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, it is determined whether or not the displacement velocity of the button unit 720, in other words, the condition for detecting the operation velocity is satisfied. Specifically, the detection condition is established when the button unit 720 passes between the first detection position CP1 to the fourth detection position CP4. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, speed correction value determination processing is performed in step S5105. The speed correction value determination process is a process of determining a correction value for correcting the magnitude of resistance torque according to the detected operation speed.

After that, in step S5106, it is determined whether or not the correction value is set, and if the correction value is not set, in step S5107, resistance torque first setting processing is executed, and then this torque variable processing is executed. finish. If the correction value has been set, the resistance torque second setting process is executed in step S5108, and then this torque varying process is terminated.

The resistance torque first setting process corresponds to the speed detection section, basically the resistance torque is set so that the resistance torque is constant, and the stepping motor 753 is controlled based on this set resistance torque. be done. On the other hand, the resistance torque second setting process corresponds to the outside of the speed detection section, and is defined so that the resistance torque smoothly increases from the fourth detection position CP4 toward the thirteenth detection position CP13. . Here, the torque curve indicating the torque increase pattern is changed by setting the correction value. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 141, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the position (protrusion amount) of the operation button 721, the detected speed, and the resistance torque.

As shown in FIG. 141, the magnitude of the resistance torque is defined regardless of the operation speed until the speed detection section is passed. In this speed detection section, there is no difference in the resistance torque between the 11th special effect A and the 11th special effect B, and it is difficult to identify which effect from the resistance (tactile sensation) from the operation button 721. ing.

After passing through the speed detection section, the magnitude of the resistance torque is adjusted according to the speed detected when passing through the speed detection section. Specifically, a correction value is calculated from the detected speed in the speed detection section, and the resistance torque (target value) to be generated is changed based on this correction value. Specifically, when the detected speed is lower than the reference speed, the resistance torque becomes smaller than the reference resistance torque, and when the detected speed is higher than the reference speed, the resistance torque becomes larger than the reference torque. is corrected to The relationship between the detected speed and the resistance torque is determined by referring to a correction value determining map stored in the ROM 913 .

As shown in this embodiment, when the operation button 721 (button unit 720) is displaced in the operation direction, the position of the operation button 721 in the operation direction is specified, and the operation resistance is varied based on the specified position. With this configuration, a tactile change that occurs in the hand that operates the operation button 721 makes it possible to create novel performances that have not existed in the past.

As for the transformation type production button device, the occurrence of transformation (second form) is often a good opportunity. Due to such circumstances, in the second mode, the possibility that the operation button 721 is vigorously operated increases. In such an operation, there is a concern that the impact on the hand or the effect button device 40 will increase. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance increases on the back side in the operation direction, the impact during operation can be alleviated and the player's hand and the production button can be moved. It can contribute to protection of the device 40 .

As for the hardening type effect button device, if the hardness is extremely changed on the far side, the player is likely to misunderstand that the farthest position has been reached. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which the rate of increase in manipulation resistance is greater on the back side than on the front side, the manipulation resistance will change smoothly, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience. can. In addition, it is preferable to configure so that the rate of increase in operation resistance is higher on the back side than on the front side, in terms of mitigating the impact when the operation button 721 is vigorously operated.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent difficulty in reaching the operation detection position due to an increase in the operation resistance, while leaving room for enjoying the change in the operation resistance of the operation detection.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the effect button device 40 is devised to improve the convenience of the player. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 142, the device will be described with a focus on the configuration different from the above-described embodiments. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the production button device 40. As shown in FIG. For the basic structure and the like of the effect button device 40, refer to the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily change the projection level of the effect button device 40, which is the basic form. Specifically, by driving the stepping motor 753 and adjusting the height position of the movable base 741, it is possible to change to a total of 12 levels from the protrusion level LV0 to the protrusion level LV11. Note that the protrusion level LV11 is defined so that the operation button 721 is below the maximum protrusion position in order to leave room for expansion of the operation stroke of the operation button 721 .

Considering the amount of movement of the line of sight from the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, the ease with which the hand can be placed, etc., the height position of the operation button 721 (operation surface) that is preferred by the player due to differences in physique, etc. may differ. By being able to change the height position as described above, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of convenience for the player.

Here, the basic form of the effect button device 40 is a form in which the effect button device 40 is maintained (resident) except during the effect of extending the operation stroke of the operation button 721. When extending the operation stroke, , this basic form is switched to another form by lifting the operation button 721 . Moreover, it can be said that the basic mode is the mode that is maintained for the longest period at least in the first normal game state.

Hereinafter, the height position adjustment processing executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143 to realize the height adjustment described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The height position adjustment process is a process executed as part of regular processing in the first normal game state.

(Height position adjustment processing)
In the height position adjustment process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not a height position adjustment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5202. In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress. Specifically, when the game is in progress or when the game ball is being shot, it is determined that the game is in progress. It is determined that the game is not in progress.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the height position adjustment process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S5202, the process proceeds to step S5203. In step S5203, it is determined whether or not a height position adjustment start operation has been performed. Specifically, an effect button device 40 and a cross key 41 (see FIG. 1) are arranged on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 . The cross key 41 is connected to the notification/effect control device 143 , and operation information from the cross key 41 is input to the notification/effect control device 143 . In the determination processing in step S5203, based on the operation information from the cross key 41, it is determined whether or not an operation for starting height position adjustment (more specifically, a long press operation of the center button of the cross key 41) has been performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5203, the height position adjustment process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the current protrusion level is the protrusion level LV0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, operation confirmation processing is executed in step S5205. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is operated within a range where the protrusion level (height position) of the operation button 721 does not change (see FIG. 53), and it is confirmed whether the stepping motor 753 is operating normally.

If it is confirmed that the stepping motor 753 is operating normally, an affirmative determination is made in step S5206 and the process proceeds to step S5207. In step S5207, the height position adjustment flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the height position adjustment process is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S5204, the height position adjustment flag is set in step S5207, and the height position adjustment process ends.

If the stepping motor 753 is not operating normally, that is, if the height position adjustment function cannot be properly exhibited, a negative determination is made in step S5205, and the height position adjustment processing ends. do.

Returning to the description of step S5201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, that is, if the height position adjustment flag is stored in the flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, it is determined whether or not a game cycle has started. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from main controller 162 . If a negative determination is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether or not the height position is being changed or the height position is being changed by the player pressing the operation button 721 or the like. If a negative determination is made in step S5209, the process proceeds to step S5210. In step S5210, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the standby reference period. In the height position adjustment mode shown in the present embodiment, the standby reference period (5 sec) is set without performing the height position adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 41) after the protrusion level is changed. The mode for adjusting the height position ends when the time elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S5210, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether or not a height position adjustment operation has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S5211, the height position adjustment process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S52111, the height position adjustment process is terminated after the drive control process is executed in step S5212.

In the drive control process in step S5212, if the up button of the cross key 41 is operated, the stepping motor 753 is controlled so as to increase the protrusion level by "1", and if the down button of the cross key 41 is operated, , the stepping motor 753 is controlled to lower the protrusion level by "1". In addition, when the player operates the operation button 721 on a trial basis and the protrusion level is changed, the stepping motor 753 is controlled so as to restore the protrusion level before the change.

Returning to the description of step S5210, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5210, that is, if the standby reference period has passed without an adjustment operation being performed, the process proceeds to step S5215. In step S5215, it is determined whether or not the protrusion level is other than the protrusion level LV0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5215, then in step S5216 the current height position (protrusion level) is determined and stored as a reference position. In the subsequent step S5217, the position control flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and in step S5218, adjustment completion notification processing is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the adjustment of the height position has been completed. After that, in step S5219, the height position adjusting flag is cleared, and the height position adjusting process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5215, the processing of steps S5218 and S5219 is executed, and then the height position adjustment processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5209, if the determination in step S5209 is affirmative, that is, while the height position is being changed or the height position is changing due to the player pressing the operation button 721, etc. If it is in the middle, the process advances to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not the position (protrusion level) designated by the operation of the cross key 41 has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S521, the height position adjustment process is terminated as it is so that the drive control of the stepping motor 753 is continued. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5213, the height position adjustment process is terminated after the stationary control process is executed in step S5214. By executing this processing, the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched to static torque.

Returning to the description of step S5208, if the determination in step S5208 is affirmative, that is, if it is time to start the game cycle, the height position adjustment process is terminated after executing forced termination processing in step S5220. do. In this forcible termination processing, various flags for height position adjustment are erased, and the protrusion level is forcibly switched to the protrusion level LV0.

As already explained, the static torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is sufficiently larger than the urging force of the coil spring 745, and when the player operates the operation button 721, the coil spring 745 first deforms. The operation button 721 is configured to be lowered. However, when the operation is forcefully performed, the button unit 720 (movable base 741) may descend when the operation force exceeds the static torque. It has a function of automatically returning to the position (the above-mentioned reference position) before the occurrence of the displacement in the event that the position is displaced in this manner. Hereinafter, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 144, processing for automatic return (position control processing) performed in MPU912 of information / information / production control device 143 is explained. The position control process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(position control processing)
In the position control process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the position control flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S5301, the position control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, the process proceeds to step S5302. In step S5302, it is determined whether or not the return operation to the reference position is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, the process proceeds to step S5303.

In step S5303, based on the information from the rotary encoder 792, the current height position of the button unit 720 (movable base 741) is identified. In subsequent step S5304, it is determined whether or not the specified current height position deviates from the reference position. If a negative determination is made in step S5304, the position control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the return control process is executed in step S5305, and then this position control process ends. In the return control process, the stepping motor 753 is driven to move the button unit 720 toward the reference position.

Returning to the description of step S5302, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, that is, if the return operation to the reference position is in progress, the process proceeds to step S5306. In step S5306, it is determined whether or not depression is complete. That is, it is determined whether or not the current height position and the reference position match. If a negative determination is made in step S5306, the position control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5306, the process proceeds to step S5307. In step S5307, stationary control processing is executed. Specifically, the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the torque generated in the stepping motor 753 is switched from drive torque to static torque.

Thereafter, in step S5308, the execution frequency of return control is calculated. That is, how long the recovery control in step S5305 has been executed per unit time (for example, one hour) is calculated from past accumulated information. Then, in step S5309, torque correction processing is executed based on the calculation result in step S5308. In the torque correction processing, processing is performed to increase the resistance torque (driving torque or static torque) generated in the stepping motor 753 when the execution frequency of the return control is higher than the judgment reference frequency. It is stipulated that the increase in resistance torque increases as the frequency of execution of the return control increases.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the height position (protrusion level) of the effect button device 40 can be arbitrarily changed by the player, thereby improving convenience. Here, no matter how the height position is adjusted, the stroke until the operation of the operation button 721 is detected by the detection sensor 791 is constant (about 10 mm). The stroke does not uselessly increase (see X0, X5 and X11 in FIG. 145). This is preferable for increasing satisfaction with the height position adjustment function.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the maximum protruding position is excluded from the adjustment range, but it is also possible to include the maximum protruding position.

<Modification 2>
The forced termination condition may be the start of a game cycle. However, in this case, it is preferable that the operation response effect (particularly, the operation response effect related to the operation stroke change) is not generated for the game round that triggered the forced termination.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, the projecting level of the operation button 721 in the basic form can be changed by operating the cross key 41, but there is no need to separately provide an operation unit for adjustment. For example, when the operation button 721 is long-pressed during non-game, height position adjustment may be performed based on the operation. More specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode for adjusting the height position is entered by a long-pressing operation, and then the protrusion level is changed by one step each time the operation button 721 is operated.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
As already explained, the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched to a plurality of modes with different operation strokes of the operation button 721 . In this embodiment, the twelfth special effect, which is an effect corresponding to operation using the mode switching function of the effect button device 40, is characteristic.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 146, the twelfth special effect is the twelfth special effect in which the third movable effect device 803 operates based on a specific single-shot operation after switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode. Effect A and a twelfth special effect B in which the third movable effect device 803 operates based on a repeated operation (repeated operation) after switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode → a specific single operation. broadly classified. As for the twelfth special effect A and the twelfth special effect B, in the twelfth special effect A, the light emission color of the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 is limited to white, and in the twelfth special effect B, The difference is that the luminous color of the movable decorative body of the 3 movable effect device 803 can change from white to blue or red based on repeated operations. When the twelfth special effect A and the twelfth special effect B are compared, the expectation that the twelfth special effect B will shift to the special game state is higher, and the luminous color of the movable decoration is white < The difference is provided so that the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state increases in the order of blue<red.

The configuration relating to the twelfth special effect will be described below, focusing on differences from the above embodiments. First, referring to the flow charts of FIGS. 147 to 150, the twelfth special effect processing (twelfth special effect processing) executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The twelfth special effect process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of regular processing.

(Twelfth special effect processing)
As shown in FIG. 147, in the 12th special effect processing, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to the 12th special effect. If a negative determination is made in step S5401, the twelfth special effect processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, the process proceeds to step S5402.

In step S54, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first half of the twelfth special effect. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process advances to step S5403 to execute a guidance effect start process that calls the player's attention to the effect button device 40. FIG. In the guidance effect start processing, output of sound effects for switching to the second mode from the speaker unit 27 is started, and a guidance effect command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 starts displaying a moving image for the guidance effect on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the guidance effect command. The motion picture for guidance effect is an animation motion picture in which the effect button device 40 switches from the first mode to the second mode. In addition, in the guidance effect start processing of step S5403, the third movable effect device 803 is switched from the light-off state to the lighting state or the blinking state.

After executing the process of step S5403, or when a negative determination is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5404. In step S5404, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the process for the first half part is executed in step S5405, and then the twelfth special effect process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S5404, the process for the second half part is executed in step S5406, and then the twelfth special effect process is terminated.

(Processing for the first half part)
As shown in FIG. 114, in the processing for the first half part, first, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not it is during the effective period of the repeated operation. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, the process advances to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the effect button device 40 to the second mode after the switching grace period has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the process proceeds to step S5503. In step S5503, it is determined whether or not it is time to start switching to the second mode. If a negative determination is made in step S5503, the processing for the first half part ends.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5503, switching processing for switching the effect button device 40 to the second form is executed in step S5504. After that, in step S5505, processing for setting a grace period for switching is executed, and the processing for the first half part ends. The period required for switching the effect button device 40 from the first mode to the second mode is 0.5 sec. The grace period for switching is set to be longer than this required period. It should be noted that the guidance effect described above is completed at the timing when the grace period elapses.

Returning to the description of step S5502, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, that is, if it is time to elapse of the grace period for switching to the second mode, the process proceeds to step S5506. In step S5506, it is determined whether switching to the second mode has been completed. If the determination in step S5506 is affirmative, the process advances to step S5507. In step S5507, it is determined which of the 12th special effect A and the 12th special effect B corresponds to the current game round. If it corresponds to the twelfth special effect A, an affirmative determination is made in step S5507 and the process proceeds to step S5508.

In step S5508, processing for setting the validity period of the specific single-shot operation is performed, and in step S5509, suggestion start processing for the specific single-shot operation is performed. In the specific one-shot operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "One shot!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-described guidance effect ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is started.

In the subsequent step S5510, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the torque to be generated is switched from the drive torque to the stationary torque. After that, in step S5511, the second half part transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the first half part processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5507, if the current game round corresponds to the twelfth special effect B, a negative determination is made in step S507 and the process proceeds to step S5512. In step S5512, processing for setting the validity period of repeated operations is performed. This validity period is defined to be longer than the validity period of the specific one-shot operation. In the subsequent step S5513, a repeated operation suggestion start process is executed. In the repeated operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled so as to output a message prompting an operation from the speaker unit 27 (for example, a sound such as "press the button repeatedly"), and the display control device 142 is operated. Output a suggested start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, a message such as "Continue hitting!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-described guidance effect ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is started. Further, on the display screen 253a, an operation indicator whose display mode changes according to the number of times the operation button 721 is operated is displayed.

In the subsequent step S5514, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 753 is stopped, and the torque to be generated is switched from the drive torque to the stationary torque. Here, the static torque set at step S5514 is defined to be larger than the static torque set at step S5511. This suppresses the sinking of the movable base 741 when repeated hits are performed.

Returning to the description of step S5506, if a negative determination is made in step S5506, that is, if switching to the second mode has not been completed within the grace period, the process advances to step S5515 to switch to the first mode. Execute the process. That is, switching to the second mode is canceled.

After that, in step S5516, an alternative effect execution process is performed, and the process for the first half part ends. By the alternative effect execution processing, the alternative effect that does not correspond to the operation of the effect button device 40 is executed.

Returning to the description of step S5501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5501, that is, if the repetitive operation is valid, the process advances to step S5517 to execute repetitive operation processing. Hereinafter, the repeated operation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 149 .

(Processing for repeated operation)
In the repeated operation processing, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the effective period of the repeated operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the process advances to step S5602. In step S5602, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S5602, the continuous operation process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

In step S5603, an operation acceptance notification process is executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted from the speaker unit 27 , and an operation acceptance command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on the reception of the operation reception command for the repeated operation.

In subsequent step S5604, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 721 has reached the change reference number. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the twelfth special effect B is to be performed at the start of the game round, the number of operations (change reference number of times) and the number of repeated operations that trigger the change of the light emitting color of the third movable effect device 803 The number of times of operation (termination reference number of times) that triggers the completion is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, the process advances to step S5605 to execute emission color change control processing for changing the emission color of the third movable effect device 803 (more specifically, the movable decoration).

After executing the change processing in step S5606, or when a negative determination is made in step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5606. In step S5606, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 721 has reached the end reference number. If a negative determination is made in step S5606, the continuous operation processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, the process proceeds to step S5607.

Repeated operation completion display execution processing is performed in step S5607, and successive operation suggestion end processing is performed in subsequent step S5608. As a result, instead of the operation suggesting message on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, a message indicating that the repeated operation is completed (for example, characters of "operation completed") is displayed. After that, the message disappears along with the display of a button pattern and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

After executing the process of step S5608, the process advances to step S5609. In step S 5609 , a repeated operation completion flag is set in various flag storage area 933 of RAM 914 . In the subsequent step S5610, the transition flag for the second half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process proceeds to step S5611. In step S5611, a delay period is set in a delay timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and this continuous operation process is terminated.

The effect button device 40 shown in the present embodiment is set so that the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second form is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. . Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second mode, the coil spring 745 is first compressed, thereby permitting the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are lowered together as a result of the operation force exceeding the holding torque. becomes. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself is lowered, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled so as to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, which takes some time. As described above, the second form of the effect button device 40 is not completely fixed, and requires a certain amount of time to return to the second form. , the delay timer counter is used in order to gain time for returning the effect button device 40 to the second mode. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5611 is defined to be longer than the time required for switching from the first mode to the second mode.

Returning to the description of step S5601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, that is, if the time has come when the effective period of the repeated operation has passed, the process proceeds to step S5612. In step S5612, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the validity period. If a negative determination is made in step S5612, the process advances to step S5613 to execute repetitive operation suggestion end processing. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S5614, switching processing to the first form is executed. After that, after execution processing of the alternative effect is performed in step S5615, the continuous operation processing is terminated. In the alternative effect, the interlocking effect by the third movable effect device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result or the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5612, that is, if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, an affirmative determination is made in step S5612, the process proceeds to step S5607, and steps S5607 to S5611 are executed. After that, the continuous operation process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the processing for the second half part will be described.

(Processing for second half part)
In the process for the second half part, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the specific one-shot operation is valid. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process advances to step S5702. In step S5702, it is determined whether or not the above-described repeated operation completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 . If a negative determination is made in step S5702, the process for the second half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the process proceeds to step S5703.

In step S5703, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay timer counter set in step S5611 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S5703, the process for the second half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5703, the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, processing for setting the validity period of the specific single-shot operation is performed, and in subsequent step S5705, suggestion start processing for the specific single-shot operation is performed. In the specific one-shot operation suggestion start process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a message prompting an operation (for example, a voice such as "press a button") from the speaker unit 27, and an operation suggestion is sent to the display control device 142. Output the start command. In the MPU 952 of the display control device 142, based on the reception of the operation suggestion start command, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 displays a message such as "One shot!!" The pattern display device 253 is controlled so as to display a pattern imitating a button and a period indicator indicating the remaining valid period. In other words, the above-described guidance effect ends with the lapse of the grace period, and the operation suggestion is started.

In the subsequent step S5706, the static torque of the stepping motor 753 is reduced. That is, switching from static torque (large) to static torque (small). After that, in step S5707, the repeated operation completion flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased, and the process for the second half part ends.

Returning to the description of step S5701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, that is, if the specified single-shot operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S5708. In step S5708, it is determined whether or not the valid period of the specific one-shot operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S5708, the process proceeds to step S5709. In step S5709, based on detection information from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S5709, the process for the second half part ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5709, the process proceeds to step S5710.

In step S5710, specific single-shot operation acceptance notification processing is executed, and in step S5711, specific single-shot operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker section 27 is controlled to output a sound effect from the speaker section 27 indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted. In the operation suggestion ending process, a specific one-shot operation suggestion ending command is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command to display a message for operation suggestion, a picture for operation suggestion indicating a button, and an indicator indicating the remaining effective period. terminate.

In the following step S5712, specific one-shot operation corresponding effect execution processing is performed. In the specific single operation corresponding effect execution processing, the third movable effect device 803 is moved toward the center of the display screen 253a while maintaining the lighting state or the blinking state, and the movable decoration of the third movable effect device 803 is displayed on the display screen 253a. Perform effect display that emphasizes the body. After that, in step S5713, the second half part shift flag is erased from the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the second half part process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5708, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5708, that is, if the valid period of the specific one-shot operation has passed, the process proceeds to step S5714. In step S5714, specific one-shot operation suggestion end processing is executed. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for the first operation is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S5715, a switching process for switching the effect button device 40 to the first mode is executed. After that, in step S3619, the process for executing the alternative effect is executed, and then the process for the first part ends. In the alternative effect, the interlocking effect by the third movable effect device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result or the like.

The flow of the twelfth special effect (specifically, the twelfth special effect B) will be supplementarily explained below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. Figure 151 (a) group and Figure 152 (a) group are schematic diagrams showing the display screen 253a and the third movable production device 803, Figure 151 (b) group and Figure 152 (b) group are schematic diagrams showing the production button device 40 It is a diagram. In the example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the game round in which the 12th special effect (more specifically, the 12th special effect B) is executed corresponds to the winning result. )→FIG. 151(3)→FIG. 151(4)→FIG. 152(5)→FIG. 152(6)→FIG. 152(7)→FIG. 152(8).

In the example shown in FIG. 151, the twelfth special effect (twelfth special effect B) is started after the symbol variable display mode on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 becomes the ready-to-win display. With the start of the twelfth special effect, the form of the effect button device 40 is switched from the first form to the second form. In accordance with this, the display screen 253a also displays a message "Press repeatedly!" An operation indicator whose display mode changes according to the number of operations is displayed. Also, the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 emits white light at the standby position.

When the operation button 721 is hit repeatedly according to the suggestion of the repeated operation, the display mode of the operation indicator changes according to the number of hits. Then, when the number of operations reaches the change reference number described above, the color of the movable decoration of the third movable effect device 803 changes from white to blue. In other words, the first half of the twelfth special effect functions as a chance-up effect by repeated hits.

After that, when the number of operations reaches the end reference number, the operation indicator becomes MAX, and the message "preparation completed" indicating the completion of the operation is displayed on the display screen 253a. After that, after a short interval, the message "One shot!!" is displayed, suggesting a specific single-shot operation.

When the operation button 721 is operated according to the suggestion of the specific one-shot operation, the movable decoration of the third movable effect device 803 descends from the standby position to the effect position, and the movable decoration is emphasized on the display screen 253a. effect is displayed. After that, the movable decorative body returns from the performance position to the standby position, and the symbol combination corresponding to the hitting result on the effective line of the display screen 253a is stop-displayed (determined display).

If the production button device 40 is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, the visual impact of the production button device 40 is strengthened to encourage attention to be directed to the production button device 40 itself. can be done. Here, when the production button device 40 becomes the second form, the position of the movable base 741 paired with the operation button 721 rises, the operation button 721 is operated, and the operation button 721 is lowered. The operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are brought into contact with each other. As a result, a tactile change can be conveyed to the player through the operation button 721 . With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is imminent. This is preferable in terms of facilitating the operation in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and in favorably exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

As shown in the present embodiment, the operation stroke in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 abut in the first embodiment is the same as the operation stroke in which the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 abut in the second embodiment. If the position of the movable base 741 is changed in such a way that the appearance of the effect button device 40 is greatly changed depending on each form, it is preferable that the operation in one form becomes more difficult than the operation in the other form. can be avoided.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the effect button device 40 is devised to improve the convenience of the player. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 153, the device will be described with a focus on the configuration different from that of the thirteenth embodiment described above. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram showing the effect button device 40. As shown in FIG. For the basic structure and the like of the effect button device 40, refer to the first embodiment.

In the above-described twelfth special effect, the lighting color of the movable decorative body of the third movable effect device 803 can be changed by performing repeated operations under the condition that the effect button device 40 is in the second mode. It's becoming Here, regarding the production button device 40 shown in the present embodiment, by pushing the operation button 721 to the back side (lower side) than the operation detection position by the detection sensor 791, automatic continuous hitting is enabled. ing. Specifically, a detection position for automatic continuous hitting is provided on the back side (lower side) than the detection sensor 791, and the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 operates based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792. It is configured to monitor whether or not the button 721 has reached the detection position for automatic repeated hitting. When the operation button 721 reaches the detection position for automatic repeated hitting, the automatic repeated hitting function is activated, and even if the operation button 721 is not repeatedly pressed/released, it is treated as if the operation button 721 is repeatedly pressed. becomes.

The player is informed on the display screen 253a that the automatic repeated hitting detection position has been reached. Then, the player can directly grasp that the automatic repeated hit detection position has been reached by the change in the tactile sensation of the hand touching the operation button 721 . Specifically, when the operation button 721 reaches the automatic repeated hitting detection position, the resistance torque of the stepping motor 753 is raised from the middle level to the high level. In other words, the resistance torque increases stepwise (rapidly) by reaching the detection position for automatic repeated hitting.

In the following, first, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 154, the repeated operation process corresponding to the 12th special effect will be described. Since the basic flow of the repetitive operation process is the same as the repetitive operation process (see FIG. 149) shown in the thirteenth embodiment, the explanation will be simplified.

(Processing for repeated operation)
In the repeated operation process, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not the effective period of the repeated operation has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S5801, the process advances to step S5802. In step S5802, based on detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 791, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated. Specifically, the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 switches from the LOW level to the HI level by detecting the operation button 721 . In step S5802, it is determined whether or not this signal has risen. If the signal has not risen, a negative determination is made in step S5802 and the process proceeds to step S5803. On the other hand, if the signal rises, an affirmative determination is made in step S5802 and the process proceeds to step S5806.

In step S5806, an operation acceptance notification process is executed. In the acceptance notifying process, the speaker unit 27 is controlled to output a sound effect indicating that the operation has been effectively accepted from the speaker unit 27 , and an operation acceptance command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 changes the display mode of the operation indicator based on the reception of the operation reception command for the repeated operation.

In subsequent step S5807, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 721 has reached the change reference number. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the twelfth special effect B is to be performed at the start of the game round, the number of operations (change reference number of times) and the number of repeated operations that trigger the change of the light emitting color of the third movable effect device 803 The number of times of operation (termination reference number of times) that triggers the completion is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5604, the process advances to step S5808 to execute emission color change control processing for changing the emission color of the third movable effect device 803 (more specifically, the movable decoration).

After executing the change processing in step S5808, or when a negative determination is made in step S5807, the process proceeds to step S5809. In step S5809, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the operation button 721 has reached the end reference number. If a negative determination is made in step S5809, the continuous operation processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5809, the process proceeds to step S5810.

Repeated operation completion display execution processing is performed in step S5810, and successive operation suggestion end processing is performed in subsequent step S5811. As a result, instead of the operation suggesting message on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, a message indicating that the repeated operation is completed (for example, characters of "operation completed") is displayed. After that, the message disappears along with the display of a button pattern and an indicator indicating the remaining validity period.

After executing the process of step S5811, the process proceeds to step S5812. In step S5812, a repeated operation completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. In the subsequent step S5813, the transition flag for the second half part is set in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914, and the process proceeds to step S5814. In step S5814, a delay period is set in a delay timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914, and this continuous operation process ends.

The effect button device 40 shown in the present embodiment is set so that the holding torque (resistance torque) of the stepping motor 753 in the second form is sufficiently larger than the biasing force of the coil spring 745. . Therefore, when the operation button 721 is operated in the second mode, the coil spring 745 is first compressed, thereby permitting the operation button 721 to descend. Here, after the operation button 721 reaches the operation detection position and reaches the movable base 741, the operation button 721 and the movable base 741 are lowered together as a result of the operation force exceeding the holding torque. becomes. In this way, when the movable base 741 itself is lowered, the stepping motor 753 is driven and controlled so as to return the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, which takes some time. As described above, the second form of the effect button device 40 is not completely fixed, and requires a certain amount of time to return to the second form. , the delay timer counter is used in order to gain time for returning the effect button device 40 to the second mode. In other words, the value set in the delay timer counter in step S5814 is defined to be longer than the time required for switching from the first mode to the second mode.

Returning to the description of step S5801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5801, that is, if the time has come when the effective period of the repeated operation has passed, the process proceeds to step S5815. In step S5815, it is determined whether or not the operation button 721 has been operated at least once during the validity period. If a negative determination is made in step S5815, the process advances to step S5816 to execute repetitive operation suggestion end processing. In the suggestion end process, a suggestion end command for repeated operations is output to the display control device 142 . The MPU 952 of the display control device 142 controls the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the suggestion end command, and terminates the display of the message for operation suggestion, the pattern imitating a button, and the indicator indicating the remaining effective period.

In subsequent step S5817, switching processing to the first form is executed. After that, in step S5818, execution processing of the alternative effect is performed, and then this continuous operation processing is terminated. In the alternative effect, the interlocking effect by the third movable effect device 803 is not executed regardless of the hit result/loss result or the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5815, that is, if the operation button 721 has been operated at least once, an affirmative determination is made in step S5815, the process proceeds to step S55810, and steps S5810 to S5814 are executed. After that, the continuous operation process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5802, if a negative determination is made in step S5802, that is, if the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 does not rise from the LOW level to the HI level, the process proceeds to step S5803. In step S5803, it is determined whether or not the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 stores an auto repeated hit flag, which will be described later. If the automatic repeated-hit flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5803, and this continuous-fire operation processing ends. If the auto repeated hit flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5803 and the process proceeds to step S5804.

In step S5804, the auto repeated hitting timer counter provided in the various counter areas 932 of the RAM 914 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter is "0". This automatic repeated hitting timer counter defines the time interval for judging that an operation has been performed artificially by automatic repeated hitting. It is configured to be subtracted. If a negative determination is made in step S5804, the continuous operation process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5804, the process advances to step S5805 to execute the auto repeat timer resetting process, and then the processes from step S5806 onward are executed. In the resetting process, a predetermined value (equivalent to 0.3 sec) is set in the auto repeated hitting timer counter.

Next, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 155 and 156, the automatic repeated hitting process executed by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143 will be described. The automatic repeated hitting process is a process executed by the MPU 912 as part of the twelfth special effect process, which is regular processing.

(Processing for auto repeated hits)
In the auto repeated hitting process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the repeated operation is valid. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, the process advances to step S5902. In step S5902, torque control processing for automatic repeated hitting is executed. Details of this process will be described later.

In the following step S5903, based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is determined whether or not the movable base 741 is positioned within the automatic repeated hitting detection range, more specifically, the automatic repeated hitting detection position or a position below it. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5903, the process proceeds to step S5904. In step S5904, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5904, the process advances to step S5905.

In step S5905, it is determined whether or not an auto repeated hit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If the auto repeated hit flag is already stored, affirmative determination is made in step S5905, and this auto repeated hit processing ends. If the auto repeat flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5905 and the process proceeds to step S5906.

In step S5906, the auto repeated hitting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM914. After that, in step S5907, the automatic repeated hitting display start processing is executed, and the present automatic repeated hitting processing ends. In the automatic repeated hitting display start process, an automatic repeated hitting start command for the display control device 142 is output. The display control device 142 displays a message indicating that the automatic repeated hitting function is activated (for example, characters of "auto repeated hitting ON") on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the automatic repeated hitting start command. do.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5901, S5903, and S5904, the process proceeds to step S5908. In step S5908, it is determined whether or not the auto repeated hitting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914. FIG. If the automatic repeated hitting flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5908, and this automatic repeated hitting processing ends. If the auto repeated hit flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5908 and the process proceeds to step S5909. In step S5909, the auto repeat flag stored in the various flag storage area 933 of the RAM 914 is erased.

In the following step S5910, the auto repeated hitting timer counter is cleared to "0". After that, in step S5911, auto repeated hitting display end processing is executed, and this automatic repeated hitting processing ends. In the auto repeated hitting display end processing, an automatic repeated hitting end command is output to the display control device 142 . The display control device 142 hides the message for automatic repeated hitting on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 based on the reception of the automatic repeated hitting end command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the automatic repeated hitting torque control process in step S5902 will be described.

(Torque control processing for auto repeated hitting)
In the automatic continuous hitting torque control process, first, in step S6001, detection information from the rotary encoder 792 is referenced to determine whether or not the movable base 741 is positioned at the upper limit position in the movable range. If the movable base 741 is located at the upper limit position, an affirmative determination is made in step S6001, and the process advances to step S6002 to execute stationary control processing, and then terminates this automatic repeated hitting torque control processing. In the static control process, when the stepping motor 753 is generating static torque, that state is maintained, and when the stepping motor 753 is generating driving torque, the generated torque is switched to static torque.

If the movable base 741 is not located at the upper limit position, a negative determination is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6003. In step S6003, it is determined whether or not the movable base 741 is positioned between the torque switching reference position below the automatic repeated hitting detection position and the lower limit position of the movable range (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined section). In the present embodiment, as the return processing for returning the movable base 741 to the upper limit position, a first return control processing for generating a middle level drive torque (middle torque) in the stepping motor 753 and a and a second return control process for generating level drive torque (high torque). If it is not positioned in the predetermined section, the first return control process is executed in step S6004, and then this automatic repeated hitting torque control process is terminated. As a result, a medium level drive torque (medium torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157). On the other hand, if the position is in the predetermined section, the second return control process is executed in step S6005, and then the automatic repeated hitting torque control process is terminated. By executing the second return control process, a high level drive torque (high torque) is generated in the stepping motor 753 (see FIG. 157).

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the operation button 721 is hit repeatedly, the special effect is executed when the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. Such repeated hitting operations may give the player the impression that they are troublesome. It is treated substantially the same as the case where the above repeated hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually hit the button repeatedly or to replace the repeated hits by pressing the button for a long period of time. This is preferable in favorably exhibiting the function of prompting active participation in the game using the effect button device 40 .

Here, with regard to the effect button device 40, there is a possibility that the operation mode is switched from continuous pressing to long pressing due to fatigue or the like. At this time, unless the acceptance of the operation is quickly switched from the number of times determination to the period determination, the time lag increases the possibility that the operation effective period will be wasted. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the detection position for determining the period is shifted to the far side in the operation direction from the detection position for determining the number of times. There is no need to distinguish between repeated hits and long presses. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the time lag in switching from the number of times determination to the period determination. As a result, the operation of the operation button 721 is encouraged, and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, since the operation stroke for the continuous pressing operation is shorter than the operation stroke for the long pressing operation, the above function does not make it difficult to perform the continuous pressing operation.

<Modification 1>
In the fourteenth embodiment described above, when the automatic repeated hitting is ON, the operation is pseudo-accepted each time the automatic repeated hitting timer reaches "0". It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is notified that the operation has been accepted at the time of this acceptance.

<Modification 2>
In the fourteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at the HI level and the movable base 741 is positioned in the predetermined section based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the However, the conditions for activating the automatic repeated hitting function may be changed as follows. That is, it is determined that the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at HI level and based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, it is determined that the movable base 741 is positioned in a predetermined section, and this state continues for a predetermined period. The automatic repeated hitting function may be turned ON when the button is pressed. In such a configuration, the predetermined period is preferably shorter than the interval period defined by the auto repeated hitting timer.

<Modification 3>
In the fourteenth embodiment described above, when the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 is at the HI level and the movable base 741 is positioned in the predetermined section based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to omit the conditions related to the detection signal from the detection sensor 791 and enable the automatic repeated hitting function when the rotary encoder 792 locates the movable base 741 in a predetermined section.

<Modification 4>
When the movable base 741 reaches the automatic repeated hitting detection position, it is also possible to change the drive torque to inform the player that the movable base 741 has reached the automatic repeated hitting detection position by a tactile change. . For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 158, a high torque section is set in a part of the section including the automatic repeated hitting detection position, and the middle torque section→high torque is set on the far side in the operation direction from the automatic repeated hitting detection position. Set the interval.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of the effect button device 40 is validated (predetermined effective period is set) when the first special effect, etc., which is an effect corresponding to the operation, is executed. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation of the effect button device 40 is always effectively accepted, and the operation during a predetermined valid period is differentiated so as to trigger the start/continuation/end of the special effect.

(2) Although the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is configured on the premise of a downward pressing operation, it is not limited to this. The operation direction of the operation means for presentation may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the orientation of the effect button device 40 may be changed from upward to forward, and the configuration may be changed to assume a pushing operation to the rear of the gaming machine. Also, the configuration of the operating means for presentation may be changed so that the pulling operation to the front side of the game machine is assumed. For example, lever-type operating means such as a joystick may be provided, or rotary-type operating means such as a rotary switch may be provided.

(3) In the production button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, the biasing member such as a spring that biases the button unit 720 away from the holder unit 750 (upper side) is deficient. A configuration may be employed in which an urging member such as a spring for urging the button unit 720 is provided on the side away from 750 (upper side). In this case, by rotating the rotor 752 by the stepping motor 753, the protruding pin 747 attached to the movable base 741 moves within the engagement groove 772 of the rotor 752 and moves from the horizontal portion 775 to the inclined portion 776, thereby moving upward. It is preferable that the button unit 720 is displaced upward by the urging force of the urging member when the restriction on the displacement to the right is released.

(4) In the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments, when the operation stroke of the operation button 721 changes with the switching between the first mode and the second mode, the operation is performed in accordance with the change in the stroke. Although the configuration is such that the detection position changes, the configuration is not limited to this. The operation detection position may be the same in any of the first form and the second form. That is, instead of the configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position is the same regardless of the first configuration/second configuration, the configuration in which the stroke amount to the operation detection position changes depending on the first configuration/second configuration. may be

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified based on the detection information from the rotary encoder 792, but the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) is specified. The specific configuration for doing so is arbitrary. For example, a linear encoder may be provided instead of the rotary encoder 792, and the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) may be specified based on detection information from the linear encoder. It is also possible to provide a position detection sensor such as a photo sensor or a magnetic sensor for each detection position, and to specify the position of the button unit 720 (operation button 721) based on detection information from these position detection sensors. be.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, a stepping motor is used as a driving means for switching the effect button device 40 between the first mode and the second mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to use a motor other than a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like as the driving means.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the effect button device 40 is arranged on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14, but the position of the effect button device 40 may be changed arbitrarily. For example, it can be arranged in the lower bulging portion 29 or arranged above or to the side of the window portion 22 .

(8) The direction of operation (method of operation) of the effect button device 40 shown in each of the above embodiments is the same for all of the first to third forms, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the configuration in which the form of the effect button device can be changed, the operation direction (operation method) of the effect button device may be changed for each form.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are not fixed, and the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are relatively displaced at least in the circumferential direction around the central axis line CLX. However, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the outer button member 722 and the inner button member 723 are fixed so that the above relative displacement is disabled.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the structure is such that the stepping motor generates static torque even under the condition of the first embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the first form, it is possible to adopt a configuration that does not generate static torque.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect button device 40 is arranged on the front portion of the front door frame 14, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to dispose the effect button device 40 on the side part or the upper part of the front door frame 14. - 特許庁

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units DU and DL and the display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 are performed based on the lottery (judgment processing) performed by the main controller 162. Although the configuration is such that the variable display is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery (judgment processing) in the main controller 162, it is also possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the display units DU and DL for the operating port and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the second normal game state (time-saving game state) corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode is changed. The opportunity to shift to the second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the normal jackpot result. In addition to or instead of the transition opportunity, for example, the number of games executed in the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (the number of games executed without transitioning to another game state) It may be configured to shift to the second normal game state when a predetermined reference number of times is reached. In addition, for example, a transition random number counter CX or the like for performing a lottery for transition to the second normal game state is provided, and when the lottery using the value of the transition random number counter CX and the transition lottery table is won, the transition to the second normal game state is made. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that It is also possible to combine these two transition triggers. That is, after the number of games executed in the first normal game state reaches a predetermined reference number of times, the transition to the second normal game state may be made when the transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX is won. It is possible. In addition, in the configuration of shifting to the second normal game state triggered by reaching the predetermined reference number of times, the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 indicates or suggests the number of remaining games until reaching the predetermined reference number of times. It is also possible to configure

As described in detail above, when the special game state is configured to be able to transition to the second normal game state without passing through, the effect button device 40 is used to suggest or indicate the transition to the second normal game state. It is also possible to For example, when the number of games executed in the first normal game state reaches a predetermined reference number of times as described above, in the configuration of shifting to the second normal game state, the countdown effect until reaching the predetermined reference number of times is produced by pressing the production button. It may be performed using device 40 . Specifically, the projection level of the effect button device 40 may be stepwise changed (UP or DOWN) each time the game round progresses toward a predetermined reference number of times. In addition, in the configuration of shifting to the second normal game state when winning the transition lottery using the transition random number counter CX as described above, there is a configuration suggesting an operation to switch the effect button device 40 to the second mode in the corresponding game round. It is also possible to In other words, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, when the operation corresponding performance is executed based on the operation in the second mode, the big win result or the loss result corresponding to the transition to the second normal game state is fixed or rich. be.

Furthermore, when there is a range in the upper limit of the number of games for the second normal game state that transitions to the special game state without passing (for example, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, etc.) By switching the form of the effect button device 40 from the first form to another form, the transition to the second game state is suggested, and the upper limit of the number of games in the case of transition to the second normal game state is set by the protrusion level. It is good also as a structure which suggests. Specifically, it is preferable that the higher the projection level, the larger the upper limit in the case where the production success→the transition to the second normal game state is increased.

(14) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and a jackpot is obtained, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated to start rotation of the reels. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The following characteristic group A is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. Operation means (production button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation valid period; A gaming machine comprising
When a predetermined switching condition (development to a ready-to-win display in a game cycle related to the first special effect) is established, the mode of the operating means is switched from the first mode to a second mode having an appearance different from the first mode. Switching means (function for executing processing for mode switching in MPU 912 of notification/production control device 143),
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the mode of the operation means is switched to the second mode, an operation suggestion means for suggesting the operation of the operation means to the player (an operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143). function to execute processing for
The production executing means is
A special effect (first special effect) as the operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated under the condition that the operation means is in the second mode during the predetermined operation valid period. a means for performing
A period setting means for setting one of a plurality of periods with different lengths as the predetermined standby period (a function for determining the start timing of operation suggestion by the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143). A game machine characterized by

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature A1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second mode, the operation of the operation means is suggested based on the lapse of a predetermined waiting period after switching to the second mode. Since a plurality of periods with different lengths are provided as the predetermined standby period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second form varies. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the shape change but also to the length of the second shape maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game and improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of main control unit 162 executes winning processing for operation openings) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning at operation openings 83a and 83b) function) and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 632 provided in RAM 604 of main controller 162);
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
Based on the fact that the result of determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the game state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the game state (opening/closing execution mode);
Operation means (production button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) that executes an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the operation of the operation means during a predetermined operation valid period; A gaming machine comprising
The production executing means is
When a predetermined switching condition (development to a ready-to-win display in a game cycle related to the first special effect) is established, the mode of the operating means is switched from the first mode to a second mode having an appearance different from the first mode. Switching means (function for executing processing for mode switching in MPU 912 of notification/production control device 143),
When a predetermined waiting period elapses after the mode of the operation means is switched to the second mode, an operation suggestion means for suggesting the operation of the operation means to the player (an operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143). and when the operation means is operated during the predetermined operation valid period and in the situation where the operation means is in the second mode, as the operation corresponding effect and a means for executing a special effect (first special effect) of
A plurality of periods with different lengths are provided as the predetermined waiting period,
The effect executing means is a period setting means for setting one of the plurality of different periods as the predetermined waiting period based on the determination result by the transition determining means A game machine characterized by having a function of determining the start timing.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature A2, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second mode, the operation of the operation means is suggested based on the lapse of a predetermined waiting period after switching to the second mode. A plurality of periods with different lengths are provided as the predetermined standby period, and the period during which the operation means is maintained in the second form varies in various ways based on the determination result of the transition determination means. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the shape change but also to the length of the second shape maintained. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game and improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. A first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as the predetermined period,
The period setting means sets a higher probability that the second period is set as the predetermined period when the result of determination by the transition determination means is the transition response result than when the transition determination result is not the transition response result. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to feature A3, it is possible to make the player who desires the transition to the special game state expect the period of being maintained in the second mode to be as long as possible (to be the second period). Such a configuration is advantageous in increasing attention to the switching to the second mode.

Feature A4. A first period and a second period longer than the first period are provided as the predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is longer than the first period.

According to the feature A4, it is possible to prevent the difference in the predetermined standby period from being buried and difficult to understand.

Feature A5. The switching means is configured to switch the operation means to the second mode when the predetermined switching condition is satisfied when transitioning to the ready-to-win display,
The display effect executed after transition to the ready-to-reach display includes a first part and a second part,
As the predetermined waiting period, a first period defined so that the operation is suggested in the first part, and a second period defined so that the operation is suggested in the second part. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the gaming machine is provided with

As shown in feature A5, if the operation means is switched to the second mode with the transition to the ready-to-reach display, and the operation suggestions are generated in the first part and the second part after the transition to the ready-to-reach display, The player can estimate the period of time during which the second mode is maintained from the progress of the display effect without measuring the period. By clarifying the difference between the first period and the second period in this way, the effects shown in the characteristic A1 and the like can be exhibited favorably.

Feature A6. The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the switching means has means for maintaining the operation means in the second mode until the predetermined waiting period elapses. machine.

The sudden switching of the operation means to the first mode while waiting for the operation suggestion can be a factor that confuses the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the operation means is switched to the second mode, the second mode is maintained until the predetermined waiting period elapses, thereby preferably preventing the inconvenience from occurring. can be suppressed.

Feature A7. The operation means is configured to be switchable from the second mode to the first mode by a player's operation,
means for regulating the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the special performance when the operation means is operated after the switching to the second mode and before the predetermined waiting period elapses; The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that

When the operating means is operated between the switching to the second mode and generation of the operation suggestion, the operation suggestion and the special effect are restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player to wait until an operation suggestion is generated after switching to the second mode, and to prevent the operation means from being blindly operated after switching to the second mode. This is preferable in terms of effectively exhibiting the effects shown in feature A1 and the like.

Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the operation means is configured such that an operation stroke of the operation means in the second mode is longer than an operation stroke of the operation means in the first mode. or the game machine according to one.

As shown in feature A8, if the operation stroke is larger in the second form than in the first form, the operation means can be conspicuous while suppressing the operation from becoming complicated due to the change to the second form. can do.

Feature A9. A display means corresponding to the elapsed period is provided so as to display corresponding to the elapsed period so that the display changes according to the elapsed period at least during the period from the change in form of the operation means until the suggestion is made by the suggesting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

As shown in feature A9, it is preferable to perform the display corresponding to the elapsed period so that the display changes according to the elapsed period, in order to encourage the player to understand the game.

Feature A10. Operation means (production button device 40) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the operation of the operating means. There is
Switching means for switching the operating means from a first state to a second state having an appearance different from the first state when a predetermined switching condition (development to a ready-to-win display in a game round relating to the first special effect) is established. (The function of executing processing for mode switching in the MPU 902 of the notification/production control device 143);
When a predetermined waiting period has passed since the state of the operation means was switched to the second state, an operation suggestion means for suggesting the operation of the operation means to the player (operation suggestion in the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143) function to execute processing for
The production executing means is
means for executing a special effect (first special effect) as the operation-responsive effect when the operating means is operated in a situation where the operating means is in the second state;
and period setting means for setting one of a plurality of periods of different lengths as the predetermined waiting period.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first state and the second state as shown in feature A10, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second state, the operation of the operation means is suggested based on the fact that a predetermined waiting period has passed since switching to the second state. Since a plurality of periods with different lengths are provided as the predetermined standby period, the period during which the operating means is maintained in the second state varies. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to pay attention not only to the shape change but also to the length of time maintained in the second state. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the monotony of the game and improving the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features A1 to A9 to feature A10.

<Characteristic group B>
The following feature group B is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect (for example, a first special effect for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means (the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 executes the process for the first special effect function),
The effect executing means performs a first effect (character image CA and after the execution of the first effect, the operation means moves to a second position (for example, the second detection position CP2 to the fifth detection position CP2 to the fifth detection and means for executing a second effect (effect of changing the effect EF) when the position CP5) is reached.

According to the feature B1, when the operation means is operated in a predetermined direction and the operation means reaches the first position on the path along which the operation means is displaced, the first effect is executed, and after the first effect is executed A second effect is executed when the operating means reaches a second position on the far side in a predetermined direction from the first position. In this way, if the first effect→the second effect is executed in conjunction with the operation of the operating means 1, novel effects that have never been seen before can be realized. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect (for example, a first special effect for the second part) based on the operation of the operation means (the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143 executes the process for the first special effect function),
The production executing means is
When the operating means reaches a predetermined position (for example, a first detection position CP1) on the path along which the operating means is displaced by the operation directed in the predetermined direction, a starting means (notification) for starting a special display as the operation corresponding effect A function to start the second special effect in the MPU 912 of the effect control device 143),
At least part of the special display when the operation means reaches a specific position (for example, second detection position CP2 to fifth detection position CP5) on the back side of the predetermined position in the predetermined direction after the start of the special display (function for changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143).

According to the feature B2, when the operation means is operated in a predetermined direction and the operation means reaches a predetermined position on the path along which the operation means is displaced, the special display is started, and after the special display is started, the special display is started. At least a part of the special display is changed when the operating means reaches a specific position on the far side in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position. In this way, if the special display is started→the special display is changed in conjunction with the operation of the operation means 1, novel effects that have never been seen before can be realized. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. The effect executing means is a maintaining means for maintaining the special display as it is when the operation means reaches the specific position after the start of the special display. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it has a function of maintaining a smoothness.

According to feature B3, when the specific position is reached, the special display branches into a case where it changes and a case where it does not change. This is advantageous in suppressing monotony in the result of the operation and enhancing the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in feature B2.

Feature B4. The changing means can change the special display when the specific position is reached based on the displacement in the predetermined direction, and the specific position is reached based on the displacement in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the special display cannot be changed when the special display is changed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the operation means is displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to, for example, releasing the hand from the operation means before or after reaching the specific position, the change in the special display is rewound. never This is preferable for avoiding unintended changes in the special display due to an operation error or the like.

In place of or in addition to the configuration shown in this feature, "a configuration in which displacement to the side opposite to the predetermined direction is suppressed when the operation means is operated" may be employed.

Feature B5. The changing means does not change the special display when the operating means reaches the specific position after a predetermined period has elapsed since the operating means reached the predetermined position and the special display started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

When the special display changes in conjunction with the operation, it is assumed that the impact of the display change will be stronger if the change has a sense of speed to some extent. Here, if a time limit is set for changing the special display as shown in this feature, the player is urged to operate the operating means toward a specific position at once, and the above-mentioned impact is strengthened to allow the special display to be displayed. The degree of attention can be preferably improved.

Feature B6. The specific position includes a first position and a second position on the back side of the first position in the predetermined direction,
The changing means is
a first means for changing the special display when the operating means reaches the first position;
and second means for further changing the special display when the operating means reaches the second position after the special display is changed by the first means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5.

As shown in feature B6, if the special display is configured to change in multiple stages by operating the operating means in a predetermined direction, the power of expression in changing the special display can be preferably improved.

Feature B7. A resistance generating means (a function of generating a resistance torque in the stepping motor 753) that generates an operation resistance when the operation means is operated in the predetermined direction,
The resistance generating means is configured such that the operational resistance generated between the first position and the second position is greater than the operational resistance generated between the predetermined position and the first position. The game machine according to feature B6, characterized in that

According to the characteristic B7, by increasing the operation resistance on the far side in the operation direction, it is possible to prevent the change from becoming difficult to identify due to, for example, the change of the special display ending excessively early.

Feature B8. The feature B6 or feature B7, wherein a distance from the second position to the first position in the predetermined direction is greater than a distance from the first position to the predetermined position in the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

According to feature B8, the farther in the operation direction, the longer the grace period until the special display is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the change from becoming difficult to identify due to, for example, the change of the special display ending too early.

Feature B9. The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form,
Characteristic features B1 to B8, characterized in that when the operation corresponding performance is executed, a switching means for switching the operation means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in feature B1 and the like, in the configuration in which the movement of the operation means and the special display are linked, by extending the operation stroke of the operation means in advance, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened. In addition, it is assumed that the operation of the operation means is often executed vigorously. In this respect, according to the configuration in which the operation stroke is expanded in advance, it is possible to preferably suppress the difficulty of distinguishing the change of the special display by gaining the display change period.

Feature B10. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. execution mode) with a game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
A gaming machine in which a game effect is executed based on the determination result by the transition determination means,
An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Based on the operation of the operation means, the operation corresponding effect (for example, the first special effect for the second part) is executed based on the operation of the operation means. function to execute processing for production),
The operation corresponding effect execution means is
When the operating means reaches a predetermined position (for example, a first detection position CP1) on the path along which the operating means is displaced by the operation directed in the predetermined direction, a starting means (notification) for starting a special display as the operation corresponding effect A function to start the second special effect in the MPU 912 of the effect control device 143),
At least part of the special display when the operation means reaches a specific position (for example, second detection position CP2 to fifth detection position CP5) on the back side of the predetermined position in the predetermined direction after the start of the special display (function for changing the size of the effect EF additionally displayed in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143).

According to feature B10, when the operation means is operated in a predetermined direction and the operation means reaches a predetermined position on the path along which the operation means is displaced, the special display is started, and after the special display is started, the special display is started. At least a part of the special display is changed when the operating means reaches a specific position on the far side in the predetermined direction from the predetermined position. In this way, if the special display is started→the special display is changed in conjunction with the operation of the operation means 1, novel effects that have never been seen before can be realized. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in features B1 to B9 may be applied to feature B10.

Further, each technical idea shown in features B1 to B10 may be applied to the feature A group.

<Characteristic group C>
The following characteristic group C is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
Effect execution means (function for executing processing for the third special effect by the MPU 902 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation means;
Monitoring means (position monitoring function and rotary encoder 792 in MPU 902 of notification / effect control device 143) for monitoring the position of the operation means by dividing the operation stroke of the operation means into a plurality of areas,
The monitoring means
Position detection means (rotary encoder 792) for detecting in which of the plurality of areas (first area E1 to third area E3) the operation means is positioned;
The operation means has a period detection means (hold counter provided in the RAM 914 of the notification / effect control device 143) for detecting the period of stay in which the operation means is continuously staying in the area detected by the position detection means,
The effect execution means includes period determination means (a function of determining the hold period in the MPU 902 of the notification / effect control device 143) that determines whether the period of stay detected by the period detection means has reached the reference period.
When the period determination means determines that the stay period has reached the reference period, the operation corresponding effect execution means (of the notification / effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the area during stay A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a selection effect that constitutes a third special effect in an MPU 902.

According to the above configuration, when the period of stay in which the operation means is operated (held) to stay in any area reaches the reference period, the operation corresponding effect is executed according to the stay area of the operation means. The Rukoto. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of using the operation means to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form,
The game according to feature C1, further comprising switching means for switching the operation means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed when the operation corresponding performance is executed. machine.

As shown in the feature C1, in the configuration in which the operation corresponding presentation is executed according to the stay area of the operation means, each area becomes smaller, which increases the difficulty of the operation. It is feared that such difficulty in operation hinders the use of the operation means to achieve the effect of encouraging active participation in the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the operation means is set to the second mode prior to the operation suggestion of the operation means, and the operation stroke is increased in advance, so that each area can be set large. It becomes possible. As a result, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, further comprising position information teaching means for teaching the player information indicating the relationship between the position of the operating means detected by the position detecting means and the area. machine.

In a configuration in which the performance can branch depending on the hold position of the operating means, it can be difficult to grasp the position of the operating means only by tactile information. Such difficulty hinders the diversification of production patterns by subdividing the area. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the above inconvenience can be preferably resolved by providing information indicating the relationship between the detected position of the operation means and the area to the player.

Feature C4. period information teaching means for teaching the player period information indicating the period detected by the period detecting means;
Any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the period information teaching means does not teach the period information at the beginning of stay when the user stays in the area continuously. The gaming machine described in 1.

As shown in the characteristic C1 and the like, in the configuration in which the operation means is held, there is a possibility that the player may move between areas by applying a slight amount of force. If the resetting of period information occurs frequently due to such movement between areas, it is feared that the player will be given the impression that it is troublesome, and that the operation of the operation means will not be performed. In view of the fact that it is necessary to adjust the force at the time of holding, it is technically significant not to teach the period information for the initial period of stay, as shown in this feature.

Feature C5. The operating means is a lifting button,
As the plurality of areas, a first area (first area E1) on the side of the upper limit position of the operating means, a second area (third area E3) including the lower limit position of the operating means, and and a third area (second area E2) provided between the area and the second area,
Any one of characteristics C1 to C4, wherein the size of the third area in the predetermined direction is larger than the size of each of the first area and the second area in the predetermined direction. or the game machine according to one.

When holding the operation means, it is assumed that it will be difficult to make the player stay in the third area between the upper and lower limits because of the presence or absence of a guideline. In this case, it is assumed that the player who desires easy operation will not select the third area. Therefore, by configuring the third area so that its size in a predetermined direction is larger than each size of the first area and the second area, the above concern can be alleviated.

Feature C6. a drag force generating means for generating a drag force that hinders movement of the operating means in the predetermined direction;
Any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the drag generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the drag, and has means for increasing the drag at a boundary portion between the plurality of areas. or the game machine according to one.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it becomes easier to sensuously grasp that the user has moved between areas due to the resistance transmitted from the operation means to the hand. This is preferable in terms of improving the convenience of the operation means for the player.

Feature C7. a drag force generating means for generating a drag force that hinders movement of the operating means in the predetermined direction;
The drag generating means is capable of changing the magnitude of the drag, and has means for changing the drag according to the length of stay detected by the period detecting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the resistance changes during the operation, so that the monotonous operation can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C8. An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation means reaching a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
The determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
A game characterized by executing a special effect, which is the operation corresponding effect, when the operating means remains at the predetermined judgment position set by the judgment position setting means for a predetermined reference period. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the operation means is operated (held) so as to stay in one of the areas, that is, when the period of stay at the set predetermined determination position reaches the reference period, the operation means An operation corresponding production is executed according to the stay area. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of using the operation means to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C9. An operation means (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40) operated in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player;
effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation means reaching a predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
determination position setting means for setting the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction;
The determination position setting means is capable of changing the predetermined determination position in the predetermined direction,
A game machine characterized by executing a special effect as the operation-responsive effect when the operation means remains at the predetermined determination position set by the determination position setting means for a predetermined reference period. .

According to the above configuration, when the operation means is operated (held) so as to stay in one of the areas, that is, when the period of stay at the set predetermined determination position reaches the reference period, the operation means An operation corresponding production is executed according to the stay area. By enabling such a novel operation, it is possible to preferably exhibit the effect of using the operation means to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in features C1 to C9 may be applied to the features A to B described above.

<Characteristic group D>
The characteristic group D below is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature D1. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. execution mode) with a game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As the normal game state, a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (for example, second normal game state B or third normal game state B) more advantageous to the player than the first game state. and
It is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and is switchable between a first mode and a second mode having a different appearance from the first mode. State suggesting means (effect button device 40) for suggesting to the player that it is in an advantageous state by being maintained in the second state over a plurality of game rounds in the second game state,
A gaming machine, wherein the state suggesting means is configured to be operable at least under the condition of the second mode.

According to the feature D1, it is suggested that the second game state is in an advantageous state because the state suggesting means provided on the front face of the gaming machine is in the second state. Regarding the front part of the game machine, since it is a part that is easily visible to other players compared to, for example, a liquid crystal display device etc. arranged on the back side of the game machine, the state suggestion provided on the front part of the game machine By adopting a configuration in which the state is suggested by the means, it is possible to favorably arouse the player's sense of superiority during the game on the gaming machine.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. Thus, if the state suggesting means can be operated in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means will be good, and the state suggesting means will be in the second mode in the second game state. It is advantageous in terms of improving the degree of attention of

Feature D2. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. execution mode) with a game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As the normal game state, a first game state (first normal game state) and a second game state (third normal game state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided,
It is provided on the front face of the gaming machine (front door frame 14), and is switchable between a first mode and a second mode having a different appearance from the first mode, and the special game state is followed by the second game state. When shifting to the second game state before the transition to the second game state or with the transition to the second game state, it switches to the second form, and when the game round is progressing in the second game state State suggesting means (production button device 40) for suggesting to the player that the game is in an advantageous state by being maintained in the second mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the state suggesting means is configured to be operable at least under the condition of the second mode.

According to the feature D2, it is suggested that the state suggesting means provided on the front face of the gaming machine is in the second state during the second game state, which is an advantageous state. Regarding the front part of the game machine, since it is a part that is easily visible to other players compared to, for example, a liquid crystal display device etc. arranged on the back side of the game machine, the state suggestion provided on the front part of the game machine By adopting a configuration in which the state is suggested by the means, it is possible to favorably arouse the player's sense of superiority during the game on the gaming machine.

Here, the state suggesting means in the second form is operable. Thus, if the state suggesting means can be operated in an advantageous state, the player's impression of the state suggesting means will be good, and the state suggesting means will be in the second mode in the second game state. It is advantageous in terms of improving the degree of attention of

Feature D3. When the state suggesting means in the second mode is operated in the second game state, an effect (fourth special The game machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized by comprising an effect executing means for executing a effect.

When the state suggesting means (second form) is operated in the second game state, an effect corresponding to the result of transition determination relating to the game round in which the operation is performed is executed. Since the second game state is an advantageous state, the operation increases the chances of producing an effect advantageous to the player. This is advantageous in terms of improving the player's impression of the state suggesting means and increasing attention to the fact that the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second game state.

Feature D4. The state suggesting means has means for maintaining the second mode until the second game state ends after switching to the second mode with the transition to the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to feature D4, the second mode may be maintained until the second game state ends. This is preferable in terms of securing an opportunity to operate the state suggesting means.

Feature D5. a notifying means for notifying a player to operate the state suggesting means when a predetermined notifying condition (for example, a big win) is established under the condition that the state suggesting means is in the second form,
The state suggesting means is configured to be switched from the second mode to the first mode by a player's operation,
Characteristic features D1 to D3, characterized by further comprising determining means for determining whether or not to restore the state suggesting means to the second form after the state suggesting means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notifying means. The game machine according to any one of.

In the second game state, when the state suggesting means in the second mode is operated according to the notification by the notification means, the subsequent mode is divided into the first mode and the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to impart a sense of tension to the operation of the state suggesting means.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "when a predetermined notification condition (for example, a big win) is established under the situation where the state suggesting means is in the second form, the player is instructed to operate the state suggesting means. The state suggesting means is configured to switch from the second mode to the first mode by the player's operation, and the state suggesting means follows the report by the notifying means. When the state suggesting means is operated and the first notification condition (for example, the fourth special effect corresponding to the result of the big win) is satisfied as the predetermined notification condition, the state suggesting means after the operation When the mode is the first mode, the state suggesting means is operated in accordance with the notification by the notifying means, and the second notification condition (for example, the fourth special effect corresponding to the result of failure) is established as the predetermined notification condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, further comprising means for changing the form of the state suggesting means after the operation to the second form if the game machine is in the second form. ” is also possible.

Feature D6. When the determining means determines to return to the second mode, the return is delayed at least until the game cycle in which the state suggesting means is operated ends. The gaming machine according to feature D5.

By delaying the return until the end of the game round in which the state suggesting means is operated, it is possible to suitably suppress the movement of the state suggesting means from becoming a factor of lowering the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D7. The state suggesting means is configured to be switched from the second mode to the first mode by a player's operation,
When the state suggesting means is operated during a non-notification period during which the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second game state and the notifying means does not perform the notification, The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, further comprising restricting means for restricting the return to the second mode during the second gaming state.

As described above, in the configuration in which the state suggesting means suggests that the game state is in an advantageous state, if the state suggesting means is operated recklessly and breaks down, the suggesting function will not work properly. . This is not preferable because it becomes a factor that impairs the reliability of the gaming machine (state suggesting means). Therefore, as shown in this feature, the state suggesting means is operated during the non-notification period in which the state suggesting means is in the second form in the second game state and the notifying means is not notified. In some cases, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the return to the second mode is restricted.

Feature D8. A shooting means (solenoid 111) for shooting a game ball to a game area (game area PE);
Ball sending means (ball sending device 113) for sending game balls from a storage area (upper tray 33) for storing game balls to the shooting means;
a variable ball-entering portion (lower operating port 83b and electric accessory 91) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which ball-entering is easier than in the first state;
Switching control means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for switching the variable ball entry portion between the first state and the second state;
a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage area based on the ball entering the variable ball entering portion;
As switching control modes by the switching control means, a first switching mode and a second switching mode in which switching to the second state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode are provided,
The switching control mode in the second game state is the second switching mode,
Any one of characteristics D1 to D7, wherein the state suggesting means is configured such that the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the gaming machine is larger in the second mode than in the first mode. 1. The game machine described in 1.

By switching the state suggesting means to the second form, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the game machine is increased. Although this is preferable for making the state suggesting means conspicuous, it makes it difficult to access behind the state suggesting means. Due to such circumstances, it is assumed that increasing restrictions on the arrangement of the state suggesting means will hinder the effect of the state suggesting means to improve the degree of attention. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the state suggesting means switches to the second mode in the second switching mode in which the loss of game balls is suppressed, the state suggesting means is arranged around the storage area. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the state suggesting means from actually interfering with the replenishment of game balls. In this way, a configuration that is practically preferable can be realized by alleviating the restrictions on the arrangement of the state suggesting means.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in features D1 to D8 may be applied to the groups A to C described above.

<Characteristic group E>
The following characteristic group E is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A movable effect device having decorations (for example, a movable body 360 and a decoration 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine and a drive section (for example, a motor 381 and a solenoid 420) for driving the decorations. (For example, the first movable effect device 300, the second movable effect device 400, the third movable effect device 803, the fourth movable effect device 804),
Operation means operated by the player (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40);
Effect execution means (MPU 912 of notification/effect control device 143) for executing operation-responsive effects (for example, second special effects A to D) by operating the decorative body of the movable effect device when the operation means is operated. function to execute the second special effects A to D),
When the operation corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the operation of the operating means, the player moves the movable effect device to be operated in the current operation corresponding effect before starting the operation of the decorative body. Teaching means (light emitting block 725 of production button device 40, light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of annular illumination part 24 and interlocking display area CE of pattern display device 253, MPU 912 of notification / production control device 143 for guidance display A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

A configuration in which the movable effect device executes the operation corresponding effect based on the player's operation of the operation means is preferable in terms of prompting the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, and the movable effect device may be out of sight, and the opening of the operation corresponding effect may be overlooked. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive effect is accompanied by the movement of the ornaments and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, the movable effect that is the target of the current operation corresponding effect is performed before the decoration body starts to operate. A device is taught. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight, and to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive presentation.

Feature E2. A plurality of movable elements having decorations (for example, the movable body 360 and the decorations 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine and driving units (for example, the motor 381 and the solenoid 420) for driving the decorations. A game machine comprising a production device (for example, a first movable production device 300, a second movable production device 400, a third movable production device 803, and a fourth movable production device 804),
Operation means (operation buttons 721 of the effect button device 40) operated by the player,
Effect execution means for executing an operation-responsive effect (second special effects A to D) by operating a decorative body of the movable effect device targeting one of the movable effect devices when the operation means is operated. (The function of executing the second special effect A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143),
When the operation corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the operation of the operating means, one of the plurality of movable effect devices is operated in the current operation corresponding effect before the decoration starts to operate. Teaching means for teaching the player the movable effect device (light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination part 24, interlocking display area CE of the pattern display device 253, notification / effect A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for guidance display by the MPU 912 of the control device 143.

A configuration in which the movable effect device executes the operation corresponding effect based on the player's operation of the operation means is preferable in terms of prompting the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, and the movable effect device may be out of sight, and the opening of the operation corresponding effect may be overlooked. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive effect is accompanied by the movement of the ornaments and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operated are used together, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become conspicuous. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, the movable effect that is the target of the current operation corresponding effect is performed before the decoration body starts to operate. A device is taught. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight, and to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive presentation.

Feature E3. A plurality of movable elements having decorations (for example, movable body 360 and decoration 410) provided so as to be visible from the front of the game machine and driving units (for example, motor 381 and solenoid 420) for driving the decorations. A gaming machine comprising a production device (for example, a first movable production device 300, a second movable production device 400, a third movable production device 803, and a fourth movable production device 804),
Operation means operated by the player (the operation button 721 of the effect button device 40);
When the operating means is operated, an effect is executed to execute an operation corresponding effect (second special effects A to D) by operating the decorative body of the movable effect device with any one of the movable effect devices as an operation target. Means (the function of executing the second special effect A to D by the MPU 912 of the notification / effect control device 143),
When the operation-corresponding effect is executed by the effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means, the movable effect device is operated before the decoration body starts to operate after the operation of the operation means is started. Teaching means (light emitting block 725 of the effect button device 40, light emitting parts LT1 to LT14 of the annular illumination part 24, pattern display device 253 A game machine characterized by comprising an interlocking display area CE and a function of executing guidance display processing by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143).

According to the feature E3, the configuration in which the movable effect device executes the operation corresponding effect based on the player's operation of the operation means is preferable in terms of encouraging the player to actively participate in the game. However, in such a configuration, the distance between the operating means and the movable effect device becomes long, and the movable effect device may be out of sight, and the opening of the operation corresponding effect may be overlooked. In view of the fact that the operation-responsive effect is accompanied by the movement of the ornaments and has a strong impact at the beginning, the occurrence of such oversight is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In particular, when a plurality of movable effect devices that can be operated are used together, there is a concern that such inconvenience will become conspicuous. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means, the current time period from the start of the operation of the operation means to the start of the movement of the decoration body is A movable effect device that is an object to be operated in the operation corresponding effect is taught. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned oversight, and to preferably exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention by the operation-responsive presentation.

Feature E4. An operation detection means (detection sensor 791) for detecting that the operation means operated by the player has reached a predetermined detection position (first detection position CP1),
After the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position, the effect execution means has a predetermined start condition (arrival at the thirteenth detection position CP13 within the standby period or progress) is established, it is configured to execute the operation corresponding effect,
The teaching means is configured to perform the teaching from when the operation detection means detects that the operation means has reached the predetermined detection position until the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The game machine described.

According to the feature E4, the operation target is taught from the time when the operating means reaches the predetermined detection position and the conditions for executing the performance corresponding to the operation are satisfied until the condition for starting the performance corresponding to the operation is satisfied. As a result, the effect shown in feature E3 can be exhibited favorably.

Feature E5. The operation direction of the operation means is defined to be a predetermined direction,
The teaching means performs the teaching based on the fact that the operation means reaches a specific position (for example, a second predetermined position CP2 to a thirteenth predetermined position CP13) behind the predetermined detection position in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by having means.

According to the feature E5, when the operation means is operated in a predetermined direction, the execution condition of the operation-corresponding effect→teaching of the action target. For example, even if the player who does not expect the instruction stops the operation after reaching the predetermined detection position, the operation corresponding effect is executed, so that the needs of various players can be met. In other words, it is possible to reduce the chances of giving the player the impression that the teaching function is troublesome.

It should be noted that, when compared with the configuration in which the conditions for execution of instruction → operation corresponding effect are established in accordance with the operation of the operation means, the operation is interrupted before reaching the predetermined detection position by revealing the operation corresponding effect from the content of the instruction. This is advantageous in that it does not cause inconvenience such as

Feature E6. The teaching means guides the player's line of sight from the operation means to the movable effect device that is the target of the current action by lighting a route connecting the operation means and the action target. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E5, characterized in that it is configured to instruct a player.

According to the feature E6, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the action target by lighting the route that connects the operation means and the action target, so the concerns shown in the feature E3 and the like can be eliminated favorably. be able to.

Feature E7. The teaching means includes a plurality of light emitting points (the first light emitting part LT1 to the fourteenth light emitting part LT14 in the annular illumination part 24 and the interlocking display area CE in the pattern display device 253) arranged on the route, and the operation means and a shift means for shifting the light emitting point to be lighted toward the movable effect device that is the target of the current operation, and the shift of the light emitting target teaches the player the target of the operation. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by:

As shown in feature E7, by adopting a configuration in which the light-emission targets of the light-emitting locations arranged on the route are shifted, the guidance function shown in feature E6 can be exhibited favorably.

Feature E8. The game machine according to feature E7, wherein the shift means performs the shift in conjunction with displacement of the operation means in the operation direction of the operation means.

According to feature E8, by interlocking the movement of the operation means and the shift of the light emitting target, the player can arbitrarily control the shift speed while suppressing the complication of the operation.

Feature E9. The operating means is switchable between a first form and a second form having a longer operation stroke than the first form,
The game according to feature E8, characterized by comprising switching means for switching the operation means to the second mode before the operation suggestion of the operation means is performed when the operation corresponding performance is executed. machine.

As shown in feature E8, in the configuration in which the movement of the operation means and the shift of the light emission target are linked, the cooperation between the two can be strengthened by extending the operation stroke of the operation means in advance. In addition, since the operations of the operating means are often executed with great vigor, there is a possibility that the instruction period will be extremely shortened due to cooperation. In this regard, if the operation stroke is extended, the teaching period can be increased, and the missing of the teaching can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E10. Characteristic features E7 to E9 characterized in that the shift speed of the light emitting part by the shift means is changed so that it is relatively slow on the operation means side and relatively fast on the movable effect device side. The game machine according to any one of.

As shown in feature E10, if the shift speed is slow on the operation means side and the shift speed is fast on the movable effect device side, it is possible to prevent the teaching period from becoming unnecessarily long and to prevent the teaching from being overlooked. can be suppressed.

Feature E11. The teaching means is configured to cause a light emitting part (second light emitting part LT2) closest to the operating means among the plurality of light emitting parts to emit light when the operating means reaches the predetermined detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features E7 to E10, characterized in that

When the operation means is operated, there is a high possibility that the player's attention is directed to the operation means in order to aim. Therefore, in the case of teaching, the player's attention can be guided to the teaching means by arranging that the light-emitting portion closest to the operation means is first illuminated.

Feature E12. Characteristic features E7 to E11, characterized in that the light-emitting part to be shifted by the shift means is partly shared on the side of the operation means in each route connecting the operation means and each of the operation targets. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in feature E12, if the routes for teaching partially overlap on the operating means side, the initial light-emitting point is shared for all teachings, and it is possible to preferably prevent the missed start of teaching.

Feature E13. The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E12, wherein when the operation corresponding effect is started during teaching by the teaching means, the teaching ends. .

According to the feature E13, by directing the player's attention to the instruction, it is possible to suppress an increase in the chances of overlooking the operation-responsive presentation.

Feature E14. An operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation means;
During either the first half or the latter half of the period from when the operation suggestion is made by the operation suggestion means until the operation effective period of the operation means elapses, the teaching by the teaching means is performed based on the operation of the operation means. and the other is a teaching non-corresponding period in which the teaching is not performed even if the operation means is operated. game machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player can select whether or not to teach by himself/herself without complicating the configuration excessively. This is preferable in terms of improving the player's satisfaction.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature may be changed as follows. That is, "characteristics E3 to E13 characterized in that a teaching start period in which the teaching is started by the teaching means elapses before an operation effective period of the operating means elapses. The gaming machine described in any one of ." is also possible.

Feature E15. The effect execution means is configured to execute the operation corresponding effect by displacing the decorative body of the movable effect device to be operated from the effect standby position to the effect execution position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E3 to E14, wherein the performance execution positions of the decorations do not overlap each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Since the performance execution positions of the decorations of the movable production devices do not overlap each other, there is a high possibility that the movement of the decorations will be overlooked when the player is watching the movable production device which is not the object of operation. By applying the technical ideas shown in feature E3 and the like to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the reduction in the impact of the operation-responsive presentation due to overlooking the movement of the decoration.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas shown in features E3 to E15 to features E1 to E2.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features E1 to E15 may be applied to the groups A to D described above.

<Feature group F>
The following feature group F is "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature F1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive effect (for example, a sixth special effect) based on the fact that the operation means is operated during a predetermined operation valid period. A gaming machine that
switching means for switching the operating means from the first mode to a second mode having a larger operation stroke than the first mode by displacing the operating portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
Under the condition that the operating means is in the first form, the operating section is displaced to a predetermined position (for example, maximum pressing position) on the far side in the predetermined direction from the standby position of the operating section in the first form. holding means (holding mechanism 795) for holding the return of the operation unit positioned at the predetermined position to the standby position when
A gaming machine characterized in that the reservation is released when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature F1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. Here, increasing the amount of displacement of the operating portion is advantageous in enhancing the impact when switching to the second mode. However, simply increasing the amount of displacement may make it difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second mode. This is not preferable because it may cause malfunction of the operating means. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operation unit is held at a predetermined position on the back side of the standby position in the first mode, thereby allowing the user to switch to the second mode. The amount of displacement at the time of switching can be earned. As a result, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention even more preferably while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

Feature F2. an operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation section to a player before switching when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means;
The retaining means is configured to restrict displacement of the operating portion from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating portion is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating portion according to the suggestion by the operation suggesting portion. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by:

According to the feature F2, by suggesting the operation of the operation unit before switching to the second mode, and holding the operation unit displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation at a predetermined position, the operation shown in the feature F1 is performed. The effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature F3. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (operation button 721) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the fact that the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period. A gaming machine comprising
switching means for switching the operating means from the first mode to a second mode having a larger operation stroke than the first mode by displacing the operating portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
Under the condition that the operating means is in the first form, the operating section is displaced to a predetermined position (for example, maximum pressing position) on the far side in the predetermined direction from the standby position of the operating section in the first form. a regulating means (hold mechanism 795) for regulating displacement in the opposite direction of the operating portion positioned at the predetermined position when the
A gaming machine, wherein the regulation by the regulation means is canceled when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature F3, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened, and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, increasing the amount of displacement of the operating portion is advantageous in enhancing the impact when switching to the second mode. However, simply increasing the amount of displacement may make it difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means in the second mode. This is not preferable because it may cause malfunction of the operating means. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, as a preliminary operation before switching to the second mode, the operation unit is held at a predetermined position on the back side of the standby position in the first mode, thereby allowing the user to switch to the second mode. The amount of displacement at the time of switching can be earned. As a result, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of improving the degree of attention even more preferably while resolving the above-mentioned structural concerns.

Feature F4. an operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation section to the player before the switching when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means;
The restricting means restricts displacement of the operating portion from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating portion is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating means according to the suggestion by the operation suggesting means. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by:

According to the feature F4, by suggesting the operation of the operation unit before switching to the second mode and holding the operation unit displaced to a predetermined position by the player's operation at a predetermined position, the operation shown in the feature F3 is performed. The effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature F5. The restricting means is switchable between a restricting state that restricts displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction and a permitting state that allows displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction,
The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the regulation means is switched to the regulation state when the operation suggestion is performed by the operation suggestion means.

If the control means is configured to switch to the restricted state when the operation suggestion is made by the operation suggesting means, even if the responsiveness for switching to the restricted state is not excessively high, the operation → arrival at the predetermined position can be minimized. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid delaying the timing of enabling the regulation.

Feature F6. When the operating means is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggesting means, the effect executing means uses a rendering device (for example, a pattern display device 253) provided at a position different from the operating means to produce the operation corresponding effect. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or feature F5, comprising means for executing

When the operation unit is held at a predetermined position, the player's line of sight is guided to once turn toward the production device, thereby suppressing the subsequent behavior (switching to the second mode) from the movement of the regulating means from being exposed. can.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F3, further comprising means for displacing the operating portion to the predetermined position when the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means.

As shown in this feature, if the operation unit is forcibly displaced to a predetermined position before switching to the second mode, the effect shown in feature F1, etc., compared to a configuration that depends on the player's operation, for example. Opportunities to demonstrate can be suitably secured.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein the predetermined position is the deepest position of the operation unit in the predetermined direction.

If the predetermined position is equal to the deepest position, as shown in feature F8, the effects shown in feature F1 and the like can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature F9. The operation means includes the operation portion, a base portion (movable base 741) disposed on the back side of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and configured to be movable relative to the operation portion (movable base 741); an operation unit including an urging portion (coil spring 745) that is disposed between the operation portion and the base portion and that urges the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
the restricting means restricts the displacement of the operating portion in the opposite direction against the biasing force of the biasing portion;
The switching means has a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
Simultaneously with the start of displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism or during displacement of the operation unit in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism, the regulation by the regulation means is released. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F8, characterized in that:

As shown in this feature, by arranging the movement after the restriction is released by the restricting means and the displacement of the operation unit by the drive mechanism in parallel, the hardening shown in feature F3 etc. A decrease in responsiveness can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F10. The switching means comprises a motor (stepping motor 753) which is a drive source of the drive mechanism, and a control section (MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143) for driving and controlling the motor,
A period during which the operating unit is displaced in the opposite direction by the drive mechanism and a period during which the operating section is displaced in the opposite direction by the biasing force of the biasing section partially overlap each other. The gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that

As shown in this feature, by arranging the movement after the restriction is released by the restricting means and the displacement of the operation unit by the drive mechanism in parallel, the hardening shown in feature F3 etc. A decrease in responsiveness can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F11. an operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation section to the player before the switching when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means;
The restricting means restricts displacement of the operating portion from the predetermined position in the opposite direction when the operating portion is displaced to the predetermined position by operating the operating means according to the suggestion by the operation suggesting means. and
The switching means switches the operation means to the second mode based on the fact that the operation portion is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the operation portion reaches the predetermined position, and the operation portion switches to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F10, wherein switching to the second mode is not performed when the predetermined position is not reached.

In a configuration that suggests an operation of the operation part and causes the operation part to be displaced to a predetermined position by the operation, whether or not the predetermined position is reached depends on the player's operation. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which switching to the second mode is avoided when the predetermined position is not reached, it is possible to prevent the effects shown in feature F1 and the like from being successfully exhibited. can.

Feature F12. an operation suggestion means for suggesting an operation of the operation section to a player before switching when the operation means is switched from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means;
The effect execution means has means for executing a predetermined effect as the operation corresponding effect based on the fact that the operation part is operated according to the suggestion by the operation suggestion means and the operation part is displaced to the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature F11, characterized by:

As shown in this feature, if a predetermined effect (operation-corresponding effect) is executed upon arrival at a predetermined position, the preparation for switching to the second mode is completed when the player operates the operation unit aiming at the predetermined effect. It will be done. With such a configuration, the effects shown in the feature F1 and the like can be favorably exhibited.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas shown in the features F3 to F12 to the features F1 to F2.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features F1 to F12 may be applied to the features A to E described above.

<Characteristic group G>
The following feature group G is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the fact that the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period. A gaming machine comprising
The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first form,
The production executing means is
switching means for switching the operating means from the first mode to the second mode;
A first special effect (a non-interlocking effect of the third movable effect device 803) and a second special effect, which are the operation corresponding effects, based on the operation of the operation unit after switching to the second mode by the switching means. (interlocking effect of third movable effect device 803);
a return means for returning the operation means to the second mode when the first special effect is executed by the special effect means.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. When the operation unit is operated after switching the operation means to the second mode, either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though the expectations for the second special effect are aroused, there is a concern that the impression that the second mode→operation was useless will remain. In this case, even if the operation means is switched to the second mode and the operation is urged, there is a concern that the chances of the operation being performed will decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the operation means returns to the second form when the first special effect is executed. By enabling the re-operation in the second form, it is possible to leave the expectation for the opportunity of generating the highly anticipated operation-responsive effect. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and increasing attention to the game using the operation means.

Feature G2. Information acquisition means (MPU 602 of main control unit 162 executes winning processing for operation openings) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning at operation openings 83a and 83b) function) and
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (holding ball storage area 632 provided in RAM 604 of main controller 162);
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
Based on the fact that the result of determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the game state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the game state (opening/closing execution mode);
An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect execution means (notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 142) for executing an operation-responsive effect (for example, an operation-responsive effect such as a first special effect) based on the fact that the operation unit is operated during the operation valid period. A gaming machine comprising
The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first form,
The production executing means is
switching means for switching the operating means from the first mode to the second mode;
Based on the operation of the operation unit after switching to the second mode by the switching means, the operation corresponding effect is a first special effect (third movable effect) with a relatively low degree of expectation, which is the transition corresponding result. a special effect means for executing either a non-interlocking effect of the device 803) or a second special effect (interlocking effect of the third movable effect device 803) with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the transition correspondence;
a return means for returning the operation means to the second mode when the first special effect is executed by the special effect means.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature G2, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. When the operation unit is operated after the operation means is switched to the second form, a first special effect with a relatively low degree of expectation as a result of the transition and a second special effect with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the transition. is executed. Here, if the first special effect occurs even though the expectations for the second special effect are aroused, there is a concern that the impression that the second mode→operation was useless will remain. In this case, even if the operation means is switched to the second mode and the operation is urged, there is a concern that the chances of the operation being performed will decrease. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the operation means returns to the second form when the first special effect is executed. By enabling the re-operation in the second form, it is possible to leave the expectation for the opportunity of generating the highly anticipated operation-responsive effect. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences and increasing attention to the game using the operation means.

Feature G3. The special effect means is a first execution means,
The effect execution means performs the second special effect (interlocking effect of the third movable effect device 803) based on the operation of the operation unit after the operation means is returned to the second form by the return means. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, further comprising a second execution means for executing.

As shown in this feature, when the first special effect on the disadvantageous side is executed, the second special effect can be generated by returning to the second mode → re-operating, so that the first special effect is performed. It is possible to suppress the rapid decrease in the degree of attention to the game of the player who expects the second special effect when it occurs.

Feature G4. Any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the operation means is configured to be in the first mode when the second special effect is executed by the special effect means. The game machine described.

As a configuration for avoiding returning to the second mode when the second special performance on the advantageous side is executed, there is a configuration that can return to the second mode only when the first special performance on the disadvantageous side is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the degree of attention to the game when the first special effect is executed.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that a displacement speed of the operating unit can be changed when the operating means is switched from the first mode to the second mode. .

By diversifying the displacement speed of the operation part when switching the operation means from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to suitably suppress monotonous return motion.

Feature G6. It is characterized by comprising switching means for switching a displacement speed of the operating portion when the operating means is brought into the second mode by the returning means from a first speed to a second speed faster than the first speed. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

As shown in this feature, by securing the driving period at a low speed (first speed), it is possible to suitably suppress overlooking the movement of the operation unit.

Feature G7. The return means is configured to start the return operation of the operation means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the earlier the timing at which the predetermined start condition is established, the longer the displacement period at the first speed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to secure a driving period at low speed (first speed) as long as possible. As a result, the effect shown in feature G6 can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature G8. Regardless of the timing at which the predetermined start condition is established, the first speed and the The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, wherein switching to the second speed is performed.

It is preferable to increase the driving time at low speed as shown in the characteristic G6 and the like in order to improve the player's satisfaction. However, delaying the progress of the presentation by such a function causes excessive diversification of the progress pattern of the presentation. In this regard, as shown in this feature, regardless of the timing at which the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the period from the start of the game cycle to the completion of the return to the second mode is restricted to be the same. By keeping it, the above concerns can be dispelled.

Feature G9. A displacement speed of the operation portion when the operation means is set to the second form by the return means is slower than a displacement speed of the operation part when the operation means is set to the second form by the switching means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Promptly switching to the second form for the first time is preferable for enhancing the impact. By making the required switching period for the first time and the required switching period for the second time different, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the switching to the second mode has simply occurred twice. In particular, by differentiating the second switching to the second form so that the required period is longer than the first switching to the second form, it is possible to earn a period of time to follow the movement at the time of return and play the game. It is preferable in terms of improving the satisfaction level of users.

Feature G10. The operation means includes the operation portion, a base portion (movable base 741) disposed on the back side of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and configured to be displaceable relative to the operation portion, and an operation unit including an urging portion (coil spring 745) that is disposed between the operation portion and the base portion and that urges the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The switching means has a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
The base portion is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation portion arranged at a predetermined detection position,
The effect executing means can execute the operation corresponding effect when it is determined that the operation unit has reached the predetermined detection position based on the detection information from the detection sensor,
The return means is configured to operate the drive mechanism to return to the second form when it is determined that the operation unit has deviated from the predetermined detection position based on detection information from the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9 characterized by:

As shown in this feature, if it is configured to start the return operation when it is detected that it is out of the predetermined detection position, the timing when the player releases the operation unit and the start of the return operation. Correlation with timing can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the operation means even when the user takes his or her hand off the operation unit.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in features G1 to G10 may be applied to the groups A to F described above.

<Characteristic group H>
The following feature group H is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature H1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising variable means (a notification/effect control device 143 and a lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation part to one of a plurality of positions after the operation part is operated.

According to the feature H1, after the special effect is executed by operating the operating section, the operating section is displaced to any of a plurality of positions by releasing the operating section from the operating section. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the displacement destination (return destination) of the operation unit can be changed according to the situation, it is possible to suitably suppress a rapid decrease in attention to the operation means triggered by the operation.

Feature H2. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the execution mode);
An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
Variable means (notification/production control device 143 and lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation unit to any of a plurality of positions;
a position determination means for determining a position to which the operation portion is displaced by the variable means according to a determination result by the transition determination means.

According to the characteristic H2, the position of the operation unit may be changed to the position determined according to the determination result by the transition determining means. In this way, if the displacement destination of the operation unit can be changed according to the determination result, the player's attention is urged to which position the operation means is displaced, contributing to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. can.

Feature H3. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the result of the jackpot) etc.) and
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the execution mode);
An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
an operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen;
Variable means (notification/production control device 143 and lift mechanism 785) for displacing the operation unit to any of a plurality of positions after the operation unit is operated;
a position determination means for determining a position to which the operation portion is displaced by the variable means according to a determination result by the transition determination means.

According to the feature H3, after the special effect is executed by operating the operating section, the operating section is displaced to any of a plurality of positions by releasing the operating section. This position is determined according to the result of determination by the transition determining means. By adopting a configuration in which the displacement destination (return destination) of the operation unit can be changed according to the determination result in this way, it is possible to suitably suppress a rapid decrease in attention to the operation means triggered by the operation.

Feature H4. Any one of characteristics H1 to H3, wherein the operation unit is arranged at a position other than any one of the plurality of positions, and then arranged at any one of the plurality of positions. 1. The game machine described in 1.

When the position of the operating portion is changed by the variable means, the operating portion is first placed at a position other than any of the plurality of positions described above, and then placed at any of the plurality of positions. , it is possible to prevent the behavior of the operation unit from being difficult to understand.

Feature H5. The plurality of positions are set so as to line up in the predetermined direction,
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the operation stroke of the operation part differs depending on the position where the operation part is arranged.

According to the feature H5, not only the change in the appearance of the position of the operation unit, but also the difference in the operation stroke when the operation is actually performed makes it possible to emphasize the difference in each position.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the plurality of positions includes a position before the operation.

As shown in the feature H6, if a plurality of positions includes the position before the operation, it is possible to realize diversification of effects without excessively increasing the number of the plurality of positions.

Feature H7. The plurality of positions include a first position that is an initial position and a second position that has a larger operation stroke than the first position,
The variable means is a first variable means,
a second variable means for switching the operation means from a first mode in which the operation portion is in the first position to a second mode in which the operation portion is in the second position;
The first variable means shifts the operation section to the plurality of positions after the operation when the operation section is operated under the condition that the operation means is in the second form by the second variable means. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that it is configured to be displaced in any one of the above.

As shown in this feature, if the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened, and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, in a situation where the player's attention is directed to the operation means by switching to the second mode, by changing the position of the operation unit by the first variable means, the change is not overlooked by the player. It is possible to suitably reduce the chance of being

Feature H8. A displacement speed of the operating section when switching from the first configuration to the second configuration by the second variable means, and a displacement speed when the operating section is arranged at one of the plurality of positions by the first variable section. The game machine according to feature H7, characterized in that the displacement speed of the operation unit is different.

As shown in the feature H7, when the form change of the operating means occurs continuously, it is not preferable in terms of increasing the degree of attention if the form change is simply repeated. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by providing a difference between the displacement speed of the operating portion when the shape is changed before the operation and the displacement speed of the operating portion when the shape is changed after the operation, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. .

Feature H9. The displacement speed of the operating part when switching from the first form to the second form by the second varying means is higher than the displacement speed when the operating part is arranged at one of the plurality of positions by the first varying means. The game machine according to feature H7, characterized in that it is constructed so that the displacement speed of the operating portion is lower.

As shown in the feature H7, when the form change of the operation means occurs continuously, it is not preferable to increase the impression that the form change is merely repeated, in order to improve the degree of attention. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by providing a difference so that the displacement speed of the operating portion in the form change after the operation is slower than the displacement speed of the operation portion in the form change before the operation, such inconveniences can be avoided. can suppress the occurrence of In the transformation after the operation, since the degree of expectation may differ depending on the arrival position, by making the displacement slowly on purpose, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation.

Feature H10. The effect execution means includes means for executing a special effect, which is the operation-responsive effect, based on the operation of the operation unit arranged at one of the plurality of positions by the first variable means,
Characteristic feature H7 to characteristic feature H9, characterized in that the position where the operation unit is arranged by the first variable means is defined so as to be a position correlated with the special effect executed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in feature H10, the position at which the operation unit is arranged by the first variable means is defined so as to be a position correlated with the special effect executed by the effect executing means, thereby giving a connection to the effect. be able to. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H11. Any one of features H1 to H10, further comprising stopping means for stopping the operation portion at the operation position before the operation portion is displaced to one of the plurality of positions by the variable means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the configuration of delaying the displacement of the operation by the variable means as shown in the feature H11, it is possible to prevent the movement of the operation unit after the operation from being hidden behind the player's hand and becoming difficult to see.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in feature H1 to feature H11 may be applied to the feature groups A to G described above.

<Characteristic group I>
The following characteristic group I is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Features I1. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result)) a function to execute a lottery, etc.);
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the execution mode);
A game device (production button device 40) provided in the front part (front door frame 14) of the game machine and capable of switching between a plurality of modes having different appearances;
and switching means for switching the mode of the gaming machine in accordance with the number of special information stored in the obtained information storage means.

According to feature I1, the form of the gaming device provided on the front face of the gaming machine is switched in accordance with the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the gaming machine changes as the game progresses. By changing the form of the game device provided at a position close to the player in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the game is progressing and to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. Information acquiring means (winning process for operating openings in main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to operating openings 83a and 83b);
Acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area in main controller 162) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result)) a function to execute a lottery, etc.);
The game state is changed to a special game state (open/close) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition correspondence result indicating that the transition determination means corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the execution mode);
Operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction;
An operation corresponding effect execution means (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a) and executing an operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit on the display screen,
The operation means has a plurality of standby positions set as standby positions of the operation unit,
A game machine, comprising a change means for changing the operation unit from one standby position to another standby position corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the obtained information storage means.

According to feature I2, the standby position of the operation unit provided on the front face of the game machine is changed in correspondence with the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. In other words, the form of the operating means changes as the game progresses. By changing the form of the operating means provided at a position close to the player as the game progresses in this way, the fact that the game is progressing is emphasized and the degree of attention to the game is dramatically improved. be able to.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the plurality of standby positions are set so as to line up in the predetermined direction.

It is preferable to increase the number of standby positions of the operation unit in terms of realizing diversification. However, if the standby position is set indiscriminately, it becomes difficult to ensure the strength of the operating means, and there is concern that this may be a factor in reducing the reliability of the operating means. In this regard, by setting a plurality of standby positions shown in this feature so as to line up in a predetermined direction, such concerns can be eliminated favorably.

Feature I4. each of the plurality of standby positions is an operation standby position in which the operation unit can be operated;
The game according to feature I2 or feature I3, further comprising suggesting means for suggesting the operation of the operation unit to the player in a situation where the standby position of the operation unit is changed by the change unit. game machine.

By making it possible to operate the operation unit even when it is placed in any of a plurality of standby positions, the player's attention is focused on which standby position the operation suggestion is generated under. can be directed.

Feature I5. The game machine according to feature I4, wherein the change of the standby position by the change means is terminated based on the operation of the operation section.

By structuring that the change of the standby position by the change means is finally terminated based on the operation of the operation unit, it is possible to prompt the player's attention to the situation in which the operation suggestion occurs.

Feature I6. The changing means changes the operation stroke of the operation unit each time the number of special information preceding the special information that triggered the change by the changing means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases. The gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5, characterized by having means for changing the position of the operation part by extending the .

As shown in this feature, each time the number of preceding special information decreases, by changing the position of the operation part so as to extend the operation stroke of the operation part, the player can determine how long the expansion of the operation stroke continues. can draw attention. Here, since the number of special information that can be stored is limited, there is a practical upper limit to the extension of the operation stroke. This will increase the attention to the relationship with the initial form of the change).

Feature I7. The changing means reduces the operation stroke of the operation each time the number of special information preceding the special information triggered by the changing means among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means decreases. A gaming machine according to feature I4 or feature I5, characterized by having means for changing the position of the operation unit so as to cause the operation part to move.

As shown in this feature, each time the number of preceding special information decreases, the position of the operation unit is changed so that the operation stroke of the operation unit is reduced. can draw attention. Here, since the number of special information that can be stored is limited, there is a substantial lower limit to the reduction of operation strokes. This will increase the attention to the relationship with the initial form of the change).

Feature I8. A notification means (holding display area NE) for notifying information indicating the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Any one of features I2 to I7, wherein the changing means changes the position of the operation unit at the timing when the information notified by the notifying means is updated. The gaming machine described in .

If the position of the operation unit is changed at the timing when the information notified by the notification means is updated, the correlation between the movement of the operation means and the number of special information can be strengthened. As a result, the operation means substantially has a function as a notification means, and it becomes possible to easily perceive that the game has progressed in a situation in which the operation means is focused.

Feature I9. a first state in which the position of the operation unit and the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are linked; and the position of the operation unit and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I8, further comprising switching means for switching to a second state in which numbers are not linked.

As shown in feature I9, the number of pieces of special information and the position of the operation unit can be switched between interlocking and non-interlocking, so that the original function of the operation means (the function as a trigger for the operation-response effect) is prevented from being restricted. It can be conveniently avoided.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features I2 to I9 to feature I1.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features I1 to I9 may be applied to the above group of features A to H.

<Characteristic group J>
The following characteristic group J is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for shooting game balls into the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature J1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (notification/effect control device 143 and display A gaming machine comprising a control device 142),
When a predetermined switching condition (development to the ready-to-win display in the game round related to the first special effect) is satisfied, the operation means switches from the first mode to the second mode in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first mode. It is possible to switch between two forms,
The production executing means is
an operation suggesting means (a function of executing an operation suggesting process in the MPU 912 of the notification/production control device 143) for suggesting the operation of the operating means to the player when the form of the operating means is switched to the second form; ,
means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation unit is operated in a situation in which the operation valid period is in effect and the operation means is in the second mode;
and shift means for shifting the predetermined detection position in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction before the suggestion by the operation suggestion means is started.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature J1, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second form, the operation is suggested to the player. Prior to this suggestion, the predetermined detection position that triggers the special effect is shifted in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. As a result, it is possible to make the operation strokes necessary for executing the special effects smaller than it looks while the operation strokes are greatly enlarged in appearance, thereby improving the degree of attention to the game and making the operation easier. It is possible to suitably suppress the difficulty.

Feature J2. The shift means sets the predetermined detection position to the first detection position in the first mode, and sets the predetermined detection position to the front side in the predetermined direction from the first detection position in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the predetermined detection position is shifted so as to have two detection positions.

By shifting the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position along with the switching from the first form to the second form, it is necessary to execute the special effect while greatly expanding the operation stroke in terms of appearance. operation stroke can be made smaller than it looks. As a result, the effect shown in feature J1 can be favorably exhibited.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature may be changed as follows. That is, "as the predetermined detection positions, a first detection position and a second detection position on the nearer side in the predetermined direction than the first detection position are provided, and the shift means is in the first form The predetermined detection position is set as the first detection position, and in the second embodiment, the predetermined detection position is set as the second detection position. gaming machine." may be used.

Feature J3. A direction in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is expanded by switching from the first configuration to the second configuration, and a direction in which the predetermined detection position is shifted along with switching from the first configuration to the second configuration. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that it has a configuration in which .

The configuration of the operating means by matching the direction in which the operation stroke is extended by switching from the first mode to the second mode with the direction in which the detection position is shifted by switching from the first mode to the second mode. complication can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J4. The shift means performs the shift so that an operation stroke for reaching the first detection position in the first mode and an operation stroke for reaching the second detection position in the second mode are the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3.

By making the same stroke for which the operation is detected in the first form and the second form, it is possible to suitably suppress deterioration in operability due to enhancement of the effect function.

Feature J5. The shift means is configured to shift the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position during a switching period of the operation means from the first mode to the second mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4 characterized by:

If the detection position is shifted during the switching period from the first mode to the second mode, the period of waiting for the shift can be eliminated, contributing to the smooth progress of the production.

Feature J6. A configuration in which the displacement of the operation unit when switching the operation means from the first mode to the second mode is synchronized with the shift of the predetermined detection position from the first detection position to the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that:

By synchronizing the displacement of the operation unit and the shift of the detection position, the shift waiting period can be eliminated, contributing to the smooth progress of the performance.

Feature J7. The operating means are
a base portion (movable base 741) disposed on the back side of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and capable of being displaced relative to the operation portion in the predetermined direction; the operation portion and the base portion; an operation unit (button unit 720) in combination with an urging portion (coil spring 745) disposed between and urging the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
By displacing the operation unit by the drive mechanism, switching between the first form and the second form is performed,
The base portion is provided with a detection sensor (detection sensor 791) that detects the operation portion positioned at the predetermined detection position, and the effect executing means is based on detection information from the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the game machine is configured to execute the special effect.

According to the feature J7, the first mode is switched to the second mode by displacing the operation unit including the operation portion, the base portion, and the biasing portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. At this time, by displacing the base portion (detection sensor) following the operation portion, the positional relationship between the operation portion and the detection sensor can be maintained. This makes it possible to make the same stroke for operation detection in the first form and the second form.

Feature J8. a resistance generating means for generating resistance against displacement of the operating portion to the inner side of the second detection position when the second form is set;
The second embodiment is characterized in that the operation stroke from the second detection position to the innermost position in the predetermined direction is larger than the operation stroke to reach the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7.

By increasing the operation stroke on the back side of the second detection position, the momentum of the operation unit can be weakened after the operation is detected. As a result, the operating means and the player's hands can be favorably protected.

Feature J9. The effect executing means enters a standby state for execution of the special effect based on the arrival of the operation unit at the second detection position, and in the standby state for execution, starts the special effect until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, characterized by having means for delaying.

When the special effect is started when the operating part reaches the second detection position, the operating part may remain unoperated to the innermost position. In this respect, as shown in this feature, even if the second detection position is reached, the special effect is not started immediately, but by delaying the start of the special effect, the above inconvenience occurs. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J10. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (notification/effect control device 143 and display A gaming machine comprising a control device 142),
When a predetermined switching condition (development to the ready-to-win display in the game round related to the first special effect) is established, the operation means switches from the first mode to the second mode in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first mode. It is possible to switch between two forms,
The predetermined detection position includes a first position and a second position that are different in the predetermined direction,
The effect executing means has means for setting the predetermined detection position to the first position in the first mode, and setting the predetermined detection position to the second position in the second mode. A game machine characterized by

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature J10, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, if a plurality of operation detection positions are selectively used depending on whether the player is in the first mode or the second mode, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in triggering the execution of the operation-responsive presentation.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features J1 to J9 to feature J10.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features J1 to J10 may be applied to the groups A to I described above.

<Characteristic group K>
The following feature group K is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Features K1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (function for executing processing for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit;
A game machine comprising a driving device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The driving device
Position specifying means (rotary encoder 792) for specifying the position of the operation unit in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is displaced in the predetermined direction based on the player's operation;
resistance variable means (stepping motor 753) for varying the operation resistance (resistance torque) against the displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction based on the position specified by the position specifying means. Characteristic game machine.

The resistance variable means amplifies the operation resistance so that the operation resistance is greater when the operation unit is located on the back side than when the operation unit is located on the front side in the predetermined direction. A game machine characterized by having a configuration.

As shown in this feature, if the position of the operation portion in the predetermined direction is specified when the operation portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, and the operation resistance is varied based on the specified position, the operation portion can be operated. The tactile change that occurs in the hand makes it possible to create novel performances that have never existed before.

Feature K2. The resistance variable means amplifies the operation resistance so that the operation resistance is greater when the operation unit is located on the back side than when the operation unit is located on the front side in the predetermined direction. The game machine according to feature K1, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

As shown in the feature K2, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the resistance increases on the far side, the impact during operation can be mitigated, contributing to the protection of the player's hands and the operation means.

Feature K3. The operation means is switchable between a first form and a second form in which the operation stroke of the operation unit is larger than that of the first form,
The position specifying means has means for specifying the position of the operation portion in the predetermined direction when the operation means is in the second configuration,
The resistance varying means is configured to change an operation resistance against displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction when the operation means is in the second form. The gaming machine described in K2.

For deformation-type buttons, the occurrence of deformation (second form) is often a good opportunity. Due to such circumstances, in the second mode, there is a high possibility that the operation unit will be operated vigorously. In such an operation, there is a concern that the impact on the hand or the operating means will increase. In this respect, as shown in the feature K3, if the operation resistance is amplified so that the operation resistance increases on the back side in a predetermined direction, the shock during operation is alleviated and the player's hand and the operation means are not affected. Contribute to protection.

Feature K4. The variable resistance means is configured such that the operation resistance generated by the operation unit is constant until the operation unit reaches a predetermined position, and after reaching the predetermined position, the operation resistance is changed according to the operation mode of the operation unit. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that it is configured to change the operation resistance generated by pressing the button.

As for the hardening type operation part, it is not preferable to know whether it is hard or not at the moment of touching. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the operation resistance is constant until reaching a predetermined position, and the operation resistance is changed on the back side of the predetermined position, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be preferably avoided. can be suppressed.

Feature K5. According to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the resistance variable means is configured such that the rate of increase in the operation resistance is greater on the back side than on the front side in the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

As for the hardening type operating portion, if the hardness is drastically changed on the far side, there is a high possibility that the player will misunderstand that the farthest position has been reached. In this regard, as shown in the present feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the rate of increase in manipulation resistance is greater on the back side than on the near side, the manipulation resistance will change smoothly, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed. In addition, it is preferable in terms of mitigating the impact when operating the operation unit to configure so that the increase rate of the operation resistance is higher on the back side than on the front side.

Feature K6. An operation determination means for determining an operation of the operation unit;
The effect execution means is configured to execute the operation corresponding effect when the operation determination means determines that the operation unit has been operated,
According to any one of features K1 to K5, the resistance varying means is configured to amplify the operation resistance when the operation determination means determines that the operation unit has been operated. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic K6, it is possible to prevent difficulty in reaching the position at which the operation determination is performed due to an increase in the operation resistance, while leaving room for enjoying the change in the operation resistance after the operation is detected.

Feature K7. The driving device
a calculating means for calculating a displacement speed of the operating portion in the predetermined direction;
The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, further comprising correction means for correcting the increase rate of the manipulation resistance according to the calculation result of the calculation means.

According to the feature K7, if the increase rate of the manipulation resistance is corrected according to the displacement speed of the manipulation portion, the following measures are possible. That is, when the displacement speed is high, the buffer function is strengthened by increasing the rate of increase in the manipulation resistance, and when the displacement speed is high, the rise of the manipulation resistance is hastened to cause changes in the manipulation resistance. You can avoid things that are difficult to understand.

Feature K8. The entire section in which the operation unit is displaced in the predetermined direction includes a corrected section in which the rate of increase is corrected by the correction means and a non-corrected section in which the rate of increase is not corrected by the correction means, and The game machine according to feature K7, wherein the non-correction section is set to the front side in the predetermined direction and the correction section is set to the back side in the operation direction.

As shown in this feature, by setting the non-correction section to the front side in the predetermined direction and the correction section to the back side in the operation direction, the player can specify the presence or absence of hardening at the moment the operation unit is touched. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K9. The game machine according to feature K8, wherein the calculation section in which the displacement speed of the operation unit is calculated by the calculation means is the non-correction section.

After dividing into a non-correction section and a correction section, the speed is calculated in the non-correction section, and the result is reflected in the correction section. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

Feature K10. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
Effect executing means (function for executing processing for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit;
A game machine comprising a driving device (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The driving device
speed calculation means for calculating a displacement speed of the operation unit in the predetermined direction when the operation unit is displaced in the predetermined direction based on the player's operation;
and resistance variable means for varying an operation resistance against displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction based on a calculation result of the speed calculation means.

As shown in the characteristic K10, by adopting a configuration in which the operation resistance generated in the operation unit changes according to the displacement speed (operation speed) of the operation unit, novel operability that has never existed before can be realized.

Feature K11. When the speed calculated by the speed calculation means is slower than a predetermined speed, the resistance variable means sets the manipulation resistance to a relatively small first manipulation resistance, and increases the speed calculated by the speed calculation means to the predetermined speed. The gaming machine according to feature K10, wherein the operation resistance is set to a relatively large second operation resistance when the speed is higher than the speed.

As shown in this feature, when the operation is performed slowly, the operation resistance is relatively small, and when the operation is performed vigorously, the operation resistance is relatively increased, thereby protecting the operation means. It can contribute to simplification of operation.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas shown for the features K1 to K9 to the above features K10 to K11.

Also, the technical ideas shown in the features K1 to K11 may be applied to the above group of features A to J.

<Characteristic group L>
The following feature group L is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature L1. Operation means (operation buttons 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward); ,
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing a process for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit. ,
The production executing means is
Switching means (the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) switches the mode of the operating means from the first mode to the second mode in which the operation stroke of the operating section is longer than the first mode when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. function to execute processing for mode switching in);
means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated in a situation where the operation means is in the second mode during the operation valid period,
When the operation unit is operated in a situation in which the operation unit is arranged in a position on the far side in the predetermined direction to stand by with respect to the operation unit and is in the second configuration. has a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts the operation portion from the back side in the predetermined direction,
The standby position of the contact portion can be changed in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in accordance with the switching from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means. A gaming machine characterized by:

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second mode, the position of the contact portion is changed and the operation portion is operated and displaced in a predetermined direction, so that the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operation unit. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is imminent. This is preferable in terms of facilitating the operation in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and in favorably exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Feature L2. Operation means (operation buttons 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward); ,
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing a process for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit. ,
The production executing means is
Switching means for switching the mode of the operating means from the first mode to the second mode with a longer operation stroke than the first mode when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied function to execute the processing of
means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated in a situation where the operation means is in the second mode during the operation valid period,
The operation means is arranged so as to stand by on the far side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operation section, and when the operation section is operated under the condition of the second mode, the operation section is operated. has a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts the portion from the back side in the predetermined direction and can be displaced in the predetermined direction together with the operation portion,
When the operation unit is operated in a situation in which the operation unit is arranged in a position on the far side in the predetermined direction to stand by with respect to the operation unit and is in the second configuration. a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts the operation portion from the back side in the predetermined direction and can be displaced in the predetermined direction together with the operation portion while maintaining the contact state;
The standby position of the contact portion can be changed in the predetermined direction and in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in accordance with the switching from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means. A gaming machine characterized by:

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in this feature, the impact of the operation means can be strengthened and attention can be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second mode, the position of the contact portion is changed and the operation portion is operated and displaced in a predetermined direction, so that the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operation unit. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is imminent. This is preferable in terms of facilitating the operation in the second form in which the operation stroke is extended, and in favorably exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

Feature L3. An operation determination means for determining an operation of the operation means;
The abutment portion is configured to abut on the operation portion after the operation portion passes through the determination position determined by the operation determination means or when the operation portion reaches the determination position in the second embodiment. The gaming machine described in L2.

By adopting a configuration in which the operation part and the contact part abut after the operation part passes through the determination position or when the operation part reaches the determination position, it is possible to indicate to the player that the operation has been completed.

Feature L4. The standby position of the contact portion is defined as an operation stroke in which the contact portion and the operation portion contact in the first configuration, and an operation stroke in which the contact portion and the operation portion contact in the second configuration. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that it has a configuration in which changes are made so that the values are the same.

As shown in this feature, the operation stroke in which the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact in the first configuration and the operation stroke in which the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact in the second configuration are the same. By changing the positions of the parts, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the operating means according to each form, and preferably avoid that the operation in one form becomes more difficult than the operation in the other form.

Feature L5. The operation means includes the operation portion, a base portion (movable base 741) provided on the back side of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and capable of being displaced relative to the operation portion in the predetermined direction, and the operation portion. and the base portion, and has an operation unit (button unit 720) combined with a biasing portion (coil spring 745) that biases the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. become,
The switching means has a drive mechanism (lift mechanism 785) that displaces the operation unit in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the contact portion is formed on the base portion.

As shown in this feature, if the operation unit is configured to be displaced by the drive mechanism, the switching between the first mode and the second mode described above can be suitably realized. Here, if an operation unit is configured by the operation portion, the base portion, and the biasing portion, and the operation unit is configured to be displaced, the base portion on which the contact portion is formed can also be displaced following the operation portion. Therefore, in each form, the contact stroke between the operating portion and the contact portion can be the same.

Feature L6. The drive mechanism has a motor (stepping motor 753) that displaces the operation unit in the opposite direction,
The switching means is configured to cause the motor to generate a resistance that prevents displacement of the operation unit in the predetermined direction during the second form,
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein in the second mode, the resistance generated in the motor is larger than the biasing force of the biasing unit.

In the second embodiment, the resistance generated in the motor is made larger than the biasing force of the biasing portion. Therefore, when the operating portion is operated in the second mode, it is possible to prevent the operating unit from being displaced in a predetermined direction without contact between the operating portion and the base portion. As a result, the effects shown in the feature L1 and the like can be favorably exhibited.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein a plurality of the abutment portions are formed so as to surround the central axis of the operation portion.

In the configuration in which the operation portion and the contact portion are in contact with each other in the second embodiment, there is concern that the posture of the operation portion may be disturbed at the time of contact, which may cause a problem such as catching. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the posture of the operation portion when the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact with each other. Suppressing the disturbance of the posture in this way is advantageous in achieving smooth movement of the operation unit even in a situation where the operation stroke is extended.

Feature L8. Operation means (operation buttons 721 of the production button device 40) having an operation portion (button unit 720) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward); ,
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing a process for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit. ,
Switching means for switching the mode of the operating means between a first mode and a second mode with a larger operation stroke than the first mode based on the player's adjustment operation function to execute the processing of
The operating means is arranged so as to stand by on the far side in the predetermined direction with respect to the operating section, and when the operating section is operated under the condition of the second mode, the operating section has a contact portion (movable base 741) that contacts from the back side in the predetermined direction and can be displaced in the predetermined direction together with the operation portion,
The standby position of the contact portion is changed in the predetermined direction along with switching from the first mode to the second mode by the switching means,
The operation stroke of contact between the contact portion and the operation portion in the first embodiment is the same as the operation stroke of contact between the contact portion and the operation portion in the second embodiment. A gaming machine, wherein a standby position of a contact portion is changed according to switching between the first mode and the second mode by the switching means.

If the operation means is configured to switch between the first form and the second form as shown in feature L8, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the operation means and encourage attention to be directed to the operation means itself. Here, when the operation means is in the second mode, the position of the contact portion is changed in a predetermined direction, and the operation portion is displaced in a predetermined direction by being operated, so that the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact with each other. touch. As a result, it is possible to convey a tactile change to the player through the operation unit. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation detection position has been reached or that the operation detection position is imminent. Further, the position of the contact portion is changed so that the operation stroke of contact between the operation portion and the contact portion in the first mode is the same as the operation stroke of contact between the operation portion and the contact portion in the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid that the operation in one form becomes more difficult than the operation in the other form, while the appearance of the operation means is greatly changed according to each form.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features L1 to L7 to feature L8.

Also, the technical ideas shown in the features L1 to L8 may be applied to the above group of features A to K.

<Characteristic group M>
The following feature group M is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature M1. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (operation button 721) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing a process for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit. ,
a number-of-times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the operation valid period;
period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position during the operation valid period;
The effect execution means determines that the number of repetitions of reaching the first detection position by the number-of-times determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, or that the period determination means determines that the second detection position has been reached. means for executing a special effect, which is the operation corresponding effect, when the determined period reaches a predetermined period;
A gaming machine, wherein the first detection position and the second detection position are set to be different positions in the predetermined direction.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation unit is hit repeatedly, the special effect is executed when the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. Such repeated hitting operations may give the player the impression that they are troublesome, but in the configuration shown in this feature, the operation unit is operated to the second detection position and maintained in that state, thereby substantially realizing the above-described operation. It is treated in the same way as when a repeated hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually hit the button repeatedly or to replace the repeated hits by pressing the button for a long period of time. This is preferable in favorably exhibiting the function of encouraging active participation in the game using the operating means.

Here, with respect to the operation means, there is a possibility that the operation mode is switched from repeated hits to long press due to fatigue or the like. At this time, unless the reception of the operation is quickly switched from the number of times determination to the period determination, the time lag increases the possibility that the effective period will be wasted. In this respect, as shown in this feature, by configuring the first detection position for determining the number of times and the second detection position for determining the period of time to be shifted in a predetermined direction (operation direction), continuous tapping at one detection position There is no need to distinguish between an operation and a long press operation. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the time lag in switching from the number of times determination to the period determination. As a result, it is possible to favorably exhibit the effect of promoting the operation of the operating means and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature M2. An operation means (production button device 40) having an operation portion (operation button 721) provided on the front surface of the game machine (front door frame 14) and operated by the player in a predetermined direction (downward);
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means (a function of executing a process for the first special effect by the MPU 912 of the notification/effect control device 143) for executing the operation corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit. ,
a number-of-times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit has repeatedly reached the first detection position during an operation valid period;
period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position during the operation valid period;
The effect execution means determines that the number of repetitions of reaching the first detection position by the number-of-times determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, or that the period determination means determines that the second detection position has been reached. means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the determined period reaches a predetermined period;
The gaming machine, wherein the second detection position is set to be further in the predetermined direction than the first detection position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation unit is hit repeatedly, the special effect is executed when the number of hits reaches the predetermined number. Such repeated hitting operations may give the player the impression that they are troublesome, but in the configuration shown in this feature, the operation unit is operated to the second detection position and maintained in that state, thereby substantially realizing the above-described operation. It is treated in the same way as when a repeated hit operation is performed. In other words, the player can choose whether to actually hit the button repeatedly or to replace the repeated hits by pressing the button for a long period of time. This is preferable in favorably exhibiting the function of encouraging active participation in the game using the operating means.

Here, with respect to the operation means, there is a possibility that the operation mode is switched from repeated hits to long press due to fatigue or the like. At this time, unless the acceptance of the operation is quickly switched from the number of times determination to the period determination, the time lag increases the possibility that the effective period will be wasted. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the second detection position for determining the period is shifted to the far side in the predetermined direction (operation direction) from the first detection position for determining the number of times, For example, there is no need to distinguish between repeated hits and long presses at one detection position. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the time lag in switching from the number of times determination to the period determination. As a result, it is possible to favorably exhibit the effect of promoting the operation of the operating means and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, since the operation stroke for the continuous pressing operation is shorter than the operation stroke for the long pressing operation, the above function does not make it difficult to perform the continuous pressing operation.

Feature M3. a first suggesting means for suggesting to the player that the operation unit has reached the first detection position by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit, and that the operation unit has reached the first detection position;
a second suggesting means for suggesting to the player that the operation unit has reached the second detection position by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit when the operation unit has reached the second detection position; The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2.

In the configuration where the determination of the number of hits and the determination of repeated hits are switched depending on the operation position of the operation unit as shown in the feature M1, etc., when each detection position is reached, a tactile change is transmitted to the hand touching the operation unit. , it is possible to clearly communicate that the sensor has reached the detection position.

Feature M4. The second detection position is set to be deeper in the predetermined direction than the first detection position,
The first suggesting means has a contact portion that contacts the operation portion from the far side in the predetermined direction when the operation portion reaches the first detection position. The gaming machine described in M3.

According to the feature M4, when the operation part reaches the first detection position and the contact part come into contact with each other in a predetermined direction, a tactile change can be transmitted through the operation part.

Feature M5. The contact portion is configured to follow displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and displace in the predetermined direction after contacting the operation portion at the first detection position. The gaming machine according to feature M4, characterized by:

After the operation portion and the contact portion come into contact at the first detection position, the operation portion and the contact portion are displaced together in a predetermined direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the operation portion from being displaced to the second detection position by the abutting portion, and to exhibit various effects shown in features M4 and M1. can be done.

Feature M6. The second suggesting means is configured to suggest that the operation unit has reached the second detection position by increasing the operation resistance in a stepwise manner when the operation unit reaches the second detection position. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5.

As shown in this feature, when the second detection position is reached, the operation resistance increases in a stepwise manner. It can be helpful to keep

Feature M7. The operating means are
the operating portion, a base portion (movable base 741) provided on the back side of the operating portion in the predetermined direction and configured to be relatively displaceable with the operating portion in the predetermined direction, and the operating portions and a base portion and having an urging portion (coil spring 745) that urges the operation portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (button unit 720);
a holder (holder unit 750) that holds the operation unit displaceably in the predetermined direction and the opposite direction,
When the operation portion is displaced to the first detection position due to the player's operation, the operation portion and the base portion are configured to contact each other in the predetermined direction. After abutting, the entire operation unit is displaced to the back side in the predetermined direction toward the second detection position in accordance with the operation of the operation portion. Or the gaming machine according to feature M2.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the operation portion reaches the first detection position, the operation portion and the base portion come into contact with each other and a tactile change occurs. By further continuing the operation, the operating portion, the base portion, and the biasing portion are displaced together in a predetermined direction toward the second detection position. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that the first detection position has been reached by a tactile change.

Feature M8. The base portion is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation portion that has reached the first detection position,
The number-of-times determination means is configured to determine whether or not the operation unit has reached the first detection position based on detection information from the detection sensor,
The period determination means receives detection information from the detection sensor indicating that the first detection position has been reached and the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position. The gaming machine according to feature M7, characterized in that it is configured to perform determination.

According to the feature M8, the number of times determination is made based on the detection information from the detection sensor. On the other hand, when the detection information indicating that the operation unit has reached the first detection position is received from the detection sensor and the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position, the period is determined. In this way, by incorporating the detection information for determining the number of times into the period determination, the period determination can be terminated immediately when the hand is released from the operation unit arranged at the second detection position. In other words, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of period determination while suppressing complication of the structure.

Feature M9. switching means for switching the form of the operation means between a first form and a second form in which the operation portion protrudes more than the first form by displacing the operation unit in the predetermined direction;
In the situation where the operation means is in the second mode, the effect executing means, when the number of repetitions determined by the number-of-times determination means to have reached the first detection position reaches a predetermined number of times, Alternatively, when the period determined by the period determining means to be located at the second detection position is a predetermined period, the special effect is executed,
The second detection position is set at a midway position of the operation stroke in the second form,
The game machine according to feature M7 or feature M8, further comprising means for increasing the operation resistance of the operation unit when the second detection position is reached.

The configuration in which the operation means is switched between the first mode and the second mode as shown in this feature is advantageous in terms of increasing the degree of attention to the operation means. Here, when the above-described special effect is generated in the second mode, it is assumed that the guideline for the long press operation becomes difficult to understand because the operation stroke is extended. Here, if the maximum pressed position is equal to the second detected position, the operation stroke at the time of long pressing becomes excessively large, which tends to give the player the impression that it is annoying. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, while setting the second detection position at a position in the middle of the operation stroke, by increasing the operation resistance when reaching the second detection position, the player can feel the second detection position. It can suggest that the detection position has been reached. With such a configuration, the above problem can be solved favorably.

Feature M10. The period determining means according to any one of features M1 to M9, wherein the period determination means is configured to start counting the period when the operation unit reaches the second detection position. game machine.

As shown in this feature, the responsiveness of the period count can be preferably improved by adopting a configuration in which the period count is started immediately upon arrival at the second detection position.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in the features M1 to M10 may be applied to the groups A to L described above.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 45) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area. A game machine that provides a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general prize winning port 81, etc.).

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 14... Front door frame, 27... Speaker part, 22... Window part, 24... Annular illumination part, 40... Production button device, 45... Game ball shooting handle, 80... Game board unit , 82... Variable winning device 83a...Upper operating port 83b...Lower operating port 87...Main display unit 142...Display control device 143...Notification/effect control device 162...Main control device 253...Design display device , 253a... display screen, 300... first movable effect device, 400... second movable effect device, 602... MPU, 603... ROM, 604... RAM, 701... operation block, 720... button unit, 721... operation button, 725 Light emitting block 741 Movable base 750 Holder unit 753 Stepping motor 785 Lift mechanism 791 Detection sensor 792 Rotary encoder 795 Hold mechanism 803 Third movable effect device 804 Third 4 movable production device, 912...MPU, 913...ROM, 914...RAM, AR1 to AR8...arrow image, CA...character image, CP...detection position, D...main display section, DL...display section for lower opening, DU . . . Display unit for upper operation port, EF .

Claims (5)

an operation means provided on the front surface of the game machine and having an operation unit operated by a player in a predetermined direction;
A gaming machine comprising an effect execution means for executing an operation-corresponding effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
a number-of-times determination means for determining the number of times the operation unit repeatedly reaches the first detection position during the operation valid period;
period determination means for determining a period during which the operation unit is positioned at the second detection position during the operation valid period;
The effect execution means determines that the number of repetitions of reaching the first detection position by the number-of-times determination means reaches a predetermined number of times, or that the period determination means determines that the second detection position has been reached. means for executing a special effect as the operation corresponding effect when the determined period reaches a predetermined period;
The gaming machine, wherein the second detection position is set to be further in the predetermined direction than the first detection position. a first suggesting means for suggesting to the player that the operation unit has reached the first detection position by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit, and that the operation unit has reached the first detection position;
a second suggesting means for suggesting to the player that the operation unit has reached the second detection position by a change in tactile sensation through the operation unit when the operation unit has reached the second detection position; The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein The second detection position is set to be deeper in the predetermined direction than the first detection position,
The first suggesting means has a contact portion that contacts the operation portion from a far side in the predetermined direction when the operation portion reaches the first detection position. Item 2. The gaming machine according to Item 2. The contact portion is configured to follow displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction and displace in the predetermined direction after contacting the operation portion at the first detection position. 4. The game machine according to claim 3, characterized by: The second suggesting means is configured to suggest that the operation unit has reached the second detection position by increasing the operation resistance in a stepwise manner when the operation unit reaches the second detection position. 5. The game machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4.

Images